Home

Symbol 9000g Reference Guide 5443606a - Rose

1. DAS e ARA A A E AE NAAA A AAA AAA AAA A NAAA kay 1 EL AO LAA NG Lo pL p qm p Ld TO HE Papag TA AE AAA See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 40 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 6 53 Key Mapping Continued eem ne E EEE Default State Decimal Decimal Di AE a E IA CN IS CH COS Aj E i A AAA EF T A m LO AS ER A A eC ls A O AE A 40m mg C qmm mo veo o a 16072 Ee pep See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 41 Table B 6 53 Key Mapping Continued VK Code ASCII Value Default State ae i 1 CH a IO CA kt T1 PF fe Ct lt fh CT Kk lt Lm CT tk fh CT T 1 ff m Lemos CT ULL m CT Th E C See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 42 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 6 53 Key Mapping Continued VK Code ASCII Value Default State Decimal Decimal gt 34 160477 5 ISI a PO e AAA fa fw a 1 om AA AA AO PA o
2. 006 Y m m n 6 a 5 3 pu a o e n w QS LEE Fa ____ gt bi Figure 2 5 5250 Emulator Keypad The 5250 emulator keypad is only used when the mobile computer is running the 5250 emulation software When the mobile computer is not running the 5250 emulation software the 5250 keypad functions are the same as a 53 key keypad ES Operating the MC9000 G 2 17 Table 2 5 5250 Emulator Descriptions CT Power red Green Red Dot Scan yellow Scroll Up and Down Scroll Left and Right SPACE BKSP Application Function blue i O Powers the mobile computer on and off Used to reset the mobile computer see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 Unassigned application function key See Appendix B Keypad Maps for mapping details ocan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger Moves up and down from one item to another Moves left and right from one item to another Exits the current operation Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters opace and backspace functions These keys can be assigned to an application Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights and the
3. 7 12 Ethernet connection 4 16 four slot ethernet cradle 1 6 EE es oh wae See ees ae 1 6 7 3 holster quick release 1 6 a nn ARO PATO 7 3 magnetic stripe reader 1 6 7 4 A AHE 7 18 installation 000 0000 7 19 magnetic stripe reading 7 22 power connection 7 20 serial connection 7 18 7 21 7 25 Dl IB Card s Za naba ada bowser 1 6 7 3 printer Cable 1 6 7 4 serais Gade wigan 8 ERA KG GRAN 1 6 7 3 shelf slide oo o o o 1 6 7 3 single slot serial USB cradle 7 31 single slot serial cradle LED indicators 1 11 single slot serial USB cradle 1 8 spare Datta 1 6 spare battery charger 7 16 power connection 7 17 A YAYA en 1 6 UBC adapter 0000 1 6 7 3 USB charger cable 1 6 7 4 wall mounting bracket 1 6 7 3 accessory keyboard 0 00 0 e eee 1 6 active tasks 2 0 eee 2 30 PON daa aoa Voci Ea ned de e ec aeons 5 16 using serial USB cradle 4 10 BUE cares ee aes oes eee ee cs 6 5 opi AAP ARRAN ES 6 7 6 17 BO MEMO M 3 3b AEG secar CIENI ausus we was bat ra 6 30 aiming options A 2 37 aiming the imager 00 000s 2 3 EH TEE E E E E cass 9 1 Client lesse 9 3 PATA ee errr 9
4. ymbol The Enterprise Mobility Company S Mm Ly Ly O EA Q D E KS KS ab E TE Lk te MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide 72 54436 06 Revision A December 2004 symbol Ba Ay AA The Enterprise Mobility Company 2004 by Symbol Technologies Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from Symbol This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an as is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis Symbol grants to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed program in a network without written p
5. EAP TLS Authentication Install View Certificates Figure 6 6 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab EAP TLS Table 6 5 Authentication Tab Fields EAP TLS and PEAP EAP TLS EAP TLS is an authentication scheme through IEEE 802 1x It authenticates users and see Figure 6 6 ensures only valid users can connect to the network It also restricts unauthorized users from accessing transmitted information EAP TLS achieves this through secure authentication certificates 6 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Certificate Manager Manage Certificates Existing certificates Identifier SS Root Thawte Server CA Mobile Companion OK Made Authentication Encryption SRoot Thawte Premium Ser SRaot Secure Server Certifi h Install new certificate ei P TLS only TLS and FEAF Install f View Certificates Install View Certificates PEAP Authentication Figure 6 7 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab PEAP Table 6 6 Authentication Tab Fields EAP TLS and PEAP oelect this option to enable PEAP authentication This method uses a digital certificate to PEAP see Figure 6 7 verify and authenticate a user s identity Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 13 select the Encryption tab to set the adapter profile security level by configuring the encryption scheme and corresponding keys Select an option Open System WEP Keyguard MCM TKIP WPA
6. Left See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 24 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 43 Key Keypad The 43 key keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key See Table B 3 for key functions and lable B 4 for the keypad mappings The mapping functions include e 43 key functions e 43 key character map Figure B 2 43 Key Keypad Keypad Maps B 25 Table B 3 43 key Functions Display Backlight On Off Keypad Backlight On Off B 26 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 4 43 Keypad Mapping Default Numlock Shift NAT VK Code ASCII Value State Alpha State AlphaState Decimal Decimal t 1 1 l1 31 mM Mw o TL mM PA do E lebo m o E f0 fm f8 4 4 Ll 5 rate fa o Il 1 m REN NN RN NN NNNM A Y ol we m ESA AA SEO om 3 5 5 W 87 119 CT El a lola CT FE m CT Tl ft ll 4 52 52 02 114 L1 nh 1 1 e mw ee COC FH A L1 1 EA m See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 27 Table B 4 43 Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Shift VK Code ASCII Value State Alpha State AlphaS
7. Keypad Maps B 9 Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal E E N lt x po te LL LLL pss lp ps LLL sss pot LLL LLL LL LE LLL AJA e See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal E E I sb N lt x im pf L LATA GL Li p main CG AF EN UDIT fm AI Lp Ld pol ewe pot LLL LL LL IL LL LLL CL LL lp tt pe m Pp li plo plagae la LI LIT IQ Idle See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 11 Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps
8. The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a particular device or method Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Identification RFID is a system for tagging and identifying mobile objects such as store merchandise postal packages and sometimes living organisms like pets Using a special device called an RFID reader RFID allows objects to be labeled and tracked as they move from place to place Device used to read RFID tags Read Only Memory Data stored in ROM cannot be changed or removed The name of the licensed Disk Operating System loaded into the terminal s flash file system Router RS 232 Scan Area Scanner Scanning Mode Scanning Sequence SMDK Self Checking Code Shared Key SHIP SMDK Soft Reset Space Spectrum24 Spectrum One Glossary GL 15 A device that connects networks and supports the required protocols for packet filtering Routers are typically used to extend the range of cabling and to organize the topology of a network into subnets See Subnet An Electronic Industries Association EIA standard that defines the connector connector pins and signals used to transfer data serially from one device to another Area intended to contain a symbol An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol Its three main components are 1 Light
9. eS e Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 19 Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal o Y E e See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 20 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal E nd id N eS D See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer
10. x ENT p Figure 2 1 28 Key Keypad Operating the MC9000 G 2 5 Table 2 1 28 Key ee Descriptions Power o AAA the mobile computer on and off Used to reset the mobile computer see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 Green Red C Unassigned application function key See Appendix B Keypad Maps for mapping details scan ocan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pushing the right scan button scroll Up and Down Moves up and down from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Left and O Moves left and right from one item to another Increases decreases specified values SPACE Performs the space functions BKSP Performs the backspace functions Cause a Cause One Star Produces the number one in default state Produces an asterisk in Alpha state Alphanumeric In default state produces the numeric value on the key CE C In Alpha state produces the lower case alphabetic characters on the key Each key press produces the next alphabetic character in sequence For example press and release the ALPHA key and then press the 4 key once to produce the letter g press and release the ALPHA key and then press the 4 key three times to produce the letter I When the SHIFT key is pressed in Alpha state the upper case alphabetic characters on the key are produced For example press and release the ALPHA key press and hol
11. DC Cable USB Port USB Cable AC Line Cord Power Supply Figure 7 5 Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Power Serial USB Connections select either serial or USB for communications do not connect cradle to both serial and USB ports ES Accessories 7 11 Battery Charging The the single slot serial USB cradle can charge the mobile computers main battery and a spare battery simultaneously The mobile computer s amber charge LED located in the Indicator LED Bar see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 shows the mobile computer battery charging status The cradle has an amber spare battery charging LED see Figure 7 4 on page 7 6 that shows the spare battery charging status see Table 7 1 for charging status indications he battery usually charges in less than four hours Table 7 1 LED Charging Status Indicators Ca 00000 Mobile Computer Charging LED on mobile computer Off Mobile computer not in cradle mobile computer not placed correctly cradle is not powered Fast Blinking Amber Error in charging check placement of mobile computer Slow Blinking Amber Mobile computer is charging 1 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Four Slot Ethernet Cradle This section describes how to set up and use a Four Slot Ethernet cradle For cradle communication setup procedures see Ethernet Setup on page 4 16 000909 Power Port Ethernet Communication Port Figure 7 6 Four Slot Ethernet Cradle A
12. Identifier SS Root Thawte Server CA SRoot Thawte Premium Ser ese Secure Server CertiFi Install View Certificates se ITE c HEN cite TLS EI TLS ELE M EAP TLS Authentication Install View Certificates Figure 4 28 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab EAP TLS Mobile Companion ES OK ES Made Authentication Encryption Certificate Manager Manage Certificates Existing certificates Identifier 4ARoot Thawte Server CA SS Root Thawte Premium Ser E Secure Server Certif Install f View Certificates lil SES mite TLS E TLS E M PEAP Authentication Install View Certificates Figure 4 29 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab PEAP 4 30 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 9 Select the Encryption tab to set the adapter profile security level by configuring the encryption scheme and corresponding keys Select an option Open System WEP Keyguard MCM TKIP WPA from the Encryption drop down list See Table 6 7 on page 6 14 for Encryption option descriptions Mobile Companion OK Authentication Encryption Cor i Figure 4 30 Encryption Tab The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft Encryption is an efficient method of preventing data theft and improving data security If an AP is set to 40 bit and an adapter is set to 128 bit the adapter can associate to the AP
13. Starting the Mobile Computer Insert the battery if the mobile computer does not power on perform a cold boot see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 When the mobile computer is powered on for the first time it initializes its flash file system The oymbol splash screen appears for a short period of time followed by the calibration screen These screens also appear when a cold boot is performed symbol The Enterprise Mobility Company Figure 1 7 Symbol Splash Screen 1 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Calibration Screen Use calibrate screen to align the touch screen 1 Remove the stylus from the handle 2 Carefully press and briefly hold the tip of stylus on the center of the calibration screen target Repeat the procedure as the target moves and stops at different locations on the screen 3 If the mobile computer already has screen calibration settings the confirm calibration resave screen appears lap screen within 30 seconds to overwrite the existing calibration settings with the new settings or allow the timer to expire and the new calibration settings will not be saved Carefully press and briefly hold stylus New settings have been measured on the center of the target Tap the screen to register saved data Repeat as the target moves around Wait for 30 seconds to cancel saved the screen data and keep the current setting zx Time limit 30 sec Calibration Scre
14. read a total of 7 times IL Reads 7 L3 d c HI save Figure 5 25 Gemini RFID Tags Window Selected Tag Clearing the Display To clear the tag list in the mobile computers display tap 2 5 32 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Saving Tag Data A list of read tags can be saved on the mobile computer The application saves the tag list to the My Documents folder and names the file RFID Taglist csv or the user can enter a different name folder combination The file is a csv format comma separated text file This file format can be read by MS Excel or other applications that support csv The sample file contains Time stamp tag ID tag type read count 2004 09 17115 34 53 05 00 H22EEDDAEBFCCEDEE C1 10 2004 09 17115 34 53 05 00 H8000800545234227 C1 10 2004 09 17115 34 57 05 00 H8000800428254124 C1 15 The time stamp format is Year month date I Hour Minute seconds TimezoneHourDifferential GMT TimezoneMinutesDifferntial The tag ID format is HTagData H indicates the data is in hex The Tag Type format is CX where X is the tag class Currently the unit supports class 1 tags The file can not be displayed on the mobile computer with the factory supplied software The file is intended to be downloaded to a host and displayed using an application that can read comma delimited fields such as an Excel spreadsheet The file contains a one line header and one line for
15. 3 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window 3 56 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Display Settings Use the Display Settings window to set the display parameters 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Display Settings The Display Settings window appears CtlPanel Example File Help Display Setti Value F of colors 65536 Intensity Low Backlight On KbLight State Always On KbLight Timer 20 Seconds API Version 01 0 Y o Figure 3 54 Display Settings Window To set the Value for any item in the Display Settings column use the up and down v arrows to select the item Once the item in the Display Settings column is highlighted use the left and right arrow buttons to select a value Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window Table 3 7 Display Settings Display Seting Vales Words a 0 to 15 only on monochromatic units Low Medium High Super Backlight On Off kbLight State Always off Always on Timeout kbLight Timer 5 Sec 10 Sec 20 Sec 30 Sec 1 Min 5 Min API Version 01 07 display only not selectable To optimize display performance do not leave the display turned on to a fixed image for an extended period of time Turn the mobile computer off or use a screen saver when the mobile computer Is not in use Use the mobile computer Display Settings to automatically turn off the display when the unit IS not
16. AvantGo Channels ER Calendar Not Installed EJ Contacts Not Installed v EZ Favorites Intemet Explorer Files Synchronized Files v Inbox Microsoft Outlook 1 Nintes Nat Installer To find out more about and to customize what gets synchronized click on that information type in the list and then click Settings lt Back Cancel Help Figure 4 5 Select Synchronization Settings Window 8 To synchronize a particular type of information select its check box To stop synchronization of that information clear its check box 4 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 9 Select Next The New Partnership Setup Complete Window appears New Partnership 4 E X Setup Complete You are now ready to start exchanging information between your mobile device and this computer Upon exiting this wizard Microsoft ActiveSync will open and lf your device is a quest click Explore on the toolbar and start exploring your device lf your device has a partnership synchronization starts Please wait until synchronization is complete before using your device Click Finish to exit this wizard lt Back Cancel Help Figure 4 6 Setup Complete Window 10 Select Finish 4 Microsoft ActiveSync ES File View Tools El 3 unc o WindowsCE Connected Synchronized Information Type Status Synchronized Figure 4 7 ActiveSync Connected Window Communications 4 9
17. C Save emulator state Prompt Communication Ethernet Shared Debug Port COM T Browse Emulation COM CO b41 E Browse LIE E E M M GREEN RED FUNC SHIFT UNTL COMM Figure 12 5 Emulator Tab Table 12 2 Emulator Tab Functions II ZG otop Action sets the shut down state Turn off emulator Exits the emulator program Save emulator state Returns emulator to the same state when re launched Platform Application and MMC folders are NOT copied to emulator from the desktop hard drive Prompt Keeps the emulator program running oelect setting None Shared or VirtualSwitch 12 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 12 2 Emulator Tab Functions Continued EN Sang Ta Debug Port select setting None Com1 Comz or File Emulation COM2 select setting None Com1 Com2 or File Storage Tab The Emulator Storage settings simulate the storage environment that would be provided by a flash file system and MMC When the emulator starts the contents of these development computer folders are copied to the emulator as separate folders Once the emulator is running changes made to the desktop folder are not reflected in the emulator folder until the emulator is stopped and launched again Changes made in the emulator folder are not reflected in the desktop folder These files must be captured using remote file viewer The emulator Application and P
18. Distance between exit Ensure mobile computer is within proper scanning window and bar code is range Incorrect Mobile computer is not Ensure the mobile computer is programmed to accept programmed for the bar code the type of bar code being scanned Mobile computer is not If a beep on a good decode is expected and a beep is programmed to generate a not heard check that the application is set to beep generate a beep on good decode Battery is low If the scanner stops emitting a laser beam when the trigger is pressed check the battery level When the battery is low the scanner shuts off before the mobile computer low battery condition notification Note If the scanner is still not reading symbols contact the distributor or Symbol Technologies MC906R G RFID only The following error message Corrupt or missing DLL wrong Ensure the latest RFIDAPI32 DLL file is being used appears when launching an RFID version of DLL Ensure the RFIDAPI32 DLL file is located in the application Windows directory Place a copy in the VPlatform Cannot find XXXXXXXXXX or folder as well since the cold boot process always one of it s components Make copies the RFIDAPI32 DLL file located in the Platform sure the path and filename are folder to the Windows directory correct A Hardware Error message Antenna malfunction or Reboot computer If problem persists contact the appears when attempting to disconnection symbol Support Center
19. Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer Continued Wm e sm Mobile computer turns itself off Mobile computer is inactive The mobile computer turns off after a period of inactivity If the mobile computer is running on battery power this period can be set from 1 to 5 minutes in one minute intervals If the mobile computer is running on external power this period can be set to 1 2 5 10 15 and 30 minutes Battery is depleted Replace the battery Insert the battery properly see Figure 1 3 on page 1 8 properly Tapping the window buttons or LCD screen not aligned Re calibrate the screen See Figure on page 1 16 icons does not activate the correctly corresponding feature The system is hung Warm boot the system To perform a warm boot see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 A message appears stating that Too many files stored on the Delete unused memos and records Save these the mobile computer memory is mobile computer records on the host computer full Too many applications installed on the mobile computer 13 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer Continued mmm me Rm The mobile computer does not Scanning application is not Verify that the unit is loaded with a scanning accept scan input loaded application See the System Administrator Unreadable bar code Ensure the symbol is not defaced
20. fo fimo mw L 31 m 1 1 f8 mee ll 1 Bm SA dp lo pes Jag E 1d m LL d Ho pn joga See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 37 Table B 6 53 Key Mapping Continued eem Dem Umm Dmm Default State Decimal Decimal Bo O 142 Jg B pool ew qe Do Lo UL o p que Ss mST 5 ll log 39 CU pf 9 qe J8 P p j LL p B EOS lo fa e JL ELLE OL l6 qq IAS le jem IO P Lo 55 OR p les m OL TF qe LL le mm U Bo O q 9 J LL eom Ch 1 s T l Ss mm B o lo y Jt Ld me e OL OL le om o o LO d dem See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 38 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 6 53 Key Mapping Continued Mem ma ST Default State Decimal Decimal of ft 1 18 a d VL Loo pee m Lo Cl leo Jm CA ILL See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 39 Table B 6 53 Key Mapping Continued VK Code ASCII Value Default State Decimal Decimal
21. symbol Technologies Asia Inc Singapore Branch 230 Victoria Street 05 07 09 Bugis Junction Office Tower singapore 188024 Tel 65 6796 9600 Fax 65 6337 6488 Austria Osterreich symbol Technologies Austria GmbH Prinz Eugen Strasse 70 2 Haus 1040 Vienna Austria Tel 01 5055794 0 Inside Austria Tel 43 1 5055794 0 Outside Austria Europe Mid East Distributor Operations Contact your local distributor or call Tel 44 118 945 7360 France oymbol Technologies France Centre d Affaire d Antony 3 Rue de la Renaissance 92184 Antony Cedex France Tel 01 40 96 52 21 Inside France Tel 433 1 40 96 52 50 Outside France MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Germany Deutchland oymbol Technologies GmbH Waldstrasse 66 D 63128 Dietzenbach Germany Tel 6074 49020 Inside Germany Tel 49 6074 49020 Outside Germany Latin America Sales Support 2130 University Dr Coral Springs FL 33065 USA Tel 1 800 347 0178 Inside United States Tel 1 954 255 2610 Outside United States Fax 954 340 9454 Netherlands Nederland oymbol Technologies Kerkplein 2 7051 CX Postbus 24 7050 AA Varsseveld Netherlands Tel 315 271700 Inside Netherlands Tel 31 315 271700 Outside Netherlands South Africa oymbol Technologies Africa Inc Block B2 Rutherford Estate 1 Scott Street Waverly 2090 Johannesburg Republic of South Africa Tel 11 809 5311 Inside South Africa Te
22. Chapter 1 Getting Started describes the mobile computer s physical characteristics lists the mobile computer accessories explains how to install and charge the batteries explains how to replace the strap lanyard explains how to remove and replace the stylus and explains how to start the mobile computer for the first time Chapter 2 Operating the MC9000 G explains how to use the mobile computer This includes Instructions for powering on and resetting the mobile computer entering data and scanning Chapter 3 Settings explains how to adjust settings on the mobile computer Chapter 4 Communications explains how to use Microsoft Activesync for communications between the mobile computer and host computer Chapter 5 Applications explains how to use the installed applications Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration describes how to configure the Spectrum24 wireless connection Chapter 7 Accessories describes the mobile computer accessories including setup and configuration Chapter 8 Software Installation provides an overview of the Software Mobility Developer s Kit SMDK installation and its uses Chapter 9 AirBEAM Smart explains how to set up the mobile computer to synchronize with a server using the AirBEAM Smart Client and AirBEAM Staging applications Chapter 10 Rapid Deployment Client facilitates software downloads to a mobile device from a Mobility Services Platform MSP Console FIP server Chapter 11 Mobile Computer C
23. Commands that begin with the letter S are known as S parameters The number following the 9 indicates the parameter number referenced If the number is not recognized as a valid parameter number an ERROR result code issues Immediately following this number either a or character must appear is used to read the current value of the indicated S parameter sets the S parameter to a new value o parameter number 7 38 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET S lt parameter_number gt lt value gt 11 IL If the is used the new value to be stored in the S parameter is specified in decimal following the If no value is given i e the end of the command line occurs or the next command follows immediately the S parameter specified may be set to O or an ERROR result code issues and the stored value remains The ranges of acceptable values are given in the description of each S parameter If the is used the modem transmits a single line of information text to the DTE The text portion of this information text consists of exactly three characters giving the value of the S parameter in decimal with leading zeroes included Commands The tables that follow summarize the AT commands result codes and S Registers for the MDM 3000 lt string gt represents a letter number or symbol to be entered lt value gt represents a number to be entered Possible
24. DLLs This FFS is configured to include DLLs that control system operation Since these drivers are required for basic mobile computer operation only experienced users should modify the content of this partition e Application The Application FFS partition is used to store application programs needed to operate the mobile computer Working with FFS Partitions Because the FFS partitions appear as folders under the Windows CE file system they can be written to and read like any other folder For example an application program can write data to a file located in the Application folder just as it would to the Windows folder However the file in the Application folder is in non volatile storage and is not lost on a cold boot e g when power is removed for a long period of time otandard tools such as ActiveSync can be used to copy files to and from the FFS partitions They appear as the Application and Platform folders to the ActiveSync explorer This is useful when installing applications on the mobile computer Applications stored in the Application folder are retained even when the mobile computer is cold booted just as the Demo 9000 program is retained in memory There are two device drivers included in the Windows CE image to assist developers in configuring the mobile computer following a cold boot RegMerge and CopyFiles 11 27 11 28 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET RegMerge dll RegMerge dl
25. EI January 2004 e S M TW TF 5 28 29 3031 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 His 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 11 49 01 AM Time one GMT 05 00 Eastern Time LIS Es c y Automatically adjust clock for davlinht saving Apply Figure 3 12 Date Time Properties Window Use the arrows to select the month in the Date Time tab Tap the date to select it Tap to highlight the hours minutes or seconds entry Tap the up or down arrows to increment the highlighted value 5 Select the appropriate time zone from the ime Zone drop down list Tap Apply or OK to save the new settings Settings 3 17 Device Management Use Device Management to keep track of software and hardware inventory and configure devices remotely The device management client contains a download install engine that allows users to receive software and notifications when there are new applications or Operating System OS updates The device management system also allows the downloading and running of scripts to enable configuration and customized management The Windows CE Device Management Client works with the Microsoft Systems Management Server SMS to provide the required capabilities 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Device Management icon Device Management OK x Device Management Setup Server name or IP address o ex SomeServer Mame 173 355 4 8 etr O Lise secure con
26. F icon appears on the taskbar see Table 2 9 on page 2 26 Press and release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad functions 2 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 2 5 5250 Emulator Descriptions Continued CT RUN Control Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights and the icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the CTRL key again to return to the normal keypad functions Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions The T icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric entries Produces an asterisk Executes a selected item or function EXIT FIELD For detailed keypad configurations including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix B Keypad Maps Operating the MC9000 G 2 19 VI Emulator here are two physical configurations of the VI emulator keypad however both of the keypads are functionally identical The VI emulator keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer s keypad may not function exactly as described See Table
27. Find WLANs or Options menu options Table 6 1 Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions LU OoOO Status Displays the current status and information for the wireless connection Signal tab Displays radio signal transmission strength from the adapter using its current profile to the associated AP Info tab Displays Mobile Companion software driver firmware and hardware and country information for the current WLAN profile IP Status tab Displays network address information Ping tab Displays signal strength data data rate and conducts data transmission tests between the mobile computer and associated AP or client APs tab Displays APs with the same ESSID as the current mobile computer profile The mobile computer s roaming capabilities can be set from this tab Peers tab Displays the BSSIDs power modes transmit rates and data rates of other networked clients within the Ad Hoc peer to peer network When in Ad Hoc operating mode the Peers tab appears instead of the APs tab WLAN Profiles Displays the current profiles and allows the user to add edit and delete profiles for more information see Changing Profiles on page 6 26 Find WLANs Displays a list of those Spectrum24 networks APs and networked peers available for association The networks are listed by their ESSID To the right of each network is a signal strength icon Networks with a signal strength of good three green bars out of five or better should be considered for
28. IO O O OO O O O O eee po Pp pp lees L oL pL O OO CO rama las LL LLL LL LL LLL LLL LL LL LLL LLL IL LLL LL LLL LL LE Ld ple fw L 11 Ld d lio o peeeje See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal E nd id N eS pf ft AO O O O O O O O O A AOS O O O O O DL wes PO OO O O OO O O CO p lol O ee IO AO O OO OO OO ef E so LL O O O O O O O O O O OS IE LL O OO OO O O O E O EI o L 1 p Ld dolo oy CEI See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 15 Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal i bad N
29. Maximum Manual Power Sawing Mode Manual Power Saving Mode I 1 1 1 li I Excellent Network Performance Uses less battery power Excellent Network Performance Uses less battery power Infrastructure Mode Ad Hoc Mode Figure 6 11 Mobile Companion Power Tab Adjust the Radio Iransmission Power level to expand or confine the transmission area to with respect to other wireless devices that could be operating nearby Reducing coverage in a high traffic area improves transmission quality by reducing the amount of noise in that coverage area Table 6 9 Power Tab Fields Field Description Radio Transmission Power In Infrastructure mode There are two transmission power options select Automatic to use the AP power level Automatic is the default mode for mobile computers operating in Infrastructure mode select Power Plusto set the mobile computer transmission power one level higher than the level set for the AP In Ad Hoc mode There are five transmission power options select Maximum power to set the mobile computer to the highest transmission power level Select Maximum power when operating in highly reflective environments and areas where other devices could be operating nearby Additionally use the maximum power level when attempting to communicate with devices at the outer edge of a coverage area select 50 25 or 10 to set the transmit power level to that percentage of the maximum power level select
30. No Bar Codes Left to Scan Bar Codes Left to Scan are Listed Figure 10 3 Rapid Deployment Window 3 Scan the appropriate bar code s to complete the configuration and or download For information about scanning with the mobile computer see Data Capture on page 2 34 Rapid Deployment Client 10 7 a APDF417 bar code 2 D bar code can contain all download data in a single bar code In this case only one bar code may be required to scan b Multi part linear bar codes 1 D bar codes can require scanning several bar codes Bar codes can be scanned in any order The text box under Bar codes left to scan shows the remaining bar codes to scan see Figure 10 3 Bar codes left to scan 4 After all appropriate bar codes are scanned successfully the mobile computer connects to the server and the Rapid Deployment Configuring window displays while network settings are configured Configuring Network Configuring network settings Please walt Figure 10 4 Rapid Deployment Window Configuring eo If the mobile computer cannot connect to the server it continues to retry until the user cancels exits the application If failure to connect to the server persists see the MSP Administrator 5 When configuration is complete a he designated package s are downloaded from the FTP server b Anew Mobile Companion profile is created on the mobile computer from the data encoded in the bar code s scanned See Mobile Companion o
31. TCM failed to connect to the terminal Check if the TERMINAL Terminal Not correct flow control protocol is selected and the terminal is properly connected and is Connected Properly Terminal Not in a listening state Ready to Receive Mobile Computer Configuration 11 23 IPL Error Detection While receiving data IPL performs many checks on the data to ensure that the data is received correctly If an error is detected IPL immediately aborts the download and reports the error on an error screen Error screens may vary depending on the action being performed A sample error screen may look like the screen pictured below Downloading Platform via Serial Port 115200 Error 2 Messages Cancelled by user Press any key to continue Figure 11 16 IPL Error Screen This error message screen displays until a key is pressed Once the screen is acknowledged IPL returns to the Initial Program Loader main menu to wait for a new selection To find the probable cause of the error use the error number and or the error text displayed on the screen to look up the error in Table 11 4 Table 11 4 IPL Errors 1 Unknown error A general error occurred Retry the download If the failure persists it is most likely due to a hardware failure the terminal requires servicing Cancelled by user The user cancelled the download 11 24 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 11 4 IPL Errors Con
32. Table 11 3 TCM Error Messages Failed to build images flash file system DLL not loaded system Reinstall TCM or recover the DLL Failure finding directory xxx Failure adding system file to Build process failed because ICM failed to add a certain system file to the disk image image INVALID PATH The path for the image file to build is not valid Nothing Selected To Build In the Config Build window no item is selected to build Illegal ESS ID In the Build ESSID Partition window no ESS ID was entered or the ESS ID entered was illegal Disk Full TCM failed to create Hex image file at the selected path Check available disk space Target Disk Full Build process failed because TCM failed to add file to the image of a disk volume Remove some files or increase the disk size Hex file is READ ONLY The Hex image file to be created exists and is read only Delete the existing file or change its attribute Error opening the file xxx with TCM could not open file xxx with write access Check if file is in use write access Failure creating binary file TCM failed to open create an intermediate binary file Hex File To load is missing or In Load Terminal window the file selected to load has invalid status invalid Could not locate terminal name in While loading the Script Properties window T CM could not find the TCM ini section TCM ini file corresponding to the terminal type specified by the current opening script Either TCM ini or the s
33. microphone function 2 From the Test Applications window Figure 5 1 on page 5 3 double tap the Self Test icon to enter the Se f Test window select the One Time radio button to run each of the tests only once or select the Continuously radio button to run the tests continuously or until the prompt to stop running them is selected eu select the Write Log File checkbox to save the test results to a log file The results are saved to the Selftest log file located in the Temp directory To view the test results use ActiveSync to move the file to the host computer and then can view it using a text editor Only one test log file is saved the next write log file test save appends the existing Selftest log file 3 Tap Settings to display the Se f Test Settings window Tap Cancel to accept the default settings or enter new setting values and tap OK to accept the new settings and return to the Self Test window select the Prompt for status after each test checkbox to display a test confirmation window after the completion of each test The test confirmation window prompts the user to confirm if the test was successfully completed If the Write Log File check box is also selected a test results log file is saved that includes the user response to confirmation window prompt Do not select this checkbox if the confirmation window is not required CO 5 20 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Self Test Sett
34. nkWiz File Browser on page 5 9 The file browser is also used to access the Internet Explorer application page 5 10 and the Remote Desktop application see page 5 12 Displays the AudioSamp sample application see AudioSamp on page 5 13 Displays the image viewer sample application see mages on page 5 14 Images PC Link accesses the Microsoft ActiveSync application see PC Link on page 5 16 PC Link El Displays the OTL version information example application see About OTL on page 5 17 About OTL TU ud Displays the self test application see Se f Test on page 5 18 SelfTest Displays the notify example application see Notify on page 5 27 N otify a Displays the keyboard example application see Keyboard on page 5 22 m play y pie app y pag Keyboard Displays the display example application see Display on page 5 23 fs Displays the memory example application see Memory on page 5 24 Memory Displays the MSR 9000 setup application see MSR9000 on page 5 25 MSR 9000 CO Applications 5 5 Table 5 1 Applications Continued os GNNIENNAN Displays the MSR 9000 Cameo setup application see MSR Cameo on page 5 26 E Displays the Printer application see Printing on page 5 27 RFID The windows shown are configured as part of the factory default demo program OTL exe OTL exe can be configured via registry settings to user specified applications 5 6 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded
35. t i1 i1 E E A l1 pen See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal o N mE jum e B mE lll a See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 17 Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal E E N lt x See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 18 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued E nd id N
36. those that describe step by step procedures appear as numbered lists xxii MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Related Documents and Software The following documents provide more information about the MC9000 G MC9000 G Quick Start Guide poster p n 72 63360 xx MC9000 G Licensing Patent and Regulatory Information p n 72 63697 xx SMDK Help File for Symbol Terminals p n 72E 38880 xx UBC 2000 Quick Reference Guide 70 33198 xx Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET SMDK for NET available at http www symbol com mc9000 g symbol Windows CE SMDK for Series 9000 available at http www symbol com mc9000 g eConnect software available at http devzone symbol com ActiveSync software available at the Microsoft web site http www microsoft com Service Information If you have a problem with your equipment contact the Symbol Support Center for your region See page xxiii for contact information Before calling have the model number serial number and several of your bar code symbols at hand Call the Support Center from a phone near the scanning equipment so that the service person can try to talk you through your problem If the equipment is found to be working properly and the problem Is symbol readability the Support Center will request samples of your bar codes for analysis at our plant If your problem cannot be solved over the phone you may need to return your equipment for s
37. 2 45 a Cusquwttoas Ediz Sut dire d bb A 2 45 Terminal Emulators 0 00 a 2 46 Operating the MC9000 G 2 3 Introduction This chapter provides basic instructions for using and navigating the mobile computer Keypads The mobile computer has five interchangeable modular keypad configurations 28 key keypad see page 2 4 43 key keypad see page 2 7 53 key keypad see page 2 10 32 0 emulator see page 2 13 5250 emulator see page 2 16 VI emulator see page 2 19 The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized applications see Multi Media Card MMC on page 7 6 for installation and removal procedures CO For detailed keypad configurations including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix B Keypad Maps For information about using the soft keyboard input panel see Entering Information Using the Keyboard Input Panel on page 2 33 2 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 28 Key Keypad The 28 key keypad contains a Power button application Keys scroll keys and a function key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values and the alternate ALPHA key orange values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer s keypad may not function exactly as described see able 2 1 on page 2 5 for key and button descriptions and able 2 7 on page 2 22 for the keypad s special functions Or Q LI
38. 2 6 on page 2 20 for key and button descriptions and Table 2 on page 2 22 tor the keypad s special functions G gt AL al 000000 0000000 5 ARA CA A D o O O B000 o m m a 000000 mn N n t S 3 o A J f NS x O als am 13 a N z 9 a n N o E a o Figure 2 6 VT Emulator Keypad eo The VT emulator keypad is only used when the mobile computer is running the VT emulation software When the mobile computer is not running the VI emulation software the VI keypad functions are the same as a 53 key keypad 2 20 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 2 6 VT Emulator Descriptions tg TO in Power red Powers the mobile computer on and off Used to reset the mobile computer see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 Green Red Dot Unassigned application function key See Appendix B Keypad Maps for mapping details Scan yellow scan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger scroll Up and Down Moves up and down from one item to another scroll Left and Right Moves left and right from one item to another Exits the current
39. 4 package builder 9 3 rapid deployment o o o o o 10 6 MONIT cera susie s qb DI ER NER ake 9 11 synchronization with server 9 10 AirBEAM configuration DG AAA 9 7 KIT KA ARA osx donsd dd anes nme 9 8 Packages 2 tab ooooo oo oo o 9 5 A wo qoare cie RR ds 9 6 appearance 6 a 3 20 AERE siserororser rara seers 7 37 attaching handstrap 005 1 14 IN 2 MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide authentication icesecesekcrakcketr rh 4 28 6 8 rn rt rr 6 11 kerberos 0 eee 6 9 Iro qv AA 6 10 ASUNT TERT TETTE PRETI 6 8 ics A RT ee rada 6 12 auto charge Cable 1 6 7 4 automatic power saving mode 6 18 B background 3 20 PAO rr rra NAAN cases 2 22 3 20 backup battery A NAAN erectus 1 10 batteries CNG AA 1 10 battery status omo 2 26 2 27 2 29 12 17 beeper volume 0 20 cee ee eee 2 22 PU STE ETE EET ITI TET 3 6 3 8 3 50 bluetooth ad hoc MOQO asec dkteeeedidarnondens ee 6 7 boot BUT erroneo PINE 2 23 6 39 O 2 23 A Lee bound riu ead HO 3 20 Io 6 32 d 6 5 Marrero rrpp TRO A XXi buttons A 2 3 1x P 1 13 C Cable Adapter Module 1 6 7 4 A 1 6 7 4 auto charge cable 1 6 7 4 Pose e kA KAN KAKA irii snai 1 6 7 4 pr
40. A 828 825 83 3 3 3 B8 8 A O 8 8 8 83 93 3 3 3 9 Ly v B 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Keypad Maps B 3 Introduction This appendix contains the keypad maps for the keypad configurations Each key is listed in the table with its value depending on the state of the keypad Keypads The mobile computer has five interchangeable modular Keypads 28 key 43 key 53 key 32 0 Emulator 5250 Emulator VI Emulator The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized applications B 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 28 Key Keypad The 28 key keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key See Table B 3 for key functions and Table B 4 for the keypad mappings The mapping functions include e 28 key functions e 28 key character map Or a E i 4 Q Q 5 s V F NN ENT Ws E E Figure B 1 28 Key Keypad Keypad Maps B 5 Table B 1 28 Key Functions B 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal o N z jum o e n S
41. Access AP networks checkbox to display available AP networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks tab These are the APs available to the mobile computer profile for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks tab to display the AP networks available to the mobile computer Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 25 2 Select the Access Ad Hoc networks checkbox to display available peer adapter networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks tab These are peers available to the mobile computer profile for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks tab to display the Ad Hoc networks available to the mobile computer 3 Select the Disable Profile Roaming check box to configure the adapter profile to not roam to another AP profile or peer profile if in Ad Hoc mode if a stronger signal is detected 4 Selectthe Enable Sounds checkbox to initiate an audible signal when performing a ping test and associating with an AP The tones are important to notify users if the pinging Is received or if the mobile computer has roamed to another AP 5 select the Enable Rogue AP Detection check box to inform the system of unauthorized APs on the network Mobile Companion has a password protection feature When Mobile Companion initially appears the password is off by default 6 locreate a password tap Change Password
42. BE entered Hex string Program Tags Read Erase Boos Lock Kill Ex PSF Status Message cate Figure 5 30 RFID Program Tag Window 2 In the text box below the tag icon enter an 8 byte 64 bits or 12 byte 96 bits hex string to be programmed into the tag This string can contain any number from 0 9 and a letter from A F Each byte must consist of 2 characters For example if the tag should contain 80012390ACFD3617 type 80 01 23 90 AAC FD 36 17 as shown in Figure 5 30 3 Apassword is required to lock a tag and kill a tag In the Password box enter a number from 0 255 Remember the password Once a tag is locked it cannot be killed without the password eu 4 Tap Program Tags lt might take more than one attempt to program the tag 5 When a tag is successfully programmed a status message displays in the Status Message text box 6 Tap Read to read a newly programmed tag 5 38 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET e0 For a successful tag read the allowable read distance from the front of the mobile computer s scan exit window to the tag is 2 ft 10 ft 061 m to 3 1 m 7 Tap Erase to erase an unlocked tag 8 Tap Lock to lock a tag so that it cannot be changed A password is required to lock a tag see Program lag on page 5 37 9 Tap Kill to make a tag unreadable A password is required to kill a tag 10 Tap Back to Global Scroll to return to the Gemini RFID w
43. Change Password Current Password New Password Confirm Mew Password ok cancel Figure 6 19 Mobile Companion Change Password 7 Inthe Change Password window tap in the Current Password box and enter the current password The password Is case sensitive and a maximum of 10 characters Enter the new password in both the New Password and the Confirm New Password boxes and tap OK 6 26 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Changing Profiles select WLAN Profiles from the Mobile Companion menu to view connect to create and edit a profile A completed profile is a set of adapter configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a wireless network Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre defined operating parameters available for use in various network environments When the WLAN Profiles initially appears existing profiles appear in the WLAN Profiles list gt peser Figure 6 20 Mobile Companion WLAN Profiles select a profile from the list and tap Connect to set that profile as the active profile The active profile displays the transmit and receive icon to the left Once selected the mobile computer is using the ESSID encryption and power consumption settings initially configured for that profile Editing a Profile select a profile from the list and tap Edit to display the Mode tab where the ESSID and operating mode can be changed for the pro
44. Date and Time Use the Date and Time window to set the date time and time zone information for the mobile computer 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Date and Time The Date and Time window appears CtlPanel Example File Help GMT 8 Pacific US Y o Figure 3 49 Date and Time Window 2 To set the Value for any item in the Date and Time column use the up and down v arrows to select the item 3 Use the left and right arrow buttons to select the value 4 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window 3 52 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Printer Settings Use the Printer Settings window to select the printer information 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Printer Settings The Printer Settings window appears CtlPanel Example File Help Printer Settings Selected Printer QL420 Printer Parameter version Info EE EEE T Figure 3 50 Printer Settings Window To select a printer tap the Selected Printer item in the Printer Settings column Use the left and right arrows to select the printer Available printer selections include 01420 Cameo Series Comtec RP3 Encore Series Monarch9460 Monarch9490 01320 4 Double tap Printer Parameters to enter the Printer Parameters window 5 Tap the Selected Printer item in the Printer Settings column Printer Parameter dq Es e E Es El Figure 3
45. During the first synchronization information stored on the host computer is copied to the mobile computer When the copy is complete and all data is synchronized the mobile computer can be disconnect from the host computer The first ActiveSync operation must be performed with a local direct connection To retain partnerships after a cold boot capture partnership registry information in a reg file and save it in the Flash File System detailed information is provided in the SMDK Help File for Symbol Mobile Computers oee Chapter 8 Software Installation for the SMDK installation Co For more information about using ActiveSync start ActiveSync on the host computer then see ActiveSync Help Communication Setup The mobile computer can communicate with the host computer using serial USB or Ethernet communications The communication setup procedures for the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle and the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle are provided in this section as an example See the provided reference for detailed procedures for setting up other accessories Serial or USB Connection e Serial Communications Setup on page 4 10 e CAM and MSR Communications Setup on page 7 25 Ethernet connection e Ethernet Setup on page 4 16 For each accessory follow the instructions on configuring the host computer setting up the connection between the mobile computer and the host computer and configuring the mobile computer 4 10 MC9000 G Product Refer
46. Exit Log File Figure 5 27 Gemini RFID Log Menu From the Log menu tap e Clear Log to clear logged data e og Onto turn on the log feature When this feature is turned on the display splits into two sections agsand log display The log display section displays all the logged communication to the RFID radio module including tag data e Log ffto turn off the log feature and close the log display Log Off is the default e Log File to create and save a log file The default log file is saved in the My Documents directory on the mobile computer to a file named RFIDTagList csv This file can be used to track errors reading RFID tags Reboot Tap File Rebootto issue a warm reboot command to the RFID radio module t Reboot only if the mobile computer fails to respond Applications 5 35 Exit Tap File Exitto exit the RFID sample application Mode Menu Tap the Mode menu to use the Inventory method to read tags locate a tag program a tag or scan a bar code Mode menu options offer all of the operations available by tapping an icon on the Gemini RFID window menu bar Inventory Tap Mode Inventory to start reading tags using the nventory method Using this method the application performs as if the trigger is pulled lag read attempts continue until the nventory menu option is tapped again or until the trigger scan button is pulled and released RFID module power on Icon remains on in this mode because pow
47. In Alpha state produces a space Produces a pound number sign Executes a selected item or function c For detailed keypad configurations including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix B Keypad Maps Operating the MC9000 G 2 7 43 Key Keypad The 43 key keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values and the alternate ALPHA key orange values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer s keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 2 on page 2 8 for key and button descriptions and able 2 7 on page 2 22 for the keypad s special functions Figure 2 2 43 Key Keypad MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 2 2 43 Key Descriptions EN MEME GN Power red Powers the mobile computer on and off 6 Used to reset the mobile computer see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 Green Red Dot Unassigned application function key See Appendix B Keypad Maps for mapping details ocan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger Moves up and down from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Moves left and right from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Exits the current operation opace and backspace functions Numeric or sp
48. Ix mm tu a uw tu oo Figure 12 4 Emulator System Settings Window 12 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 12 1 Emulator Window Functions Emulator System Settings The Emulator drop down list used to select either PDT9000 Gemini53key for a full view of the mobile computer or PDT9000 Geminib3keysplit for a split view of the mobile computer Launch button starts the emulator Exit button exits the emulator Tool drop down window displays the selected Embedded Visual C tool Always on lop checkbox oelect to keep the Simulator System Settings window on top of other program windows Emulator tabs Provide the Emulator Storage Scanner Spectrum 24 Battery and Status parameter settings and display windows LED Indicators Displays the state selected or not selected of the indicators GREEN REC FUNC SHIFT COMM and POWER A detailed discussion of each of the emulator window tabs settings and displays is provided in the following sections e Emulator e Storage e Scanner e Spectrum24 e Battery e Status Desktop Emulator 12 9 Emulator Tab Use the Emulator tab to set the emulator parameters memory size launch options and communications Mill Emulator System Settings E D x Emulator PD T3000 Gemini53keyaplit Stop Emulator Tool Embedded Visual p Exit Always on top Stop Action Memory MB 15 E C Tum off emulator
49. MC9000 G Series color and monochrome units 6 1 8 meters at 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C MC906R G RFID monochrome units 6 1 8 meters at 13 to 122 F 25 to 450 C color units 6 1 8 meters at 14 to 122 F 10 C to 4 50 C IP64 electronic enclosure Dimensions MC9000 G Series 9 2 in Lx 3 6 in W x 7 6 in H 233 7 mm L x 91 4 mm W x 193 mm H MC906R G RFID 10 75 in E x 7 7 in H Maximum width antenna area 4 7 in Minimum width keyboard area 2 5 in 273 05 mm L x 195 58 mm H antenna area 119 38 mm W keyboard area 63 5 mm W A 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table A 1 Mobile Computer Technical Specifications Continued Weight including battery MC9000 G Series 27 oz 765 5 g MC906R G RFID 35 4 oz 1 003 6 g Display Transflective color TFI LCD 65K colors 240 W x 320 L QVGA size Monochrome TFI LCD 16 shades 240 W x 320 L QVGA size Touch Panel Polycarbonate analog resistive touch Main Battery Rechargeable Lithium lon 2200 mAh minimum 7 2V Backup Battery Ni MH battery rechargeable 20mAh 3 6V 3 cells PU Intel XScale PXA255 processor at 400 MHz Operating Platform Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Memory MC9000 G Series 64MB RAM 64MB ROM 128MB RAM 64MB ROM MC906R G RFID 64MB RAM 64MB ROM Interface RS 232 max 115 2 kbps min 1200 bps MMC Card Slot MC9000 G Series only Keyp
50. Open System cannot associate to the MicroAP when the MicroAP has shared Key enabled Only when the MicroAP is using Open System can Open System mobile computers associate to It Encryption Algorithm Use the Encryption Algorithm drop down list to select the adapter Encryption algorithm The Open System algorithm default setting does not encrypt packets over the network select Open System to disable Encryption for the WLAN adapter and allow for the transmission and receipt of data with no security shared Encryption Key Use the Shared Encryption Key option to enable 40 bit Encryption Select the Encryption Index key radio button to be used for the mobile computer and enter 10 hex digits for each key used Tap ok to save and implement the encryption key data select an Encryption Index key radio button and tap Reset Keys to clear the entries in the Shared Encryption Key fields Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 37 WLAN Adapter Tab Use the WLAN Adapter tab to configure hardware and radio settings Use the Card Type PCMCIA to specify the antenna type and the Radio Link Rate radio buttons to specify the data rate supported Symbol Spectrum24 W 7 OK TP Config WLAN Adapter Lale Spectrumz4 Adapter Settings Card Type PCMCIA Radio Link Rate O 1MB Support O MB Support 8 Both 1MB and ZMB Support Password Cancel Figure 6 25 WLAN Adapter Tab Table 6 17 WLAN Adapter Tab Fields DIN Remp Di
51. Portable Data Terminal The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode In a well designed bar code scanning system that probability should approach near 100 GL 14 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET PING Print Contrast Signal PCS Programming Mode Quiet Zone QWERTY RAM Reflectance Resolution RF RFID RFID Reader ROM ROM DOS Packet Internet Groper An Internet utility used to determine whether a particular IP address is online It is used to test and debug a network by sending out a packet and waiting for a response Measurement of the contrast brightness difference between the bars and spaces of a symbol A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable PCS RL RD RL where RL is the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values See Scanning Mode A clear space containing no dark marks which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the stop character A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards QWERTY refers to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys Random Access Memory Data in RAM can be accessed in random order and quickly written and read Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface
52. SCO BUE eres WA PADA rr 2 33 IN 6 MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide CN ETE E EE 2 33 2 34 adjusting the distance 2 34 AAP APAN Yd USE RES 2 35 DOO T AAA 2 35 laser 2 34 A A 2 35 2 40 ARA 2 35 ss ER 10 6 reading RHD tags 2 39 5 30 A EE E EEN 5 38 sconning SXamplS ccc i sama a baa aaa Anak KA 5 6 deco PD 5 6 Ao S dac ste ce d SU ERE aded 3 1 COUT siria rd rs 1 16 scripts Hrs DIS BMERRUEP RETE TUNER re 11 8 A rIPOUPAR RU PR P 11 9 SDK system requirements o o o o o 0 3 selecting RHD TAGS Lasoosese ree EE ERR ds 5 30 SEIL Loo sse ee er a rae 1 6 serial USB cradle ooooooooo o 7 3 series 9000 SDK 11 9 11 26 11 28 11 29 service INTOMMAUON vessesesesuecs enr rea XXII setting up a partnership PAL usex crassis rEGTPUREPeRTEFEd 4 4 setup modem sssssss eese 1 30 shared encryption key 6 36 shelf slide oooooooooooooooo 1 6 7 3 o nG AA NAPAG Fa AKI ha 2 31 signal strength o oooo oooooo o 6 4 6 20 single slot serial USB cradle 7 31 single slot serial cradle LED WRENS A NG 7 11 single slot serial USB cradle 7 8 OMDR TONET caked agde nacidos 1 7 A 2 23 2 41 5 34 spare batteries TOS S RENI EET TET T TT 1 12 spare battery a 1 6 A 1 12 spare battery charge
53. SMDK using an image editor 3 Modify the bitmap file and save Create a splash partition using the steps shown in the Building the Image on page 11 10 plash Screen Format If the default files are not used to create the new splash screens be sure to preserve the image format The formats are as follows Table 11 5 Splash Screen Format 240x296 4 bits per pixel 240x296 0 bits per pixel 8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen images Once Windows CE is running the color density is 16 bits per pixel See Sending the Hex Image on page 11 17 for information about loading the splash screen using TCM and IPL Mobile Computer Configuration Flash Storage In addition to the RAM based storage standard on Windows CE terminals the mobile computer is also equipped with a non volatile Flash based storage area which can store data partitions that can not be corrupted by a cold boot This Flash area is divided into two categories Flash File System FFS Partitions and Non FFS Partitions FFS Partitions The mobile computer includes two FFS partitions These partitions appear to the mobile computer as a hard drive that the OS file system can write files to and read files from Data is retained even if power is removed The two FFS partitions appear as two separate folders in the Windows CE file system and are as follows e Platform The Platform FFS partition contains Symbol supplied programs and Dynamic Link Libraries
54. Scanning File Help Scanning File Help Scanning Minimum p Linear Decode Random Weight Retry Count Supplemental M Supplemental 5 Maximum Supplemental 2 Security Level O Codes Window Code Parameters Sample Window Code Length Sample Window Figure 5 4 ScanSamp2 Examples Applications 5 9 InkWiz File Browser Use the nkWiz file browser example application to browse cut copy paste delete files and to execute programs From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap the Files icon The InkWiz Example window appears Ink Wiz Example File Edit View Help EHE Menu Bar C Application Button Bar amp C Application Data El Control Panel Ink amp C My Documents El PHYSICALDRIVEO ae Platform 4 23 profiles E C3 Program Files Figure 5 5 InkWiz Example Window The Menu Bar and Button Bar are used to navigate organize files on the mobile computer 5 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Internet Explorer Use nternet Explorer to view Internet or intranet Web pages on the mobile computer A modem an Ethernet connection or a Spectrum24 connection is required to connect to an Internet service provider ISP or network From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap Files icon double tap on Application double tap IEBrowser exe The Internet Explorer window appears File Edit view Go Fav El address file windows Paw ayy The Windows CE Web S
55. Settings tab to modify the DNS and WINS identification settings of the cradle Status General Settings TCP IP Settings Port Settings r IP Address C P Q W Use DHC IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS Address Use DHCP DNS 1 DNS 2 WINS NBNS Address Use DHCP WINS 1 172 31 1 199 WINS 2 0 0 0 0 Field Use DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address DNS Address WINS Address Description If checkbox Is selected necessary information will be retrieved from the DHCP server If checkbox is not selected static configuration will be used information needs to be entered The IP address that the MobileDox will use when communicating on the network The subnet mask that the MobileDox will use when communicating on the network The IP address that the MobileDox will use to send non local IP network data The IP address of a server s that can resolve Internet names into IP addresses The IP address of a server s that can resolve Windows network names into IP addresses This field must be populated correctly when using Activesync Figure 4 22 MobileDox TPC IP Settings Window 4 26 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 6 Use the Port Settings tab to modify the USB port settings of the cradle Field Description Port Name A text string used to describe the device attached to the port Any 15 character s
56. Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal rer N ulum e See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 12 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal E nd id N eS e MN EE LUTO nw AT ee lp tt fe fees la PO OO O O OO O O eee lp ppp pj pee PO O O OO O O O O O O O O OS IS PO O OO O OO O O es de er See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 13 Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal E E N lt x
57. Short Codabar for short bar codes Short Redun Two times read redundancy based on redundancy flags and code length Short Codabar Two times read redundancy if short bar code or CODABAR Pointer Timer 0 60 000 ms sets the maximum amount of time that the pointer remains on 0 60 000 ms in increments of 100 ms A value of 0 sets the pointer to stay on Raster 0 100 in increments of Raster Height is not supported Height 5 in Settings 3 61 Table 3 9 Imager Reader Parameters Reader Parameters Imager Values Description Reader Type Imager type scan engine Is used Aim Type Trigger Timed hold Timed Trigger mode On off controlled by the trigger release Trigger hold mode Trigger can be released but it remains active for the specified period of time Timed release mode Activation stops after a specified period of time even if the trigger is held Aim Duration 0 60 000 ms Sets the Aim Duration time duration 0 60 000 ms in increments of 100 ms Aim Mode Dot Slab Reticle None Use only None no aiming or Reticle reticle aiming Beam Timer 0 60 000 ms Sets the maximum amount of time that the laser remains on 0 60 000 ms in increments of 100 ms A value of 0 sets the laser to stay on Pointer Timer 0 60 000 in increments of Pointer Timer is not supported 100ms Image Capture 0 60 000 in increments of Image Capture Timeout is not supported Timeout 100ms Image Compress 0 60 000 in increments of Image Compres
58. This sample application illustrates how an application should handle MSR inputs From the Test Applications window double tap the MSR9000 icon The MSA window appears see MSR9000 on page 5 25 or MSR Cameo on page 5 26 he card may be swiped in either direction from left to right or from right to left with the magnetic stripe facing towards the mobile computer For best results gently press down on the card while swiping to ensure contact with the bottom of the reader The MSR does not need to be attached to the power supply to read magnetic stripes eu When creating software applications involving the CAM or MSR the application developer should be aware that the devices are designed to breakaway from the terminal if accidentally dropped The application should always check for the snap on presence before talking to the device To use the MSR 1 Attach the MSR see MSR and CAM Installation Removal on page 7 19 2 Power on the mobile computer 3 Tap the MSA or the MSA Cameo icon to start the application Accessories 7 23 4 Swipe the magnetic stripe card through the reader ensuring the magnetic stripe on the card Is positioned as shown below Figure 7 15 MSR Magnetic Stripe Card Swiping 7 24 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Cable Adapter Module This section describes how to set up and use the CAM Both the CAM and the MSR attach to the mobile computer the same way see Figure 7 12 on p
59. Use Remote Desktop connection to log onto a Windows Terminal Server and to use the programs installed on the server For example instead of running Microsoft Pocket Word the desktop version of Microsoft Word can be run Connecting to a Terminal Server To connect to a terminal server 1 From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap on Files icon Windows Desktop double tap on Remote Desktop Connection Ink or run MSTSC from the command prompt The initial Remote Desktop Connection window appears Options gt gt Figure 5 7 Remote Desktop Connection Window 2 Inthe Computer drop down list type a Terminal Server name or TCP IP address or select a server and tap Connect 3 Inthe next Remote Desktop Connection window type the user name password and domain if required and then tap OK Disconnecting Without Ending a Session To disconnect a session 1 Inthe Remote Desktop Connection window select Start Shutdown 2 Tap Disconnect 3 Tap OK If Terminal Server was disconnected from without ending the session the Terminal Server will continue to execute any running processes Remote Desktop Connection can later reconnect to this same session if the administrator configured Remote Desktop Connection to reconnect to disconnected sessions e Applications 5 13 Disconnecting and Ending a Session To end a session 1 In the Remote Desktop Connection window select Start Shutdown 2 Tap Log Off 3 Tap O
60. Windows CE NET ScanSamp2 Use the ScanSamp2 example application to enable the mobile computer s scanner and display scanned data It also allows the user to change the scan parameters From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap the Scan icon ScanSamp2 Example ScanSamp2 Example File Help Scanning File Help Scanning Data p a 2 54436 02 Type xac Src SCN1 CODE 128 Time 05 52 17 Evt Waiting for Trigger ScanSamp2 Window View Window Figure 5 2 ScanSamp2 Examples ScanSamp2 Windows After a bar code is scanned the following data displays in the scan window e Data Displays the data encoded in the scanned bar code e Type Indicates the hex type scanned e SAC Indicates the scanner used and the bar code type scanned e g Code 128 e ime Displays the time the bar code was scanned Tap Scan to trigger the scanner alternative to pulling the trigger Tap View to display the bar code content in a separate window Tap Param to display the Parameters window see Parameters Window on page 5 7 Tap Codes to display the Selected Bar Code window see Codes Window on page 5 6 Parameters Window The Parameters window Is used to set the scan parameter Applications 5 7 Tap Code ID to select the code ID value None Symbol AIM Tap Scan Type to select the scan type Background Foreground Monitor Tap Feedback Parameters to select the feedback parameters category Good Decode Intermediate Fat
61. and exiting the application To access the Rapid Deployment window tap Start Programs Rapid Deployment Client AB AirBEAM Client MN Command Prompt Internet Explorer El PCLink Rapid Deployment Client ed Remote Desktop Connection 3 7 Warn Boot 3 Windows Explorer Figure 10 1 Rapid Deployment Startup 10 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET The Rapid Deployment window displays Scan Bar Codes OK IX Please scan all of the bar codes Waiting Bar codes left to scan Waiting Figure 10 2 Rapid Deployment Window Table 10 1 Rapid Deployment Window Text Box Button Description Please scan all of the bar codes This text box displays the status of a scanned bar code Waiting indicates the device is ready to scan a bar code OK indicates the device successfully scanned a bar code The Indicator LED bar on the mobile computer turns green and a beep sounds If there are no bar codes left to scan the Rapid Deployment Configuring window displays see Figure 10 4 Bar codes left to scan This text box displays a list of any remaining bar codes to scan 1 D bar codes only When all required bar codes are scanned successfully the Rapid Deployment Configuring window displays see Figure 10 4 Tap About to display the Rapid Deployment Client Info window Rapid Deployment Client v1 1 Build Date September 15 2004 Reset Tap Res
62. and now appears when the Advanced button is tapped from Easy Setup window 4 To disable the password dialog box enter the current password and leave the New Password and Confirm New Password fields blank Tap OK 5 lochange the password enter the current password and enter a new password in the New Password and Confirm New Password fields 6 Tap OK Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 39 Configuring the S24 DS 11 Mb Radio Using a Registry File Default settings for the Spectrum24 radio card can be set on the mobile computer using registry reg files There are two registry files Spectrum24DS reg contains the global registry settings for Mobile Companion and S24Profiles reg contains the profile specific and operating registry settings for Mobile Companion A sample s24Profiles reg file is provided as part of the DCP for MC9000w Edit the file using a text editor See notes in the sample file for the key information that can be modified save this text file as S24Profiles reg Use ActiveSync to copy this file to the Platform folder on the mobile computer Once this file is loaded onto the mobile computer these settings are restored after a cold boot Configuring the S24 FH 2 Mb Radio Using a Registry File Default settings for the Spectrum24 radio card can be set on the mobile computer using registry reg files There is one registry file FHDOTNET reg that contains the global registry settings profile specific and operating
63. and the communication status The default taskbar icons are described in Table 2 9 and the default taskbar buttons are described in Table 2 10 on page 2 27 The Start button functions are described in Start Button on page 2 28 Start Button Open Programs and Status Icons Desktop Menu and Application Buttons Keyboard Input Panel Figure 2 8 Taskbar Table 2 9 Taskbar Icons aT Bee Indicates that the battery is charging Indicates that the battery charge is fully charged 10096 charge The battery status icons provide the battery status in 10 increments from 10 to 100 3 Indicates that the battery is fully charged and the mobile computer is running on external power EN Indicates IP status Only displays when the mobile computer is in emulation mode Indicates that the ActiveSync application is running gt Indicates that the Shift character selection is selected FO Indicates that the Function character selection is selected Indicates that the Control character selection is selected ALT Indicates that the ALT character selection is selected Indicates that the Num lock character selection is selected Mobile A TENDER MM utility Tap to display the LAN status selection menu Y that the mobile computer is in A oha mode The mobile computer automatically enters Alpha mode when the Terminal Emulators are run Operating the MC9000 G 2 2 Table 2 10 Taskbar Buttons km Wwe The Star
64. button Or the warm boot command can be executed from the Programs menu tap Start Programs Warm Boot Files that remain open during a warm boot may not be retained CAUTION 2 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Performing a Cold Boot A cold boot restarts the mobile computer and erases all user stored records and entries from RAM Never perform a cold boot unless a warm boot does not solve the problem Do not hold down any key button or the trigger other than the Power button JN during a reset cAUmow Cold boot resets the mobile computer to the default settings All added applications and all stored data will be removed Do not cold boot without support desk approval eo Any data previously synchronized with a computer can be restored during the next Activesync operation See Chapter 4 Communications for detailed ActiveSync instructions To perform a cold boot Eject Battery to the first stop position 2 Press and hold the Power button while pushing the battery back into the fully inserted position 3 Continue to hold the Power button for 15 seconds After the first five seconds the unit may start to perform a warm boot The message Warm Boot appears in the upper left hand corner of the screen Continue holding the Power button and the unit cycles into a cold boot The message Booting System appears in the top center of the screen 4 Asthe mobile computer initializes its Flash Fil
65. cece eee eee 7 33 Contents xili Nodem COUNTY SED uus os vce hao ER TCR renders 7 34 Pe UI SNC CA TEC QT TO QU EDU 7 35 Changing the Initialization String 7 35 Basic AT Command Na isnt aaro RV ed eevee se ase da 1 3 Commands n e el 1 38 Modem LEU MURIS ess ua cce ceo eX In C Rb KA ees e ee e 7 42 Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide o o o ooooooo 7 43 Installing the Wall Mount Bracket 0 00 00 00 cece eee 7 43 Attaching the Shelf Slide to the Wall Mount Bracket 7 44 One Single Slot Cradle Four Slot Battery Charger 7 44 Two Single Slot Cradles Four Slot Battery Chargers 7 44 idc ndPCo MR 7 45 Installing the Cradle Charger on the Bracket 7 46 Chapter 8 Software Installation or oan be mGA AUN AGA Sou FRRATORITAJTFORESO SER etree ORE 8 3 symbol Windows CE SMDK 222222200 a 8 3 Hardware Requirements a 8 3 Software Requirements 8 3 SIDE LOT ono eed ka d ers dO KG NADA ERES De bo rd 0 3 NINI NG IE cca teas ub AGA KABAN kakak E EN ria 8 4 Software Updates 0 eects 8 4 Chapter 9 AirBEAM Smart OO LLL E Ea 9 3 AirBEAM Package Builder 0 0 00 a 9 3 AirBEAM Smart Client 2 0 eee 9 3 AUBEANTSIMBIT LA Luis rk RERIVA PIA n KG YGR S3 GG Ede oe 9 4 Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client ooooooooooooooo 9 4 PUD FT 9 5 PAGG laD kA ri rn aa 9 5 BU TA oae DNA ee oe NAG ASAN AWA AGA G
66. complex numeric symbology Each character consists of two bars and two spaces each of which is any of four widths The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States User Datagram Protocol A protocol within the IP protocol suite that is used in place of TCP when a reliable delivery is not required For example UDP is used for real time audio and video traffic where lost packets are simply ignored because there is no time to retransmit If UDP is used and a reliable delivery is required packet sequence checking and error notification must be written into the applications A solid state device which produces visible laser light Wide Area Network A radio network that supports data communication beyond a local area That is information can be sent across a city state or even nationwide A warm boot restarts the mobile computer by closing all running programs All data that is not saved to flash memory is lost Wired Equivalent Privacy is specified by IEEE for encryption and decryption of RF wireless communications WEP Encryption Wireless Local Area Network WLAN Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN WNMP WNMS was renamed to AirBEAM Manager Glossary 1 19 Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption The conversion of data into a secret code for transmission over a public network The original text or plaintext is converted into a coded equivalent called ciphertext via an encryption algorithm The ciph
67. components to the script window e Saving the script file Mobile Computer Configuration Opening a New or Existing Script A script file can be created from scratch or based on an existing script file Click Create to create a new script or click Open to open an existing script for example a script provided in the Series 9000 SMDK If an existing script is opened and changes are made saving the changes overwrites the Original script To use an original or Symbol supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script use the Save As function to save the script using a different file name Updating TCM 1 X Scripts script files that were created with older versions of TCM can be upgraded to TCM 2 0 scripts Click Open to open an existing script created with an older version of TCM The Conversion window appears automatically Convert 9000 64M Script Save Script As O w1 18a T CMS cripts PDT9000_64M tem Ra Select a Version S000 54h 3000 v1 17 64M 3000 w1 18a 64M Figure 11 4 Conversion Window Upgrading to TCM 2 0 Copying Components to the Script seript contents are managed using standard file operations such as New Folder Delete and Rename Items can be added to the script by clicking files and folders in the File Explorer window and dragging them to the Seriptwindow The File Explorerwindow supports standard windows multiple files may be selected by clicking while holding the SHIFT or CTRL keys
68. computer Activesync replicates data from the mobile computer so data can be viewed entered and modified on the mobile computer with the host application e Synchronize files between the mobile computer and host computer The files are automatically converted to the correct format e Back up the data stored on the mobile computer Synchronization is a one step procedure that ensures the data is always safe and up to date e Copy rather than synchronize files between the mobile computer and host computer e Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode e g set to synchronize continually while the mobile computer is connected to the host computer or set to only synchronize on command e Select the types of information to synchronize and control how much data is synchronized To install ActiveSync on the host computer 1 Download the latest version of the software from http www microsoft com Refer to the installation and RAS instructions included with the ActiveSync software 2 Set up a partnership via the ActiveSync connection using a serial connection to the host computer Setting up a Partnership After ActiveSync installation is complete the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps the user to connect the mobile computer to the host computer set up a partnership to synchronize information between the mobile computer and host computer and customize synchronization settings Before setting up a partnership
69. computer slips into the cradles for charging the battery in the mobile computer and spare batteries where applicable For detailed cradle setup and charging procedures see e Single Slot Serial USB Cradle on page 8 e Four Slot Ethernet Cradle on page 12 and Four Slot Charge Only Cradles on page 14 e Accessories The mobile computer s snap on accessories provide charging capability when used with one of the accessory charging cables For detailed snap on setup and charging procedures see e CAM on page 24 e MSR on page 18 Getting Started 1 11 e Chargers The mobile computer s spare battery charging accessories are used to charge batteries that are removed from the mobile computer For detailed spare battery charging accessories setup and charging procedures see e Single Slot Serial USB Cradle on page 8 e Four Slot Spare Battery Charger on page 16 e Universal Battery Charger UBC Adapter on page 26 Mobile Computer Charging Procedures The mobile computer main and backup batteries can be charged using a cradle the CAM or the MSR The CAM and the MSR also require a charging cable and a Symbol approved power supply 1 Connect the charging accessory to the appropriate power source see Chapter 7 Accessories for setup information 2 Insert the mobile computer into a cradle or attach the appropriate snap on module 3 The mobile computer starts to charge automatically The amber charge LED in the Indicator LED Bar lights to sho
70. distribute IP addresses and other network parameters setup the server as following IP address pool 1 or 5 IP address per cradle Router gateway address One or more DNS server addresses One or more WINS server addresses Subnet mask To assign the initial cradle IP address you can either use a DHCP server as shown above or use the MobileDox Cradle Manager see nstalling MobileDox Cradle Manager on page 4 16 DHCP server is the preferred method Communications 4 23 Cradle Configuration The MobileDox Cradle Manager allows you to setup the Device IP Address and modify cradle settings See nstalling MobileDox Cradle Manager on page 4 16 for instructions to download and install the software To connect the cradle see Four Slot Ethernet Cradle on page 7 12 Setting the Device IP Address By default the cradle will use DHCP to obtain its IP address However if DHCP fails the Cradle Manager can assign an IP address k 2 3 This is used if the cradle is connected to the network but fails to appear in MobileDox Enter the hardware device MAC address to locate the cradle and assign it a new IP address Launch the MobileDox Cradle Manager on your host computer Click File Set IP Address of Unlisted Device The following screen appears Set IP Address Use this option to set the IF address of an unlisted device This can be used as follows The device must be on the local subnet Enter the MAC address
71. each unique tag found The header line contains a comma separated list of field text descriptions The tag lines contain the Tag ID starting with H for hex and a number indicating how many times the tag was read To save tag data Double tap the RFID icon in the Series 9000 Demo screen Read a tag s see Reading Tags on page 5 30 Tap Save Tap OK to save using the default name and directory or enter a custom name directory and then tap OK ps deb D cu Applications 5 33 File Menu Tap the File menu to view version information about RFID log information reboot or exit the application About Tap File Aboutto view the application version number the RFID DLL version number the RFID reader module firmware version number date code and serial and port information About Gemini RFID symbol The Enterprise Mobility Company w Gemini RFID Version 3 38 Copyright C 2003 2004 Symbol Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved RFIDDLL version 1 42 Firmware version ERE DateCode 200405 171522001 Seriallnfo 404200408229R0004 Port cows Figure 5 26 About Gemini RFID Window 5 34 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Log Tap File Log to display the Log menu Log display ITX 9 Bytes 10 0199 FF 04 BE4 DF 10 6 10 01 99 FF 04 00 38 SF Pull Trigger to Start Reading Attenuation la Ju Reads 38 Lag i Log On Reboot Log Off
72. for these applications in the Symbol Windows CE SMDK for Series 9000 The remaining applications are supplied to provide additional mobile computer functionality Double tap the application icon to open the application The application icons are available in the Series 9000 Demo window and in the Test Applications window The Series 9000 Demo window is the default menu when the unit is turned on The RFID capable mobile computers have an additional icon to enable the RFID application Double tap the Test Apps icon on the Series 9000 Demo window to access the Test Applications window Double tap the Back icon to return to the Series 9000 Demo window The Series 9000 Demo window icon functions are provided in Table 5 1 Series 9000 Demo Test Applications Series 9000 Demo DISPLAY KEYBAD EI K BERNER BATTAY pina SelfTest Notify Keyboard D 9 Display Memory MSR 9000 B t PC Link Terminal 524 DS MSR Printing Back Emulators Settings Cameo El Ec fo series 9000 Demo Window Test Applications Window RFID Series 9000 Demo Window Figure 5 1 Applications Windows 5 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 5 1 Applications Icon Description IN Displays the ScanSamp2 example application that is used to set up and run the example scan application see ScanSamp2 on page 5 6 Displays the nkWiz sample application This file browser displays the system s file structure see
73. from the Encryption drop down list See Table 6 7 on page 6 14 for Encryption option descriptions Mobile Companion OK Authentication Encryption 1p con gt Figure 6 8 Encryption Tab The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft Encryption is an efficient method of preventing data theft and improving data security If an AP is set to 40 bit and an adapter is set to 128 bit the adapter can associate to the AP but no data transmission and reception can take place 6 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 6 7 Encryption Options meme em Open System Use the Open System option as the default setting when no data packet encryption is needed over the network Selecting this option provides no security for the data being transmitted over the network The window displays only the OK and Cancel buttons WEP select WEP for the adapter to use the WEP keys for encryption The window displays several radio buttons and edit buttons to configure the WEP keys Select 40 bit or 128 bit key lengths 128 bit is the default WEP keys are manually entered in the edit boxes Only the required number of edit boxes for a key length is displayed 10 Hex digit value for 40 bit keys 26 Hex digit values for 128 bit keys Use the Key radio buttons to configure the four WEP keys The adapter uses the selected key Tap ResetKeys to set the encryption key to the default val
74. lift battery out of slot 7 28 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET E power zumba pj ay a0 Bl READY or STANDBY or FAULT Green FlashingYellow SolidYellow Bl CHARGING SolidYellow Figure 7 20 UBC Adapter LEDs Table 7 2 UBC Adapter Charge LED Status Indications CU eses o Power is connected to the UBC Adapter READY or Green Charging complete STANDBY or Hashing The battery was deeply discharged and is being trickle charged to bring the voltage up Yellow to the operating level After operating level voltage is achieved the battery charges normally Yellow Charging error check placement of mobile computer spare battery CHARGING Normal charge Accessories 7 29 Modem Module The MDM9000 Modem Module enables data communication between the MC9000 mobile computer and a host computer remotely through the phone lines and synchronizes information between the MC9000 and a host computer This section describes how to setup and use the MDM9000 Modem Module serial Port Phone Port Figure 7 21 Modem Module he following items are required for a modem connection e Telephone number IP address and DNS WINS address information from the dial in server administrator e ial in account on the host system including a user ID and password e RJ11 or RJ12 modem cable e Functioning telephone jack that supports plug in modems connected to the local telephone system e Setup of Cou
75. lt 10 mA sleep Pulse dialing rate 10 pulses per second except where prohibited under TBR 21 Pulse dialing duty cycle 39 61 US make to break ratio rules Ringer equivalence 0 1 dBm standards amp protocols Bell 103 Bell 212A Hayes AT command set and ITU Vs 17 21 22 A amp B 22bis 23 2bbis 27 ter 29 32 32bis 42bis Tone detected Dial busy ring back modem answer tones Blind dialing based on time out periods available for incompatible tones AC Adapter 9V 2 amp regulated AC DC adapter allows unlimited modem use Do NOT substitute an AC adapter using an incorrect AC power supply causes electrical damage to the mobile computer and voids warranty A 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Mobile Computer Pin Outs Pin 17 Pin 1 Figure A 1 Pin Locations Table A 3 MC9000 G Pin Outs Wie SwWme A DCD RS232C TS D R RS232C RS232C CRADLE DET Grounded by cradle when in cradle a Na mes s Technical Specifications A 11 Accessory CAM and MSR Pin Outs Figure A 2 CAM and MSR Serial Connector Table A 4 CAM and MSR Serial Connector Pinouts PT NN ee Po we 5 jmams Kom so m so mem NN NN m m LN LN LN LN NN A 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Keypad Maps Appendix Contents Introductio 2 9 i A oa on oa on A A O 3 E 3360 3 3G 30G O 98 B8 B2 8 8 83 83 8 3 3 89 83 8 B8 98 H82
76. of transmit retries and improve the signal 6 20 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 6 10 Signal Fields Continued es Displays the Relative Signal Strength Indicator RSSI of the signal transmitted between the AP and mobile computer As long as the LED to the right of the graph Is green the AP association is not jeopardized If the LED is red an association with a different AP could be warranted to improve the signal 2 Select the Info tab to view the mobile computer s current software and driver revision data as well as the operating parameters of the current profile Mobile Companion 7 Pox Signal Info IP Status Ping APs Software Version 3 7 0 94 Driver version 3 0 1 18 Firmware Version 3 70 24 Hardware Version 3 0 Country USA Profile Name My Profile E55 ID 123456 Encryption Made Open System Performance Best Figure 6 13 Mobile Companion Info Tab eo The Version and Current Status information on this window may differ from the actual screen on the mobile computer Table 6 11 Info Fields IN Beim Version Information Displays Mobile Companion software driver firmware and hardware versions as well as country information This data is consistent for the mobile computer regardless of which mobile computer profile is the current profile Current Status Displays the mobile computer s current Profile Name ESSID and Encryption mode Mobile computer p
77. on Yes off No set the Wake on Yes off No set the Wake on Yes off No When selected feature is on When selected feature is on standby When selected feature is off set the Wake on Yes off No set the Wake on Yes off No set the Wake on Yes off No When selected feature Is on When selected feature is on standby When selected feature is off ddi1 Display When selected the Display is turned on When selected the Display is turned off 3 48 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 3 6 Example Power Setting Parameters CC San kbd1 Keyboard Power Key Wake Timeout Wake API Call Wake DO D3 D4 kIt1 Keylight Battery Timeout AC Power Timeout DO D3 D4 Activities Trigger Touch Keyboard User set the Wake on Yes off No set the Wake on Yes off No set the Wake on Yes off No When selected feature is on When selected feature is on standby When selected feature is off 60 time value in ms 0 time value in ms When selected feature is on When selected feature is on standby When selected feature is off select Yes to set Activities to function on Battery Power and or on AC Power Select No to set activities not to function on Battery Power and or on AC Power Resource Coordinator Power Key Wake Timeout Wake API Call Wake mos Real Time Real Time Clock Display only only set the Wake onzYes off No Set the Wake on Yes off No Set the Wake on Yes off No CA pS Batt
78. over a radio network can greatly reduce the logistical efforts of client software management In an AirBEAM Smart system a network accessible host server acts as the storage point for the software transfer The AirBEAM Smart Client uses the industry standard FTP or TFTP file transfer protocols to check the host system for updates and if necessary to transfer updated software AirBEAM Package Builder In a typical distributed AirBEAM Smart system software to be transferred is organized into packages In general an AirBEAM Smart package is simply a set of files that are assigned attributes both as an entire package and as individual component files The package Is assigned a version number and the transfer occurs when an updated version is available An AirBEAM Smart package can optionally contain developer specified logic to be used to install the package Installation logic is typically used to update client device flash images or radio firmware Examples of common AirBEAM Smart packages would include packages for custom client application software radio firmware and AirBEAM Smart Client software Once these packages are built they are installed on the host server for retrieval by the handheld device The AirBEAM Package Builder is a utility used to define generate and install AirBEAM packages to a server The packages are then loaded from the server onto a client device equipped with an AirBEAM Smart Client executable For detailed instru
79. read or program an RFID tag Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer Continued DU Pam Cmm bote The mobile computer cannot read lag is damaged Try another tag RFID tags Tag type is not supported by Iry an appropriate tag type reader User is too far from tag Move to within 10 feet or closer of tag based on tag type Wrong tag orientation see Reading RFID Tags on page 2 39 for correct antenna and tag orientation Reader is in a Multi path A Multi path interference zone is a radio phenomena interference zone caused by radio waves reflecting from other surfaces such as concrete floors or metal shelving that causes interference when the reader is at certain distances from the tag Moving the reader up or down or moving closer or further from the tag will eliminate this interference In general reader motion will enhance tag reading abilities The mobile computer cannot Tag is damaged Try another tag RFID taas pilian ags Tag type is not supported by Try an appropriate tag type reader Tag is locked Try another tag User is to far from tag Move the antenna to within two feet of tag based on tag type but not closer than minimum write distance of 1 foot User is too close to tag The minimum write distance is 1 foot from the antenna Moving closer than 1 foot during programing can damage tag and render it unreadable 13 7 13 8 MC9000 G
80. registry settings for Network Interface Card Task Tray Applet NICTT A sample FHDOTNET reg file is provided as part of the DCP for MC9000w Edit the file using a text editor See notes in the sample file for the key information that can be modified oave this text file as FHDOTNET reg in order to override the existing reg file on the terminal Use ActiveSync to copy this file to the Platform folder on the mobile computer Once this file is loaded onto the mobile computer these settings are restored after a cold boot 6 40 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Chapter Contents 7 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET PANO Caere SRA 7 14 HOP rta dra it o ra PAYAPA PP PATE 7 15 Battery Charging Indicators a es wee KAG san KAKA ABRERA KAR C lee 7 15 PAN Slot Spare Cattery GAO Liu oe ive does ERES RERO DH d MGA KOK 99 o NA 1 16 Spare Battery Charging with the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 00 1 17 LED Charge TORO uoa cac wo whl COR RE RC ER ERR CC e ed ae eee xs 1 17 AA onc en cea EE ERR RP KGG ERAI ous AG hha kA PAROA QI EP Cs eR need 1 18 MSR and CAM Installation Removal 0c RR 7 19 Pe ee GNG xe das wena ES Fae TRIP dE e ird nds 7 20 Au ee as a eda on Du IDE sen eee GG AG AA a d a Ee PER AT piis 7 20 OB CORSO a KA quip ced det Weeds KAGALAKAN IER ge BAG o E e 7 21 KNEE sipe Reading sace ed 308 UE d KAG S dade oS MD AG Keb SERA ORDER Eh Ed GG KALA 1
81. sample scanning application Aim the scan exit window at the bar code Pull the trigger Ensure the red scan beam covers the entire bar code The indicator LED bar illuminates red to indicate that the laser is on The indicator LED bar illuminates green and a beep sounds to indicate a successful decode Optimal scanning distance varies with bar code density and scanner optics Right Wrong Figure 2 15 Laser Aiming e Hold the scanner farther away for larger symbols e Move the scanner closer for symbols with bars that are close together ocanning procedures depend on the application and mobile computer configuration An application may use different scanning procedures from the one listed above Operating the MC9000 G 2 35 Indicator LED Bar The Indicator LED bar provides a visual indication of the scan status see Figure 1 7 on page 1 3 Table 2 11 Scan LED Indicators Solid Red Laser enabled scanning in process Solid Green Successful decode Scanning Considerations Typically scanning is a simple matter of aim scan decode and a few quick trial efforts master It However two Important considerations can be used to optimize any scanning performance e Range Any scanning device decodes well over a particular working range minimum and maximum distances from the bar code This range varies according to bar code density and scanning device optics scanning within range brings quick and constant decodes scanning
82. selected in the ActiveSync window on the mobile computer Select a host computer in the ActiveSync window and perform setup Modem RAS connection not allowed by host computer Mobile computer or modem was disconnected from the telephone line while ActiveSync was in progress Synchronization occurred but the session is configured to close immediately after synchronization is complete Select RAS connection in the host computer File Connection Settings window Refer to the ReadMe files located in the Microsoft ActiveSync folder on the host computer Disconnect the modem cable for 30 seconds to hang up the local telephone connection Close any open windows on the mobile computer and any modem connections Verify the synchronizing setting Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 17 Table 13 8 Troubleshooting the MDM9000 Modem Module Continued Symptom Dial out fails Dial out fails continued Possible Cause Location setting is incorrect Incorrect server phone number Pulse dialing not supported for country Dialtone detection not supported The following error message appears Trouble Connecting There is no answer at the number dialed Verify the phone The Connection Manager routes are incorrect Action Verify Dialing Locations Verify Dialing Patterns are correct for the current location For example enter G in the For local calls dial field to di
83. sii ac Gaia cepa A ARE dace dd d ERE d 6 5 programming an RFID tag 5 37 programs flash file system 11 27 PP cresta ori 3 7 3 32 properties 2 30 Bon SONOS aED AWARDED WYNN wae ees 5 11 0 quick release holster 1 6 R AA 6 37 radio signal transmission strength 6 5 radio transmission power oo oooooo 6 17 rapid deployment client 10 3 AA PAA ATA TE 10 3 reading RFID tags 2 39 5 30 IN 5 regional settings 3 7 3 29 xijg NE TT TT ETT T 3 30 AA RAE PARN 3 31 lj APA PG 3 30 ee rar PEKE R AWA ka 3 31 remote desktop o 5 12 remove battery 1 9 removing programs a 3 7 reset A EEE E E 2 23 6 39 TET EIEEE E EA E bes 2 23 icc DENN RT TET EET TT 2 41 RFID zi ENS E RET RETE RT RET 5 33 1 oosseqasseoraiuresrsrasveeseas 5 31 Li APPEAR PNPA 5 35 TIE ROI ona wins sre RR FEES 5 33 inventory eee 5 35 PACU E PEE E E EE ene cs 5 28 eg AA AA wt Op E ds 5 36 DP tyne kee TRIESTE 5 34 Japo ET 5 35 iine AAA 5 37 ko le OOS AA RPG 2 39 5 30 RE APAPAP PRAAN SAP 5 34 Sana qd QUE ag GAGA LANGKA ABE NANG KA 5 32 A 5 38 selecting TaS scx icervexcsdeavedunuduns 5 30 RFID sample application 5 28 Sir cap eee 6 32 S saving RFID tag data 5 32 MONTI MMC 2 35 2 40 scan status lt Emphasis gt See alsodata capture
84. specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the DHCP response option 67 to specify the Package and Package 1 parameters If enabled special RF network registry settings are required to force the DHCP server to return the Bootfile name field option 67 The special RF network registry settings are included but commented out in the radio network registry initialization files essid xxxx yy reg Synchronizing with the Server When the synchronization process is initiated the AirBEAM Smart Client attempts to open an FIP session using the AirBEAM Smart Client configuration Once connected the client processes the specified packages Packages are loaded only if the server version of a given package is different from the version loaded on the client Once the upload process is complete the AirBEAM Smart Client closes the FIP session with the server The AirBEAM Smart Client can launch an FIP session with the server either manually when initiated by the user or automatically Manual Synchronization 1 Configure the AirBEAM Smart Client See Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client on page 9 4 2 From the main AirBEAM CE window select File Synchronize AIrBEAM Smart 9 11 3 Once connected the AirBEAM Synchronize window appears e The Status List displays status messages that indicate the A progress of the synchronization process O e Tap OK to return to the Main Menu This button remains inactive until the synchronization proce
85. the Global Trade Identification Number GTIN The GTIN gives each product its own specific identifying number The EPC is used by RFID devices GL 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET ESD ESS ID Ethernet Flash Disk Flash Memory File Transfer Protocol FTP Frequency Hopping FIP Flash Memory Electro Static Discharge Extended Service Set Identifier defines the coverage area Prior to the release of the 802 11 specification the ESS ID was called the Net ID or Network Identifier For terminals using Spectrum24 radios with the 802 11 protocol an ESS_ID allows facilities to limit which Access Points a mobile computer can communicate with It is set on the Network tab of the Control Panel The terminal can only communicate with Spectrum24 Access Points that have matching ESS IDs Ethernet communication port Allows a wired interface to a radio network An additional megabyte of non volatile memory for storing application and configuration files Flash memory is nonvolatile semi permanent storage that can be electronically erased in the circuit and reprogrammed Series 9000 mobile computers use Flash memory to store the operating system ROM DOS the terminal emulators and the Citrix ICA Client for DOS A TCP IP application protocol governing file transfer via network or telephone lines See TCP IP The use of a random sequence of frequency channels to achieve spread spectrum comp
86. the SMDK allows users to create applications and deploy the applications to mobile computers 8 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET The Symbol Windows CE SMDK for Series 9000 includes the following components e Help HIML based help file containing the Symbol API definitions e PRG Product Reference Guide containing information about the setup and use of the mobile computer e Readme HTML based file containing release notes and last minute help updates e Samples Sample source code showing how to interface with Symbol API functions e Emulator Series 9000 Desktop emulation environment e TCM Terminal Configuration Manager program used to customize and load software Installing the SMDK 1 Download the SMDK from the Symbol website http devzone symbol com 2 Double click the executable file and follow the install screen prompts 3 Once installed the major components of the SMDK can be accessed from the Symbol Windows CE SMDK PDT9000 program group of the Windows Start Menu The components include Help PRG Readme Samples TCM Emulator and Updates 4 The sample applications provide a good overview of the SMDK usage To build a sample application open the Samples folder from the Windows Start menu Open the folder for the desired sample and then open the project file The project file has an extension of VCP Microsoft Visual C v4 0 will automatically launch Select PDT9000 as the Active WCE C
87. the cradle to attempt another synchronization Wait one minute and reinsert the mobile computer in the cradle This allows the cradle to attempt another synchronization Incorrect cable configuration Check your DHCP server and determine which IP address was allocated to the cradle then check connectivity by pinging the cradle Communications software Improperly configured Perform setup as described in Chapter 4 Communications Check your DHCP server and determine which IP address was allocated to the mobile computer slot then check connectivity by pinging the cradle Mobile computer ActiveSync disabled or not configured to accept network connection On the mobile computer tap Start Settings and double tap the Network and Dial up Connections icon Edit an existing connection or create a new connection that is configured to accept the network connection Host ActiveSync disabled or not configured to accept network connection On the host computer check File Connection Settings Allow network Ethernet Server Connection with this desktop computer During communications no data was transmitted or transmitted data was incomplete Mobile computer has successfully connected through the cradle but no data is being transmitted over the connection Mobile computer removed from cradle during communications Replace mobile computer in cradle and retransmit Mobile computer has no
88. to 04 04 to 05 05 to 06 Date 1 15 04 6 18 04 9 13 04 12 06 04 Description Updated Operating system to Win CE 4 2 Added new screens and menus Chapter 2 and Chapter 3 Updated Chapter 6 to include Mobile Companion upgrade from version 3 9 1 to version 3 9 2 Added new 28 Key keypad configurations in Chapter 2 and Appendix B Updated Chapter 3 to include new Bluetooth setup and to include new Power settings Updated Chapter 6 to include additional Mobile Companion upgrades for version 092 Added new MDM9000 Modem Module to Chapter 7 Accessories Added new RFID mobile computer capable of reading RFID tags Added the RFID MC configuration added new figure to show RFID antenna updated the Data Capture section to include RFID tag scanning added new RFID Demo description and added RFID MC Troubleshooting Added Imager Reader Parameters to Chapter 3 Added Meetinghouse AEGIS Client reference to Chapter 6 Added new Chapter 10 Rapid Deployment PONG FUEL cade eR OPERAE OR RR LOEO E EUR Ge oO ERO EN ee li About This Guide I ar quor os EORR e ECC OE BAKBAKAN POE E RO edo KANG XIX DEDE ICON ri ria PETERE RF EXCE CFR seeds ares XX Notational Conventions 00 00 c cece RR XXI Related Documents and Software 00 00 ee Xxil Service Information uu cuu doce do bod durar RN ira dice di xxii 50D SUBDUIT AA xxiii Chapter 1 Getting Started O aer a a a ae PRA AA 1 3 UL cedros dp ma
89. to data collection programming tags the sample application allows erasing locking and killing The mobile computer decodes the information contained by in range RFID tags and beams information Instructions back to the tags While the trigger is pressed the mobile computer interrogates all of the RFID tags within the radio frequency RF field of view The mobile computer captures data from each new tag found and displays a tag icon in the Gemini RFID window When the trigger is released the mobile computer stops interrogating tags The sample application supports the launching of an application that is capable of scanning bar codes or capturing images Launching RFID To launch the RFID sample application double tap the RFID icon in the Series 9000 Demo screen see Figure 5 1 on page 5 3 When the RFID sample application is launched the main Gemini RFID window displays List of unique tags Gemini RFID tags read Attentuation value Number of bits in the selected tag Poll Trigger to Start Reading 64 bit EPC data Attenuation 0 SOO0S00429254041 Reads 7 Total number of times P sA a WM save selected tags was read Menu icons Attentuation slide bar Figure 5 24 Gemini RFID Tags Window Applications 5 29 Table 5 4 Gemini RFID Window Icons Menus Launches the Locate Tag window see Locate Tag on page 5 36 Launches the Program lag window see Program lag on page 5 37 Clears the tag list see Clearing the Displ
90. to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 21 Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal ul ad Y jum Down See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 22 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default State Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 23 Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal ul ad Y
91. too close or too far away prevents decodes Move the scanner closer and further away to find the right working range for the bar codes being scanned However the situation is complicated by the availability of various integrated scanning modules The best way to specify the appropriate working range per bar code density is through a chart called a decode zone for each scan module A decode zone simply plots working range as a function of minimum element widths of bar code symbols e Angle ocanning angle is important for promoting quick decodes When laser beams reflect directly back into the scanner from the bar code this specular reflection can blind the scanner To avoid this scan the bar code so that the beam does not bounce directly back But don t scan at too sharp an angle the scanner needs to collect scattered reflections from the scan to make a successful decode Practice quickly shows what tolerances to work within Contact the Symbol Support Center if chronic scanning difficulties develop Decoding of properly printed bar codes should be quick and effortless Co 2 36 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Imaging The imager version of the mobile computer has the following features e Omnidirectional reading of a variety of bar code symbologies including the most popular linear postal PDFA17 and 2 D matrix code types e The ability to capture and download images to a host for a variety of imaging ap
92. using the Single Slot Serial USB cradle or CAM Press and hold the yellow scan button or the trigger and the Power button simultaneously until the mobile computer resets into IPL 11 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET The mobile computer must be inserted in the cradle or attached to the CAM both with their appropriate power supplies connected to a power source for the mobile computer to reset into IPL Co 3 When the Initial Program Loader menu appears release scan button trigger and Power button Initial Program Loader Platform Application PRIMFIRM SECFIRM ESSID Config Block Windows CE Monitor Splash Screen Power Micro Partition Table System Reset Auto Select Figure 11 7 Initial Program Loader IPL Menu To ensure a successful download do not remove power from the mobile computer while in IPL mode CAUTION 4 Choose Auto Select or use the up and down scroll buttons to select the partition to download then press Enter Mobile Computer Configuration 11 13 Table 11 2 IPL Menu Partitions Contains the files in the Platform folder Application Contains the files in the Application folder PRIMFIRM Contains the primary radio firmware for the Spectrum24 HR radio card Note These partitions must be loaded to use wireless downloads through IPL with the HR radio They are only used by IPL and are not required by the Operating System or the 24 FH radios SECFIRM Contains
93. 00 c eee ee 4 22 Eco aac us Caedegenndedenes E RH o n diea 4 23 Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network 4 2 x MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide Chapter 5 Applications lilin bak T 5 3 UA a GR Bae ond be od he eee EFIE ER d da 5 6 ocansamp2 Windows a 5 6 ea AA 5 LA poe naaa kama TETTE TCR TERTIO TTE 5 0 ee UE dorada tre EP ed TI aH eres 5 9 internet o ASA 9 10 js SA 9 10 Setting up a Proxy Server eee 5 11 Remote Desktop a 5 12 Connecting to a Terminal Server 5 12 Disconnecting Without Ending a Session 0 008 5 12 Disconnecting and Ending a SeSsion 000 eee eee 5 13 AUGIOSAMP ooo 5 13 PP 5 14 Pe LIN Wr 5 16 DOO NOT NOT aa koe tnt KGG BNG KG tee KAG EE LALARGA ies 5 16 PT aes bones bn eee oS GER PIRE bean ben Dra P PERRA eee 5 17 DAT DE dass en SEX PE ohh ak SA 5 18 DIL cen Petes KPO AAR RUN ROS Cae ee E QU eR ee RUE Sa RS eee ERU 5 21 Keyboard cnet eee e 5 22 AAA 5 23 BA ese oe APA esate FORMA ERE ER ER 5 24 ET 5 25 AE i I 5 26 sl AA pirata cia dee oak Le CREER ean ees AA 5 27 iib RU 5 28 LOO raro ESE 5 28 Attentuation Slide Bar 5 29 ictus Pm 5 30 ei AIRE canes oe E 45 PA Er dul LAB ADAN edb MO CR ARYANA 5 30 Clearing the DiS AY Lui qu rr rr radares 5 31 o AA PAPA edo dr ede bee Ors 5 32 A esses cena 5 33 Contents Xi tomm 5 34 sp PAA PAA PAA
94. 000 Multi Media Card Holder Figure 7 1 Removing the Keypad Do not apply more than 4 in lbs of torque when tightening the keypad screws CAUTION 7 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 3 Replace the keypad and re attach using the two screws 90000908 0000 Figure 7 2 Installing the Keypad Multi Media Card MMC The MMC provides secondary non volatile storage however the flash memory is slower than RAM The MMC is located under the keypad see Figure 7 1 on page 7 5 the mobile computer with the keypad detached Follow proper Electro Static Discharge ESD precautions to avoid damaging the MMC Proper ESD CAUTION precautions include but are not limited to working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the operator is properly grounded Do not remove the keypad while the mobile computer is on and do not operate A Secure Device SD card may also be used however security is not supported and only one bit is supported Accessories 7 7 To insert the MMC 1 Remove the two keypad screws and slide the keypad down and lift off see Figure 7 1 on page 7 5 2 lift the MMC retaining door Position the MMC with the contacts down into the MMC holder The MMC corner notch fits into the holder only one way Snap the retaining door closed MMC Pi O O _ MMC Retaining Door Figure 7 3 Inserting the MMC Do not a
95. 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Scanner Settings double tap Scanner Version The Scanner Version window appears CtlPanel Example File Help MDD Yersion PDD version Decoder Yersion Hardware Yersion Ly i Cancel Figure 3 62 Scanner Version Window 2 Tochange any item in the Scanner Version column use the up and down v arrows to select the item 3 Usethe left and right arrow buttons to increment the value Table 3 13 list the Reader Parameter value options Table 3 13 Version Parameters API Version 04 02 MDD Version 05 06 PDD Version 04 11 Decoder Version 00 00 Hardware Version 00 00 4 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window 3 68 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Chapter Contents 4 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET mic ck OUD AR 4 16 Installing MobileDox Cradle Manager 0 00 RII 4 16 Tia abaka AAP TTE CT TRITT 4 17 Mobile Computer Configuration 00s a ma rre mr x Rb nk Rb Rm GG 4 19 DHCP Server Configuration 4 22 Cradle Configuration 00 0 a 4 23 Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network 0 0 20 00 00 eee RR 4 2 Communications 4 3 Introduction The mobile computer is capable of communicating with a number of hosts including development computers serial devices printers etc The available accessories serve as essential data communication de
96. 22 o DESEE och hae eae olei OE et XE E ON eee 7 24 CAM and MSR Communications Setup 7 25 Universal Battery Charger UBC Adapter 0 eee 7 26 AUN CI ANA PAPA APP PEPE 1 29 0 A AGA ALAALA Ph AL bokeh web GALA h KAP GAAN RA NAZI 7 30 Connecting to the Mobile Computer 000 eee eee 1 30 Connecting to the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle 0 00 eee 1 31 Configuring the Mobile Computer for the Modem 0 000 c cece eee eee 7 31 Connecting the Modem isssssssssssseee RR 7 33 Modem EP UN cui ETT MT 7 34 Ol AAA ea BAL ys BEDA er EEEE E E es 7 35 Changing the Initialization String 4 sda ced dee eons toa IR eee de Rer e ds 7 35 Base ST Oa amak haha AKDA KANA E bad BABAI GD AK kA KG DD 7 37 Vn ai eo Hos GA TTE KA hae KAI ha BUKAL hae KAI bee Hs bed AG da 7 38 Modam LEC MOCI AAA 7 42 Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide 0 0 RR 7 43 Installing the Wall Mount Bracket oo oooooooooonooronooo IRImRRRSRMRIRS 7 43 Attaching the Shelf Slide to the Wall Mount Bracket o oo0oooooooooo 7 44 One Single Slot Cradle Four Slot Battery Charger 0 0 0 a 7 44 Two Single Slot Cradles Four Slot Battery Chargers eee eee 7 44 Four Slot Cradle 2 RR Ie 7 45 Installing the Cradle Charger on the Bracket 000 c ccc cee eee eee 7 46 Accessories 7 3 Introduction series 9000 accessories provide a variety of product support capabilities Access
97. 33 Table B 4 43 Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Shift VK Code ASCII Value State State a EM DOWN See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 34 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 4 43 Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Shift VK Code ASCII Value Alpha State AlphaState Decimal Decimal LL E T CN See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 35 53 Key Keypad The 53 key keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and function keys See Table B 5 for key functions and Table B 6 for the keypad mappings The mapping functions include 53 key functions 53 key character map 089000 0000000 0000000 O aao BU 9 000006 5 H000 HOOVES Figure B 3 53 Key Keypad B 36 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 5 53 Key Functions Contrast Func l Volume Func H Volume Func M Table B 6 53 Key Mapping eem em Ems mm Default State Decimal Decimal d l1 1m M j 0 1 Eee p L0 MUTET OL fo fa ue o E l1 1l fe I J Je
98. 500 3500 in increments of 10 Settings 3 65 Table 3 11 Scan Parameters Continued Samen Wee Activity LED Time 0 5000 in increments of 500 4 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window WAV File Use the WAV File window to select a wav file Use the Increment and Decrement buttons to scroll through the wav file listing CtlPanel Example File Help WAY File Decrement Figure 3 60 Scan WAV File Window Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window 3 66 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Device Information Use the Device Information window to view the scanner information 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Scanner Settings double tap Scan Parameters The Scan Parameters window appears CtlPanel Example File Help True Scan Direction False Feedback False Supported Fmts None Max Image Rect 0 0 0 0 ce A ie Jc een Figure 3 61 Device Information Parameters Window 2 Tochange any item in the Device Information column use the up and down arrows to select the item 3 Use the left and right arrow gt buttons to increment the value Table 3 12 list the Reader Parameter value options Table 3 12 Device Information Parameters Beam Width True scan Direction 4 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window Settings 3 67 Scanner Version Use the Scanner Version window to view the scanner version information
99. 51 Printer Parameters Window Settings 3 53 6 Use the left and right gt arrows to select the communication and baud rate Values include Com1 38400 Com1 19200 Com1 9600 Com2 38400 Com2 19200 Com2 9600 Com3 38400 Com3 19200 Com3 9600 Com4 38400 Com4 19200 Com4 9600 LPT1 3 54 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET To view the Version Information double tap the Version Info item in the Printer Settings column 8 Version information includes e API Version e PDD Version e MDD Version e ldVersion CtlPanel Example File Help API Version PDD version MDO Yersion Tld ersion ce v A ie Jc een Figure 3 52 Printer Version Information Window 9 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window a Developer support for adding additional Symbol printer drivers is provided in the SMDK see Chapter 8 Software Installation for the SMDK installation Settings 3 55 Comm Settings Use the Comm Settings window to select the communications settings 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Comm Settings The Comm Settings window appears CtlPanel Example File Help Hn Figure 3 53 Comm Settings Window 2 With Porthighlighted use the left and right arrow buttons to select the appropriate communication setting Comm port selection values are e USB default setting e Seriall 115200 e Seriall O 57600 e Seriall 38400
100. 524 DS Emulators Settings 2 lto dl Figure 2 7 Series 9000 Demo Window Table 2 8 Series 9000 Demo Window Functions C em Displays the Test Applications window see Introduction on page 5 3 for a ilis description of the Test Applications window Test Apps Displays the AudioSamp sample application see AudioSamp on page 5 3 Sounds Displays the image viewer sample application see mages on page 5 14 Images Operating the MC9000 G 2 25 Table 2 8 Series 9000 Demo Window Functions Continued km TOO gp s Displays the control panel menu see Control Panel on page 3 40 Ctl Panel starts the PC Link application see PC Link on page 5 16 Provides access to the terminal emulators see Terminal Emulators on page 2 46 Terminal Emulators Provides access to the S24 DS Settings see Mobile Companion on page 6 4 524 DS Settings Provides access to the 524 FH Settings see Spectrum24 Frequency Hopping FH 5 Settings 1 and 2 MB Radios on page 6 31 S24 FH Settings E Provides information about the OTL application see About OTL on page 5 17 About OTL The Series 9000 Demo window is the factory default launcher menu Application specific shells may vary eu 2 26 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Taskbar The taskbar at the bottom of the window displays the Start button active programs in this case PC Link and Mobile Companion battery status
101. 7 Positioning the Power Supply 7 48 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET JI JILVVC Q N Chapter Contents 8 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Software Installation 8 3 Introduction The Symbol Windows CE SMDK for Series 9000 allows users to develop Windows CE applications for Series 9000 mobile computers This SMDK contains libraries and other Symbol value add software not available in the standard Microsoft Windows CE Platform SMDK Symbol Windows CE SMDK The SMDK installation program loads the required Windows CE components on the development computer used to create the image files for download to the mobile computer Hardware Requirements The minimum system configuration required to install the SMDK is e BM compatible Personal Computer with Pentium 450 MHz processor or higher e Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft or Windows 2000 operating system e 128 MB RAM e 100 MB available hard disk space e CD ROM drive e One available serial port e Mouse Software Requirements Before installing the Symbol Windows CE SMDK for Series 9000 install the following tools e Microsoft eMbedded Visual C v4 0 and Service Pack 1 e Microsoft ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher e Adobe Acrobat Reader 3 0 or higher SMDK Components The SMDK installation program loads all of the SMDK Series 9000 components onto the development computer Once installed
102. A kadiri 9 6 Misc 1 Tab a 9 7 BG DAD rr rd dada AGAHAN ed 9 8 Misca Tal A SSA 9 10 xiv MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide synchronizing with the Server Diar Sunc ONO aede ici di aria rdv AA Automatic Synchronization liliis eee eee AIBEAM Smart Staging a km ds nies boas UR EE eR ote e Oe Chapter 10 Rapid Deployment Client Las Lane AAA Rapid Deployment Window a Scanning BD Bar LOQOS Lou i o epu e hp ROC ER OR YA Chapter 11 Mobile Computer Configuration hinin La OR S duro CIC IO E dor TPP POPE ERES Starting Terminal Configuration Manager 0 00 cece eee Defining Script PODEMOS cios ra Creating the Script for the Hex Image 0 2 eee Opening a New or Existing Script 0 0 00 eee aca TOM TA Sti ons arcere detener aT Re ees Copying Components to the Script So a oe s AAA UNC Ne NOS 562i sk os rede he TT RTT TI the Hex Mage A TCM Error Messages Lucie cicer eate PAKANA RAK PAKAKAK ALAGA Sta EOE APA ERDAS EEG ODER ES RE EE eR Ra UBALDO a Spasi AA Eee tke PREISE E bere y Pix Splash Screen Format ko A PE CRT TETTE snnm with FTO PARERE aai rcd dob n dE EE aa co asus dod ba EROR REO EUR D CERE REPRE C C ON BOT Ls casada qax e ORO nae ddan oes EC e pan Non FFS Partitions o n RR Downloading Partitions to the Terminal aaa Partition Update vs File Update ooooooooooo Upgrade MEQUIS MEMOS viviinorverrr a
103. AA ed de 4b PAA ERAP PRE 12 16 Ka aa Look atat ero PU Oa aOR ee A MEHR ER 12 16 BORD ia ai EROR UHR UR NGA KANA ESI EI ROIG EUER TE A ERR OE ROO 12 16 Start Button 2 a 12 16 AC Power Battery Status Icons 12 17 E AA O UA II 12 17 Ln O Cl rd RAE Arda a 12 17 IN rr iria PAPA PA eee ee 12 17 ccu uc E eer E ee Tee E eee ee eer eer ee 12 17 Si on 6s nese renee wumie PA PP beeen 12 17 Ressting the PE ar gee enw sopor ee a oon nee oras Cards rU dorm BEAN Ode oes RERO ERU 12 18 Desktop Emulator 12 3 Introduction This chapter provides basic instructions for installing and using the emulator The emulator provides software API emulation of the actual MC9000 G The emulator consists of the following components e System Settings Dialog SSD e Emulator User Interface emulator skin e Simulated External File System Flash SD MMC Software Requirements The emulator requires the installation of eMbedded Visual C 4 0 and EvC 4 0 service pack 1 before the emulator can be installed To download eMbedded Visual C 4 0 go to the Microsoft download website http www microsoft com downloads and enter eMbedded Visual C 4 0 into the keyword search parameters Follow the prompts and download eMbedded Visual C 4 0 and EvC 4 0 service pack 1 Installation Procedures The emulator is automatically installed as part of the Symbol Windows CE SMDK for Series 9000 see nstalling the SMDK on page 8 4 Starting the Emulator The emu
104. AM management is enabled during the package synchronization process If enabled RAM management logic is invoked when there is not enough free disk space to download a package The RAM management logic attempts to remove any discardable AirBEAM Smart packages resident on the client This checkbox specifies whether the automatic insertion of a file path separator character should be suppressed when the client generated server package definition file names When enabled the parameter also disables the appending of apd to the package This feature is useful for AS 400 systems in which the file path separator character is a period When this feature is enabled the server directory Directory and package name Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 and Package 4 are appended as is when building the name for the server package definition file When this feature is disabled a standard file path separator is used to separate the server directory Directory and package name Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 and Package 4 when building the name for the server package definition file In addition an apd extension is appended automatically 9 7 9 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 9 4 Misc 1 Tab Continued THP This checkbox specifies whether the TFTP protocol is to be used to download files By default the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the FIP protocol This checkbox specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Cl
105. Adjust the RAM allocation as required for reinstalling user programs Settings 3 37 Device Name Tab Use the Device Name tab to customize the device name and description 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the System icon 2 Select the Device Name tab System Properties OK General Memory Device Name min Your device uses this information to identity itself to other computers Device name without spaces Windows Ecd Device description WindowscE Device Figure 3 39 System Properties Device Name Tab 3 Enter a device name for the mobile computer in the Device name without spaces field 4 Enter a device description for the mobile computer in the Device description field 3 38 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Copyrights Tab The Copyrights tab displays relevant copyright information 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the System icon 2 Tap the Copyrights tab to view the copyrights statement System Properties Device Name Copyrights Depending upon which components you are running your product may contain the following third party technologies Portions of this software are based on NESA Mosaic NCSA Mosaic was developed by the National Center for Supercomputing Applications at the University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign Distributed El Figure 3 40 System Properties Copyrights Tab Settin
106. CE NET Magnetic Stripe Reader This section describes how to set up and use the snap on MSR with the MC9000 G The MSR snaps on to the mobile computer and can be removed easily when not in use Latches Card Reader Slot Pogo Pin Pass Through Connector Latch Grip Communications Port Power Port Figure 7 11 MSR The MSR Provides mobile computer s operating power and battery charging power when used with the Symbol approved power supply and cable Allows the mobile computer to capture data from magnetic stripe cards To download MSR data capture software visit http devzone symbol com Provides serial connection through the serial pass through port for communication with a serial device such as a host computer For communication setup procedures see Serial Communications Setup on page 4 10 Provides USB connection through the USB pass through port for communication with a USB device such as a host computer For communication setup procedures see USB Connection Setup on page 4 13 Charges the mobile computer s battery when used with the appropriate power supply Accessories 7 19 MSR and CAM Installation Removal To attach snap the MSR or the CAM onto the bottom of the mobile computer Figure 7 12 MSR and CAM Installation To remove squeeze the latch grips and pull the MSR or the CAM from the mobile computer Remove the MSR from the bottom of the mobile computer before using a cradle for charging and c
107. CE NET Accessories single Slot Serial USB Cradle charges the mobile computer main battery and a spare battery It also synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through a serial or a USB connection Four Slot Ethernet Cradle charges the mobile computer main battery and synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through an Ethernet connection Four Slot Charge Only Cradle charges the mobile computer main battery Four Slot Spare Battery Charger charges up to four mobile computer spare batteries Magnetic Stripe Reader MSR snaps on to the mobile computer and adds magstripe read capabilities Cable Adapter Module CAM snap on required to connect the following cables to the mobile computer e AC line cord country specific and power supply charges the mobile computer e Auto charge cable charges the mobile computer using a vehicle s cigarette lighter e DEX cable connects the mobile computer to a vending machine e Serial cable adds serial communication capabilities e USB cable adds USB communication capabilities e Printer cable adds printer communication capabilities Universal Battery Charger UBC Adapter adapts the UBC for use with series 9000 batteries Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide Use for wall mounting applications Optional Keypads Application specific keypads Multimedia Card MMC Provides secondary non volatile storage Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide use for wal
108. D Tab To setup identification for remote networks select the Network ID tab and enter the user name password and domain name used to log on to the remote network Identification Motes Network ID Windows CE uses this information to gain access to network resources Enter the user name password and domain provided by your network administrator User Mame Password Domain Figure 3 26 Owner Properties Window Network ID Tab 3 28 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET PC Connection Use the PC Connection Properties window to set the mobile computer communication baud rate with the host computer 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the PC Connection icon PC Connection Properties OK PE Connection SOS SOI DOI IIIS IOSD 3999909 999A9D929939999993939999393939532093993953351332035723005 ta Enable direct connections to the desktop computer When enabled connect to the desktop computer using Seriali 115200 Change Connection Warning Changing the connection may disable communications with your desktop computer Figure 3 27 PC Connection Properties Window 2 select the Enable direct connections to the desktop computer checkbox to allow for direct connections 3 Tap Change Connection to change the selection Change Connection OK xi Connect to desktop computer using Warning Changing the connection may disable communicati
109. ECRaR A derer HERR E demure vd qoe EIU ADI Ped eb 5 17 ED rr ii dd 5 18 NUN awan AIN ae ew UPPER A PI keene CES 5 21 d ee ee ee ee E ee ee er ree re 5 22 Akon RC AA PAPAPK AA 5 23 EIAS La KA DAR GANG NLANG oe Bike ee ER ERU oia acia eses 5 24 Du od FP T 5 25 ORIO on base EP Sa PEU od ad oe CAPO ee a ee d qid 5 26 PGP gp 9 5 ake eho ook ab o ias oe 5 2 1 OT c 5 28 LUNG T TT Ve ES 5 28 An NS BN La wg eet 95 Edo E d ASH AA 5 29 A 5 30 I FG ox oe vice ered E es he SERIE EO dn lb eR d Red dp qe d 5 30 Clearing the Display onnon nannaa RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRIRRRR RR RR s 5 3 Saving Tag Data RR RR RI e e ees 5 32 EISE 5 e rrr Rx EIE CERE eae O 5 33 CAP a ed ey dy hh ee ke Oa AP 5 33 Ce ee AA AYE 5 34 PO AMA re rt oath DANI Sen eae bd dn pee ena KAN 5 34 i AT hb Fon eae dns ENEE ede eas E RK dG oo KAILA E A ANE E EE 5 35 EIER EAE CARP ond os bed oes nee eget RA CES EE ane 5 35 NVeENtOTY occ ced ae PAPA AAP PERO 5 35 Poi NE anh a TEITE TEET EA oe IES ee AO 5 36 PU a ee re ee ee ee eee ee ree ere 5 3 Sean Ea ag dea th a ah es 0G ae a PAA En a 5 38 Applications 5 3 Introduction Two type of applications are provided Example applications provide the application developer with sample applications that can be used to assist in application development The source code is available
110. FIP password that corresponds to the FTP user specified in the User field The specified Misc 1 Tab his tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features AIrBEAM Smart Server Misc 1 Misc 2 RAM Management Suppress Separator TFTP C WNMS Table 9 4 Misc 1 Tab es MM Auto load RAM Management This drop down list is used to specify how the AirBEAM Smart Client is to be invoked automatically when the client device is rebooted The selections are Disable the AirBEAM Smart Client is not invoked automatically during the boot sequence Interactive the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the boot sequence The package synchronization process is started automatically The Synchronization Dialog box appears and the user is required to press the OK button when the process is complete Non interactive the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the boot sequence The package synchronization process is started automatically The oynchronization Dialog box is displayed but the user is not required to tap OK when the process is complete The Synchronization Dialog box terminates automatically Background the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the boot sequence The package synchronization process is started automatically Nothing is displayed while the synchronization process is occurring This checkbox specifies whether the automatic R
111. Incorrect cable configuration Reattach mobile computer to MSR and retransmit see your System Administrator Communications software is not installed or configured properly Perform setup as described in Chapter 4 Communications 13 15 13 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET MDM9000 Modem Module Table 13 8 Troubleshooting the MDM9000 Modem Module Symptom Possible Cause Action Mobile computer is not communicating through the modem The modem cable is not fully connected Connect the modem cable securely to both the modem and the telephone jack Modem is not securely connected to the mobile computer Reconnect the modem to the mobile computer Communication software is not installed or configured properly Set up the communication software Problem in the telephone lines discharged which shuts off power to the modem Mobile computer s battery is low or Connect a conventional telephone and dial the remote modem to verify the telephone lines are functioning If the remote modem does not answer the call and emit answering tones contact the remote System Administrator Install a charged battery in the MC9000 or use an external DC power adapter to recharge the battery ActiveSync falls A partnership was not established with the host computer Establish a partnership with the host computer Host computer is not
112. K Double tap this grid to set the double tap sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between taps Double tap this icon to test your double tap settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above Figure 3 35 Stylus Properties Double Tap Tab Select the Double Tap tab Double tap the checkerboard grid at a comfortable speed Double tap the clapboard to test the settings Tap OK to apply changes ot a NA 3 34 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Calibrate Tab 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Stylus icon Stylus Properties OK Double Tap Calibration If your device isn t B responding properly to your taps vou may need to recalibrate your screen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate Figure 3 36 Stylus Properties Calibration Tab select the Calibration tab In the Calibration tab tap Recalibrate Tap a targets and follow the on screen messages Tap OK NBA WN Settings 3 35 System Use the System Properties window to view general system properties change memory settings input device name and view copyright information General Tab The General tab view displays general system settings 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the System icon 2 Select the General tab to view basic system and computer properties System Properties OK General Mem
113. K AudioSamp Use the AudioSamp application as an example of how to work with audio files such as recording and playback The AudioSamp application can only be used on mobile computers that have the audio enabled option 1 Fromthe Series 9000 Demo window double tap the Sounds icon The AudioSamp Example window appears AudioSamp Example AudioSamp Example File Help File Help Audio Status Audio Status Playing Application Wav LASER Recording Untitled way Audio Progress Audio Progress lL gt OI CAN Figure 5 8 AudioSamp Application Window 2 Tap the file folder to access the sounds files The default directory location Is Application Wavi this directory provides wav files that can only be used on the units that have the optional wav file capability For units that do not have the optional wav file capability select wav files from the Platform Alias directory 3 Double tap a file name to select the wav file 4 Tap the green triangle button to play the file 5 Tap Exit to return to the Series 9000 Demo window 5 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Images Use the mages application as an example of how to work with image files panning zooming saving and reading 1 From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap the mages icon The magesViewer Example window appears EIRE342 jng File Help ENENENEES FEST ET Figure 5 9 Image Window 2 Select the fo
114. KAG TUR AT custom scheme coco 9221 D data capture imager operational modes image capture mode 2 37 WGI caras A 104 Sen O IG TC TEE CE S Index date settings T re S DCP for MC9000w ess 1 6 6 39 default gateway 646 demo program RHD TUN naa 5 28 Device Configuration Package for MC9000w 1 6 6 39 device management 9 6 3 17 DEX cable anuna nananana 16 74 m mma NNNM 34 AS e e directory structure 2 44 sog deco ACE y display contrast cse sededp esu wana atasan 2722 display settings Luisa asas no rio 98 diversity antenna 6 37 E I I srta rara A electro static a oO encryption 4 30 555643 128 bit shared key 30 40 bit shared key A30 KEIDBIUS irrita AN open system CART 4 30 6 14 TRIP PNPA lt A O encryption algorithm 6 36 end task R entering data with scanner dd entering information 23 scanning E T enterprise ier u wi Hi protected a access 6 30 error messages 11 21 11 23 z AA AA i 7 5 7 6 A 427 6 5 6 23 6 32 F file explorer iia scarce rr arica 1154 file system directory structure PITA AE 2 44 flash card 1 6 7 3 7 6 IN 3 flash file SySteM oooooooooooo 11 27 downloading partitions 11 30 non FFS pa
115. LED Indicators Table 7 6 Modem LED Indicators ub e Modem is not properly connected to the mobile computer modem is not receiving power Modem is connected to the mobile computer and is receiving power solid Amber Mobile computer is communicating with the host computer Accessories 7 43 Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide This section describes how to install and set up the MC9000 Wall Mount Bracket and Shelf Slide to mount cradles to a wall Bracket Shelf Slides Mounting one single slot cradle Figure 7 31 Wall Mounting Bracket with Shelf Slide When installed on a wall the mounting bracket and shelf slide enable mounting one or two single Slot cradles to a wall Use two brackets to mount a four slot cradle Installing the Wall Mount Bracket To install the wall mount bracket for use with one or two single slot cradles or four slot chargers place the smaller surface of the bracket against the wall or vertical support structure and secure with four 1 4 screws use two of the three screw holes in each row Insert screws os e Insert screws Figure 7 32 Wall Mounting Bracket Mounting Screws 7 44 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET If using the bracket and slide with a four slot cradle secure a second bracket to the wall next to the first aligning the horizontal screw holes on the second with those of the first Attaching the Shelf Slide to the Wal
116. MES narran 3 6 3 16 3 51 IPR started deusata ada 6 14 transmit retries seis rindas 6 19 A 13 4 MC906R G REID 13 4 13 6 A A E Pa G 6 19 U UBC adapter 0c babad erar RERO GR 1 6 7 3 DINER AA APA A 1 5 USB charger 2224 002 ecececeddeakereees 1 6 7 4 using headset oi ce aces dseserrecactewiaudes 2 23 using stylus a 1 13 12 16 V version Mobile Companion 6 20 IU aia saa PAGE RA erano ERA obe Rara 2 22 W wall mounting bracket 1 6 7 3 WAM DOOI TE RR RT RTT 2 23 5 34 PET A Exe krsi 5 10 BEP pios dash ratia porra os 6 14 wi fi protected access enterprise level 6 30 WINS 2 aa 6 16 6 22 wireless lu APA cerns 4 2 WERE LAN AA 4 2 WLAN Profiles e sso ES 6 5 IN 7 IN 8 MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide Tell Us What You Think We d like to know what you think about this Manual Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to 631 738 3318 or mail to symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza M S B 4 Holtsville NY 11742 1300 Attention Technical Publications Manager IMPORTANT If you need product support please call the appropriate customer support number provided Unfortunately we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above Manual Title please include revision level How familiar were you with this product before using this manual L Very familiar L Slightly famili
117. MM Figure 12 2 Emulator Startup Storage Settings 3 From the Emulator drop down list select either PDT9000 Gemini53key tor a full view of the mobile computer Or PDT9000 Gemini53keysplit for a split view of the mobile computer 4 The Tool drop down window displays the selected Embedded Visual C tool 12 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Geminib3keysplit Split View Geminib3key Full View Figure 12 3 Emulator View Options 5 Select the A ways on top check box to keep the emulator view on top of all other programs or leave the box unchecked to allow other programs to display on top of the emulator view 6 Click Launch to start the emulator Desktop Emulator 12 7 Emulator Parameter Settings and Displays The Emulator System Settings window is divided into three parts emulator settings emulator tabs and emulator LEDs emulator System Settings E E LO xl Emulator Porson Gemini53keysplit Stop Emulator Tool Embedded Visual C Exit Always on top Emulator Settings Memory MB fie Communication Ethernet Shared Debug Port COM2 Browse Stop Action C Tum off emulator C Save emulator state Prompt Emulator Tabs Emulation CO b41 com Browse LIE EE E MU OM GREEN FED FUNC SHIFT LNTL COMM Emulator LEDs TA 3 E pu e uw 2 cu Tm Im on Im tu T ug TU m a 3 Pa
118. Minimum power to set the mobile computer to the lowest transmission power level Use the minimum power level when communicating with other devices in very close proximity Additionally select minimum power in instances where little or no radio interference from other devices is anticipated 6 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 6 9 Power Tab Fields Continued a GN Automatic Power Saving Switches to Best Network Performance when an AC power supply is detected If a battery Mode is used an appropriate setting between Best Network Performance and Acceptable Network Performance is automatically chosen based on a real time analysis of network usage The Automatic Power Saving Mode is the default setting and extends the operating time before the battery is recharged Manual Power Saving Mode Use to select a performance level suited to intended operation There are six settings ranging from the Best Network Performance using the most battery power to Acceptable Network Performance using the least battery power A network performance description Is displayed for each power range 4 Tap OK to implement power consumption changes for the mobile computer profile Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 19 Status select Status from the Mobile Companion menu to view the wireless network connection status 1 e Select the Signal tab to display a real time graph of the signal quality of the mobile
119. Mode On Off Terminal Configuration Host Profiles Message Recall Free Cursor Mode Close Session Previous Session Next Session View Mode On Off Display Backlight On Off Keypad Backlight On Off Table B 11 5250 Emulation Keys Back Tab Clear Delete Dup Enter Erase Input Field Exit Field Minus Help Home Insert Print Reset Roll Up Roll Down system Request Tab Left Arrow Right Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow 1 lt Func gt lt Space gt L NN Keypad Maps B 55 B 56 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 11 5250 Emulation Keys Continued ENLINNNNLI NM Table B 12 5250 Character Map er e eme p ome p eem Ro mem p mee ra EN EI HA pe a CC poe ble C pole pole pope Keypad Maps B 57 B 58 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 12 5250 Character Map Continued CO CECI ON Coco Fo E NENL NN Fo E NEL B mee B mee mee NENL CNN RF mem s mee Ro mee Keypad Maps B 59 Table B 12 5250 Character Map Continued Ge esee NENL NN mew po Co p EC EENL IN C CSI pole C CON E e NEN Ca INN EII pla B 60 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 12 5250 Character Map Continued CEC COMO EOS Ro pe O fame Keypad Maps B 61 VI Emulator Keypad The VI Emulator keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a funct
120. O EIN a e ae RN a Pa C mole E E EI C B 68 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 16 VT HP Character Map Continued me e mee SO e Bo e BO e NENL NN Cc E E so mme p 895 s me CON NNNM Keypad Maps B 69 Table B 16 VT HP Character Map Continued me erence Ro E CON e C CON NN C lama Ho mee mo lame Mo lame PON Cc CON ECO C C e CO pe Ro e EN CO ll NIJI lt B 70 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 16 VT HP Character Map Continued We e ema C CON EI CON E CO EI IN E 802 11 802 11b ACK NAK Access Point Glossar A radio protocol that may be used by the Symbol opectrum24 radio card Symbol radio cards that use the 802 11 protocol also have an ESS ID ACK NAK is the default software handshaking Access Point AP refers to Symbol s Spectrum24 Ethernet Access Point It is a piece of communications equipment that manages communications between the host computer system and one or more wireless terminals An AP connects to a wired Ethernet LAN and acts as a bridge between the Ethernet wired network and IEEE 802 11 interoperable radio equipped mobile units such as a mobile computer The AP allows a mobile user to roam freely through a facility while maintaining a seamless connection to the wired network GL 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET AirBEAM Man
121. OP 4 3 do PAA PP E 6 16 6 21 IP config jp 6 16 gateway MM A 6 16 IP ONSE a ank PAPAL UKG KAN 6 16 subnet mask 00 0000 eee 6 16 DR inane Sadia ae Heese Renee AA 6 16 lg i er CP 12 17 IG DE T 6 21 M AA ARA 11 30 error messages 0 11 23 eOr SCEO EP PUDE 11 23 K kerberos sestaroanas crees 4 28 4 30 6 8 6 9 OO a RARA 3 6 3 23 A 7 3 keypad special functions 2 22 L Lurpome A 1 14 lr EP 4 28 6 10 CAND VANS Lo eusoasnh re ERR ERRARE tess 6 5 M PA ac oi a et Vb Rods 6 22 magnetic stripe reader 1 6 7 4 main battery aran rirasiprscnda 1 7 o mee PA KAWING RAANG EARS DA 1 7 Main Mni cick cacc cseceesthens rar eun se 3 39 A O 2 24 maintenance 0 a 13 3 manual power saving mode 6 18 MDMS9000 aaaea anaana 7 29 DU A 3 36 per cg AAP PT 3 36 A 3 36 MicroAP Authentication Options 6 36 missed beacons 0 0 ee eee eee 6 19 PM qr acieaner 1 6 7 3 7 6 mobile companion 000 eee 6 3 AA APA 4 2 mobile computer A 11 28 Mobility Services Platform Console 10 3 mode 802 11 ESSID 20 ee 6 7 conr rre nara aa 6 7 DU A A T PVP 6 Lk Ran M 6 7 UN APA 6 7 UE WANG PABABANG XR deg ds 6 7 DEED uas oad cesda tasas 9d FA TRE A 3 7 3 18 modem communications 3 18 Modemi IOUS sco dao sqased
122. PDA NAA PASA 1 29 EIN venues house rotar datar pi s 10 3 nj dede PRA 1 6 7 4 7 18 installation 00 0 0 0c ee eee ee 7 19 magnetic stripe reading 1 22 power CONNECtION ooo ooooo 7 20 serial connection 7 18 7 21 7 25 muti media CHO au essen KAG BANGLA 1 6 7 3 7 6 N network and dial up 3 7 notational conventions 05 XXI numbers SETINOS socccscsexentn ccek exer es 3 7 0 open system ooooooooooo 4 30 6 14 operating environment 0 005 A 3 COMING error arpa du MS 6 5 IIS aoe oe ee acne TT TEE 3 26 COE UG mp PR 3 7 P partitions DONDIDAQE gor acan es ciaeeehtas acca 11 30 AA APA 11 27 ITE AA AA 11 29 Index splash screen o o o 11 29 i Qu nata oe Oe awe cues a ets 1 3 parts of the mobile computer 1 4 parts OT the terminal aria rra 1 3 PDF417 Bab Taster DBBO LL esser hosed excuses 2 36 smart raster 0 0 cee eee 2 36 js ATCP 4 29 6 12 A ES 6 5 6 22 pin outs Masa TTC N A 11 mobile computer 00 A 10 IO orar ewes 1 13 2 23 12 17 power saving mode IIA rior Trad s VET 6 18 HEN dag sodas pedearsneeansaeieee bes 6 18 Power Saving Modes 6 17 power mobile companion 6 33 BUE DIE rara bias sense ness 1 6 7 4 profile sic dio M 6 26 i 6 26 lj m 6 26
123. PS AA 5 34 PA ii od PS ERA REPEAT ER 5 35 OSI xc rac cna buen hee cease AA AA 5 35 DEED Leo NAA BN NB castes E ode ee haba ne haaha ka 5 35 Locate lag 2 a 5 36 ENE Oks e m 5 3 o An 5 38 Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration Mio AMA 6 3 MOE LONA irritar dador diaria iia 6 4 PICU LAN o oa rada PA AA ib 6 6 A 6 19 A 6 24 Linn A AA AA AA YA 6 26 salt kakay AA AA bod EUER AA AA 6 26 Creating a New Profile 6 26 STR SPE cies dud dada 6 26 Ordering Profiles 6 26 Using LEAP for Wireless Network Security 6 27 Configuring Advanced Password Options 6 27 Enterprise Level Wi Fi Protected Access a 6 30 AEGIS Security Client RR 6 30 opectrum24 Frequency Hopping FH Settings 1 and 2 MB Radios 6 31 MOISES Aen 6 32 leis o dons 6 34 Sal Pe Bebra ones IS A HEN ons 6 35 WLAN Adapter Tab RR RR 6 3 Password Protecting NCPA cece eee eee ee 6 38 Configuring the S24 DS 11 Mb Radio Using a Registry File 6 39 Configuring the S24 FH 2 Mb Radio Using a Registry File 6 39 xii MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide Chapter 7 Accessories fisso oe AA er a eer eee ANA 7 3 4 rrr 1 3 Keypads AAA 7 3 PAD AAA APO e EPTESTNA 7 3 Snap on Modules 7 4 oro ee ee ee ee ee oe E 7 5 Replacing the Keypad cece eens 7 5 Multi Me
124. Parameters Laser Values Description Reader Type Laser type scan engine is used Aim Type Trigger Timed hold Trigger mode On off controlled by the trigger Timed Release Trigger hold mode Trigger scan be released but it remains active for the specified period of time Timed release mode Activation stops after a specified period of time even if the trigger is held Aim Duration 0 60 000 ms Sets the Aim Duration time duration 0 60 000 ms in increments of 100 ms Aim Mode Dot Slab Reticle None Use only None no aiming or Slab slab aiming Beam Width sets the Beam Width duration to normal or narrow Raster Mode Smart Cyclone None Raster Mode is not supported Always Open Beam Timer 0 60 000 ms Sets the maximum amount of time that the laser remains on 0 60 000 ms in increments of 100 ms A value of 0 sets the laser to stay on Control LED Control LED is not supported LED Level High Low LED Level is not supported Class 1 Sup Class 1 Sup is not supported Redundancy None Bidirectional sets the read direction for the barcode redundancy Bidirectional reads in both directions Linear Sec All codes 2 sets the number of times a barcode is re read to confirm an accurate decode All codes 3 All codes 2 Two times read redundancy for all bar codes Long 2 Short 3 All codes 3 Three times read redundancy for all bar codes ohort Redun Long 2 Short 3 Two times read redundancy for long bar codes three times
125. Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer Continued mim cm Mm The mobile computer cannot Tag is damaged Try another tag erase RFID tags Tag type is not supported by Try an appropriate tag type reader Tag is locked Try another tag User is to far from tag Move the antenna to within two feet of tag based on tag type but not closer than minimum erase distance of 1 foot User is too close to tag The minimum write distance is 1 foot from the antenna Moving closer than 1 foot during erasing can damage tag and render it unreadable The mobile computer cannot lock Tag is damaged Try another tag RFID tags Tag type is not supported by Try an appropriate tag type reader Tag is already locked Try another tag User is to far from tag Move the antenna to within two feet of tag based on tag type but not closer than minimum lock distance of 1 foot User is too close to tag The minimum write distance is 1 foot from the antenna Moving closer than 1 foot during locking can damage tag and render it unreadable The mobile computer cannot kill Tag is damaged Try another tag RFID tags Tag type is not supported by Try an appropriate tag type reader Tag is not locked Lock tag first User is to far from tag Move the antenna to within two feet of tag based on tag type but not closer than minimum kill distance of 1 foot User is t
126. Rn 2 29 Task Manager and PODES oorsrrrraro ker p WAG PG KG KAG Rx ee REGE 3 X Y X SED RR OES 2 30 Task Manager AAA 2 30 o AAP TEE ee E AA EMI E E 2 31 Enter ASAS 2 33 Entering Information Using Keypad cs oki ond E S ER DA CIRC lee CUR iiiki ebd HER Pn dera 2 33 Entering Information Using the Keyboard Input Panel 0 00 0 00 2 cece eee 2 33 Entering Data via the Bar Code Scanner Scan Wedge 000 0 0 cece eee eee 2 33 Er i dpe hd pid ob be NN A paa kB KUAN 2 34 Laser SCANNING nent nen bende ett es 2 34 II IL AA AA ed EEE ee ne ee ee 2 35 Seanina CUNG HOO oai KARD KG GG KG BG CIR OE ERO bende ned deis aaa 2 35 MEI Lis st PII eek he ee a ge AA AA 2 36 o APA PAOPAO REAR oR PET Sdn Gh TU een E GR 2 36 io qq TRENT ong dos A A LENT 2 36 Jo ha B onsen be dra cuss KAB ANA Ph esr aa eins bee Cab han DNA 2 36 ala aka ultr EE 2 3 Aming ihe AA ia PP PP RA ERAT Aen 2 3 ux NG NO RAO L 2 39 aue d Vat AA AA AA YA 2 39 A GG hoe basen KNA eee on DON WENG bead denned LLANA NAA KABAN sn E EET 2 40 Resetting the Mobile Computer n on a 2 41 PET AP BR KTA NAN PAKA dee doa 2 41 PENOSO Le BUB o oo cae etr eh ek Re ERU AA AA PRA 2 42 Waking the Mobile Computer e RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRR RII 2 43 File System Directory Structure RR RR IIl 2 44 A Pc E EE i 4s 2 eS 2 45 EID FU aa de ho KAG hd Kae BA Apr Ges Md he enh aw bend hae io dud ded p RU ded AA ER od 2 45 o E EET
127. Saving the Script Modifications to a script file can be saved using the Save or the Save As function Saving changes to an existing script writes over the original script To use a Symbol supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script use the Save As function 11 9 11 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Building the Image Once the script is created the hex image defined by the script can be built As part of the build TCM performs a check on the script which verifies that all files referenced in the script exist This check is important for previously created scripts to ensure that files referenced in the script are still in the designated locations To build scripts 1 Click Build on the TCM toolbar The Configure Build window appears Configure Build For MC9000w v1 0 64M Build Path C Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages MCIO00w v0 1 Hex Images Browse Select Item To Build Build File Format w Partition Table parttbl hex i Compression ASCII Restricted Set Splash Screen Application ESSID Figure 11 5 Configure Build Window 2 Select the items partitions to build using the check box es to the left of each named partition 3 The Build Path defines where to store all built partitions Select hex image COMPRESSION to reduce the size and speed up the download Click OK and follow the on screen instructions 6 Mobile Comp
128. TETTE 3 58 header Faama Lea cbe op C CERDO EC do E E 3 59 Interface Parameters cick wae cic deena dad axes Ek dea doce d CRETA ERR CC E o RC OR 3 62 Scan Parameters 2 00 ete cnet bebe beeen eas 3 63 VAT FB a irae drei RE ende ee nee bier dees NG PAG be dee oli AKA hades had 3 65 ee cen os AD se av eens stubs dase cones hs asd EFE EP 3 66 scanner VBrSIOD c0ccccccacccaccecccdacdectdduceededaacesceagasassaaseceeads 3 67 3 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Settings 3 5 Introduction This chapter provides basic instructions for customizing the mobile computer by adjusting settings The system settings are accessed from the Windows CE Control Panel menu see Table 3 1 on page 3 6 the Series 9000 Demo menu see Table 3 4 on page 3 39 and the Control Panel menu see Table 3 5 on page 3 40 Windows Control Panel Menu To view available options for the mobile computer settings tap Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Device L E Device Dialing Display Management Input Panel Keyboard Mouse Figure 3 1 Windows Control Panel Menu Table 3 1 lists the applications available in the Windows Control Panel Menu 3 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 3 1 Windows Control Panel Menu Icons Oe IN Bluetooth Scan for and setup Bluetooth compatible hardware see Bluetooth Device Properties on page 3 8 Device for more informa
129. a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier Enter the IP address as a dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 7 27 oubnet Mask Most TCP IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage routed IP addresses Having an organization s network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address for example 255 255 255 0 Gateway The default gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination DNS The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP addresses It is also used to control Internet email delivery Most Internet service requires DNS to operate properly If DNS is not configured Web sites cannot be located and or email delivery fails WINS WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 17 3 Select the Power tab to set the Radio Transmission Power level and the Power Saving Modes for the mobile computer profile Mobile Companion OK Encryption IP Config Power apr Radio Transmission Power Infrastructure Automatic Ce Encryption IP Config Power lap Radio Transmission Power Ad Hoc
130. active connection Data is being transferred over the S24 radio link An icon will be visible in the status bar if a connection is currently active Temporarily disable the radio link to force data transmission through the cradle Tap the wireless LAN icon and tap WLAN Profiles from the menu Tap the Mode tab Enter an in valid value in the ESSID text box and tap the OK button Verify that the radio link has been disabled Once the data transmission has been completed re enable the radio link Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 13 3 Troubleshooting the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Continued All Communication Status LEDs are flashing red Communication Status LED does not light up The unit could not configure itself or it has lost the lease on its IP address Failed automatic cradle configuration via local DHCP Service Connect the unit to an Ethernet network with a correctly functioning DHCP server Connect a properly configured DHCP server or DHCP relay agent to the subnet and power cycle the cradle Check the DHCP server log to verify that the cradle is receiving a response to its DHCP request The Ethernet link may be down Ensure the ethernet cable is connected to an active hub Mobile computer has been inserted incorrectly into the cradle Cradle is not receiving power Remove wait a minute and then reinsert the mobile computer ensuring it fits snugly onto the connector at the bott
131. ad Options 53 key standard Optional Keypads 28 key 43 key 3270 Emulator 5250 Emulator VT Emulator MC906R G RFID Antenna Tag CU Pagan a KNEE NM Technical Specifications A 5 Table A 1 Mobile Computer Technical Specifications Continued Tag type EPC Class 1 Tag read range Max 10 feet in front of mobile computer Min 0 2 foot Tag write range Max 2 foot in front of mobile computer Min 1 foot in front of mobile computer Tag read rate 15 tags second A 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table A 1 Mobile Computer Technical Specifications Continued Scanning 1 D Decode Capability 1 D Laser Scan Engine Code 39 Code 128 Code 93 Codabar Code 11 Discrete 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 EAN 8 EAN 13 MSI UPCA UPCE UPC EAN supplementals Coupon Code Trioptic 39 Webcode Technical Specifications A 7 Table A 1 Mobile Computer Technical Specifications Continued Imaging Decode Capability 1 D 2 D Imager Engine Code 39 Code 128 Code 93 Codabar Code 11 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 MSI EAN 8 EAN 13 UPCA UPCE UPC EAN supplementals Coupon Code Trioptic 39 Webcode TLC39 Composite AB Composite C Micro PDF 417 PDF 417 Macro PDF 417 Macro Micro PDF 417 OR Code RSS Expanded RSS Limited RSS 14 Data Matrix Maxi Code US Postnet US Planet UK 4 state Australian 4 state Canadian 4 state Japanese 4 state Dut
132. ade Select USB port for the host computer EEUU xj Connection Settings m Click Get Connected to connect your mobile device to this Lala computer Statue Device connected et Connected Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port com Status COM port is available v Allow USE connection with this desktop computer Status USE ig available Allow network Ethernet and Remote Access Service R5 server connection with this desktop computer Status Network is available Status icon W Show status icon in Taskbar ea tap Figure 4 13 USB Connection Settings Communications 4 15 8 Tap OK to save any changes made Every mobile computer should have a unique device name Never try to synchronize more than one mobile computer to the same name eu 9 Connect the device to the host computer see Figure 7 5 on page 7 10to set up a Single Slot serial USB Cradle or see Figure 7 14 on page 7 21 to set up a MSR or a CAM The cradle requires a dedicated port It cannot share a USB port with any other device Refer to the computer user manual supplied to locate the USB s eu 10 Upon connection synchronization occurs automatically Using ActiveSync 1 Review the configuration of the cradle using the MobileDox Cradle Manager a AWIN server must be present on your network Ensure that the WINS Address provided in the TCP IP Settings tab matches the IP address of the WIN server o
133. age 7 19 They also share the same power connection see Figure 7 13 on page 7 20 and the same serial USB connection see Figure 7 14 on page 7 21 The CAM and the MSR allow connection and charging of the MC9000 G using the following cables e Auto Charge Cable e DEX Cable e Serial Cable e Printer Cable e USB Cable Latches Pogo Pin Pass Through Connector Latch Grip Communications Port Power Port Figure 7 16 CAM Accessories 7 25 The CAM e Provides mobile computers operating power and battery charging power when used with the Symbol approved power supply and cable e Provides serial connection through the serial pass through port for communication with a serial device such as a host computer For communication setup procedures see Serial Communications Setup on page 4 10 e Provides USB connection through the USB pass through port for communication with a USB device such as a host computer For communication setup procedures see USB Connection Setup on page 4 13 CAM and MSR Communications Setup Both the CAM and MSR can be set up to communicate either with a serial connection or a USB connection and both devices use the same setup procedure For detailed communications setup procedures see Communication Setup on page 4 9 1 Onthe mobile computer double tap the Ct Panel icon and double tap Comm Settings to enter the Comm Settings window CtlPanel Example File Help E Figure 7 17 Comm Settings Wi
134. ager AirBEAM Smart Client AP API Aperture Application Programming Interface ANSI Terminal AirBEAM Manager is a comprehensive wireless network management system that provides essential functions that are required to configure monitor upgrade and troubleshoot the Spectrum249 wireless network and its components including networked mobile computers oome features include event notification access point configuration diagnostics statistical reports auto discovery wireless proxy agents and monitoring of access points and mobile units AirBEAM Smart Client is part of Symbol s AirBEAM suite which also includes AirBEAM Safe and AirBEAM Manager The AirBEAM Smart Client system uses the network accessible host server to store software files that are to be downloaded to the mobile computers The AirBEAM Smart Client provides the mobile computers with the smarts to request software from the host It allows them to request download and install software as well as to upload files and status data The AirBEAM smart Client uses the industry standard FIP or TFTP file transfer protocols to check the host system for updates and if necessary to transfer updated software Most often AirBEAM Smart Client is used with wireless networks but any TCP IP connection can be used For more information refer to the AirBEAM Smart Windows CE Client Product Reference Guide p n 72 63060 xx See Access Point An
135. al Start Activity Nonfatal All of the parameter categories use the same format Parameters Input Window see Figure 5 3 To change the beep wave file enter a new path and name into the Wave File box Use the left and right gt arrow buttons to set the values for the Beep Fregand LED Note units that do not have the optional wav file capability can not use the new wav file setting ScanSamp2 Example File Help Scanning Feedback Parameters Parameters Window ScanSamp2 Example File Help Scanning Good Decode Feedback Wave File Been Frea LED 200 2670 3000 Parameters Input Windows Figure 5 3 ScanSamp2 Examples 5 8 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Codes Window The Codes window Is used to set the scan type parameter e Tap Param to select the code types tap in the box to select a code type e lo set parameters for a code type tap the code type to highlight it and then tap Param to display the Code Parameters Sample Window see Figure 5 4 Different code types will have parameter settings specific to that code type so the windows will differ e To set length for a code type tap the code type to highlight it and then tap Length to display the code length sample window see Figure 5 4 Different code types will have length settings specific to that code type so the setting windows will differ ScanSamp2 Example ScanSamp Example ScanSamp2 Example File Help
136. al Communications Setup on page 4 10 13 13 13 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Cable Adapter Module Table 13 6 Troubleshooting The Cable Adapter Module Symptom Possible Cause Action Mobile computer battery is not charging Mobile computer was removed from CAM or CAM was unplugged from AC power too soon Ensure CAM is receiving power Ensure mobile computer is attached correctly Confirm main battery is charging under Start Settings System Power f a mobile computer battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge a battery if the mobile computer is off and longer if the mobile computer is operating Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery The mobile computer is not fully attached to the CAM Detach and re attach the CAM to the mobile computer ensuring it is firmly connected During data communications no data was transmitted or transmitted data was incomplete Mobile computer detached from CAM during communications Re attach mobile computer to CAM and retransmit Incorrect cable configuration see your System Administrator Communications software is not installed or configured properly Perform setup as described in Chapter 4 Communications Magnetic Stripe Reader Table 13 7 Troubleshooting the Magnetic Stripe Reader Sympt
137. al directly or 9 G if the telephone system requires dialing 9 first to access an outside line Verify the connection phone number in the Connecting window Use a connection within a tone dialing system The service you subscribe to e g a remote answering service may use a different type of dialtone Disable dialtone detection on the modem by entering the initialization string ATXO in the Extra dial string modem commands text box of the Modem Settings window The modem may be required to be powered before opening the port for dial out Warm boot the mobile computer and confirm the connection settings 13 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Technical Specifications Appendix C A 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Technical Specifications A 3 Mobile Computer Technical Specifications The following table summarizes the mobile computers intended operating environment Table A 1 Mobile Computer Technical Specifications Operating Temperature MC9000 G Series and MC906R G RFID color and monochrome units 4 to 122 F 20 to 50 C storage Temperature 40 to 158 F 40 to 70 C color and monochrome units Battery Charging Temperature Batteries must be charged within the 32 to 104 F 0 to 440 C ambient temperature range Electrostatic Discharge ESD 15 kVDC air 8 kVDC contact Drop to Concrete
138. ame m Figure 3 15 Create New Location Window Settings 3 19 To edit the dialing properties select the location from the Location drop down list and tap Edit The Edit Dialing Patterns window appears Use the codes listed in Table 3 3 edit the dialing patterns in the Edit Dialing Patterns window Tap OK to save the new entries or tap X to exit without saving the new entries Edit Dialing Patterns OK ix For Local calls dial El For Long Distance calls dial FG For International calls dial 11 EFG Ee country region code F f area code Gig number Figure 3 16 Edit Dialing Patterns Window To use characters other than the ones listed in Table 3 3 use manual dialing Hyphens and spaces in dialing strings are ignored some modems may not respond to the characters listed even though the mobile computer lets them to be added to the dial string Table 3 3 Dialing Characters To Dial country code specified by the dialing program Dial area code specified by the dialing program Dial local number specified by the dialing program Insert a pause typically 2 seconds comma Wait for credit card tone specified by the dialing program dollar sign Wait for second tone typically used after Tone dial the following numbers Pulse dial the following numbers Transfer to another extension 0 5 sec on hook 0 5 sec off hook hookflash Wait for quiet answer ty
139. and fallback fall forward default EN LI NN NN ocu ose 7 select CCITT operation at 300 or 1200 bauds HU 4 selects Bell operation at 300 or 1200 bauds a MN amp L Leased Line Operation amp L lt value gt pf Requests dial up operation Dial up operation continues RENE Table 7 5 S Register Settings 92 Escape Character 0 255 43 ASCII Ra E B Register value may be stored in on of two user Country dependent Accessories 7 41 Table 7 5 S Register Settings Continued rebates ME OE V 24 Bit Mapped Options Status Sleep Inactivity Timer RTS to CTS Delay Sr esse eem A mem EI 9 ss frenave f wm FE o f o o eae A Register value may be stored in on of two user Country dependent 93 94 59 96 S7 90 99 910 911 912 914 916 919 920 92 022 923 924 925 926 7 42 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 7 5 S Register Settings Continued General Bit Mapped Options Status LAPM Failure Control Delay Before Forced Hangup How Control Bit Mapped Options Status General Bit Mapped Options Status General Bit Mapped Options Status Data Compression Control V 42 Negotiation Control Call Failure Indication PSTN Transmit Attenuation Level Fax Transmit Attenuation Level Extended Result Codes Control 9210 V 34 Symbol Rate Register value may be stored in on of two user Country dependent Modem
140. and maintained in one application only and not shared Profile roaming should be disabled in the application that is not being used AEGIS Security Client The AEGIS Security Client is an implementation of the client side of the IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control protocol 802 1X access control provides improved security for both wired and wireless networks It solves the problem of key distribution in wireless LANs by using public key authentication and encryption between Wireless Access Points and roaming stations to exchange dynamic WEP keys The Client supports both wireless 802 11a b g and Ethernet interfaces Additional information and support for the Meetinghouse AEGIS Client is available from the Meetinghouse Data Communications website at http www mtghouse com Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 31 Spectrum24 Frequency Hopping FH Settings 1 and 2 MB Double tap the 524 FH Settings icon on the Series 9000 Demo window to open the Symbol Spectrum24 WLAN menu Series 9000 Demo est Apps Scan Files Op Sounds Images a IE v E e PC Link Terminal 524 DS Emulators Settings 2 524 FH About OTL Settings Figure 6 21 Series 9000 Demo window Table 6 13 24 FH Tab Descriptions DION Bam 000 The Mobile Unit tab configures the mobile computer ESSID power management RTS threshold International Roaming capability and AP options see Mobile Unit Tab on page 6 32 MicroAP The MicroAP
141. ar L Not at all familiar Did this manual meet your needs If not please explain What topics need to be added to the index if applicable What topics do you feel need to be better discussed Please be specific What can we do to further improve our manuals Thank you for your input We value your comments Symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville N Y 11742 1300 http symbol com 72 54436 06 Revision A December 2004
142. aracters IA5 2 0 are ignored and may be used for formatting purposes unless they are embedded in numeric or string constants The termination character may not appear in the body The modem can accept at least 40 characters in the body e Termination character may be selected by a user option parameter S3 The default is CR The format of Basic Syntax commands except for the D and S commands is as follows lt command gt lt number gt where e command is either a single character or the 4 character followed by a single character per V 250 or the Yo character followed by a single character the character followed by a single character or the character followed by a single character e number is a string of one or more characters from 0 through 9 representing a decimal integer value Commands expecting a number are noted in the description of the command If number is missing from such a command lt command gt is immediately followed by another command or the termination character the value 0 is assumed If a command does not expect a number and a number is present an error occurs All leading 0 s in number are ignored by the modem Additional commands may follow a command and associated parameter if any on the same command line with a separation character The actions of some commands cause the rest of the command line to be ignored S Parameters
143. arameters screen Downloading Partition Name via Device Parameters Waiting for input Figure 11 12 Parameters Screen Partition Name is the name of the partition selected in the Initial Program Loader menu Device Parameters is the device selected in the Select Transport menu with the baud rate for serial downloads or DHCP address for wireless downloads 13 Press Enter to return to the Download File menu Mobile Computer Configuration 11 19 14 Use the up and down scroll buttons to select Download Press Enter The Downloading screen appears Downloading Partition Name via Device Parameters Waiting for input Partition Name HEHH 20 Figure 11 13 Downloading Screen 15 Before the download starts if Serial was selected in the Select Iransportmenu Waiting for Data appears in the Device Status field If Wireless S24 DS was selected in the Select Transport menu the IP address appears in the Device Status field Downloading Partition Name via Device Parameters Result was Success Press any key to continue Figure 11 14 Downloading Complete Screen 11 20 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 16 On the development computer click Load on the TCM toolbar The Load Terminal window Serial tab appears Load Terminal 1 Load Terminal IMAGE FILES TO LOAD IMAGE FILES TO LOAD SOxxPlat_1 23 hex S0wxPlat_ 1 23 hex Serial Ethemet Serial Et
144. arated by colons Mobile Computer mil 2 1 thousandth of an inch A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol In this text mobile computer refers to the Symbol Series 9000 wireless portable computer It can be set up to run as a stand alone device or it can be set up to communicate with a network using wireless radio technology Network Control Unit A non routable LAN protocol that is an extension to NetBIOS Used for IBM s OS 2 based LAN Manager and Microsofts LAN Manager and Windows for Workgroups For terminals using Spectrum24 radios with the Spring protocol a NetID allows facilities to limit which Access Points a mobile computer can communicate with It is set on the Network tab of the Control Panel The terminal can only communicate with Spectrum24 Access Points that have matching NetlDs Also see ESS ID The exact or ideal intended value for a specified parameter Tolerances are specified as positive and negative deviations from this value otandard size for a bar code symbol Most UPC EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications e g from 0 80 to 2 00 of nominal Null Modem Cable NVM ODI Open Data Link Interface ODI Open System Authentication PAN Parameter PC Card PCMCIA PDT Percent Decode Glossary GL 13 An RS 232 cable used to connect two personal computers together in clos
145. ase access supervisory programs and network control Intelligent drive electronics Refers to the solid state hard drive type International Electrotechnical Commission This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power output during operation This is the lowest power IEC laser classification Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner s oscillating mirror fails see MAC Address A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces Interleaving provides for greater information density The location of wide elements bar spaces within each group determines which characters are encoded This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces Only numeric 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded Input Output Control GL 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET IP imaging scanning Intercharacter Gap Interleaved Bar Code Interleaved 2 of 5 Internet Protocol Address 1 0 Ports Input Output Ports Internet Protocol Mobile computers with an integrated imager use digital camera technology to take a digital picture of a bar code store the resulting image in memory and execute state of the art software decoding algorithms to extract the data fr
146. ator System Settings E 5 LO xj Emulator PDT3000 Gemini53keysplit stop Emulator Tool Embedded Visual C Exit Always on top Emulator Storage Scanner Spectrum 24 Battery Status Battery Status Battery B2 ar Minutes battery life remaining gieeeeneeeeeneeeceneeeceneeeceneeeceneeeceneeeceneeeceneeeceneeeeneeneeoneeeceneneenecenncnneeeeeneneeneenoneeeneoeeceecaneeeeeeseeeeoeneen Feeeeneenneeneconeeneenneenecnneenecnneenncnneneconeeecnneenecnneeneceneeeceneeeconeeonea SER eoneennoeneeeoeeeeeoeneeeoeeeeneoeneeeoeneeneeneneners Power Source Total Battery Life Time to Fully Charge Battery feo rg 60 ru C AC Min Min Battery Chemistry Lithium len Voltage m Current m Temp 01C 4800 E 800 2000 E GREEN RED FUNC SHIFT UNTL COMM Figure 12 9 Battery Tab 12 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 12 5 Battery Tab Functions Battery Status set the slide bar to represent the simulated remaining battery life select to simulate battery or AC power input Total Battery Life oet to simulate battery life Time to Fully Charge oet to simulate battery charge time Battery Chemistry Select to simulate battery type Alkaline Nickel Cadmium Nickel Metal Hydride Lithium lon Lithium Polymer or Zinc Air Voltage mV oet to simulate battery voltage Current mA oet to simulate battery current Temp 01C oet to simulate batter
147. ay on page 5 31 Launches the bar code scan application see Scan Bar Code on page 5 36 saves the complete list of tags see Saving Tag Data on page 5 32 Previous and Next buttons appear on the menu when read tags exceed the amount of tags that can fit in the tag list display Tap az to display the previous page lap to display the next page File and Mode menus see File Menu on page 5 33 and Mode Menu on page 5 35 By default when a tag is successfully decoded the mobile computer beeps Tap the icon to toggle between beep enable and beep disable RFID module power on icon The icon appears when the RFID module power is on and the mobile computer is attempting to read RFID tags Attentuation Slide Bar Use the Attentuation Slide Bar see Figure 5 24 on page 5 28 to set the power range from 0 full power to 255 low power Drag the Attentuation Slide Bar to optimize tag reading and to minimize interference For closer tag use a lower setting and for further away tag use a higher setting 5 30 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Reading Tags When the mobile computer s the trigger is pressed the mobile computer interrogates all of the tags within the radio frequency RF field of view For each new tag found the mobile computer beeps once flashes the green LED and displays a tag icon in the main RFID Tags window If the same tag is found again the mobile computer does not beep When the tri
148. between the mobile computer and host computer refer to the communication setup sections in this chapter for detailed information about Serial USB and Ethernet communication setups To set up a partnership A 2 3 Get Connected Get Connected After installing batteries or plugging in the AC adapter do one of the following Use the serial cable to connect to a COM port on the back of this desktop computer and click Next Use the USB cable to connect to the USB port on the back of this desktop computer ActiveSync will automatically detect the device connection You can also connect your mobile device using infrared IF For more information click Help E Cancel Help Figure 4 1 Get Connected Window Communications 4 5 If the Get Connected window does not appear on the host computer select Start Programs Microsoft ActiveSync File Get Connected Connect the mobile computer to the host computer using the appropriate Serial connection see Chapter 7 Accessories On the host computer select Next in the Get Connected window 4 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 4 The host computer and the mobile computer attempt to synchronize The New Partnership window appears New Partnership Set Up a Partnership This wizard helps you establish a partnership between your mobile device and this computer You can setup either a standard
149. bile computer startup procedures e Main battery insertion and removal e Battery charging e Start the mobile computer 1 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Main Battery Insertion and Removal Insert the main battery into the mobile computer before use If the main battery is charged the mobile computer can be used immediately If the main battery is not charged see Battery Charging on page 1 10 Insert the Main Battery To insert the main battery slide the battery into the mobile computer see Figure 1 3 Ensure the battery is fully inserted Two audible clicks can be heard as the battery is fully CO inserted A partially inserted battery may result in unintentional data loss Figure 1 3 Insert Main Battery Getting Started 1 9 Main Battery Removal To remove the main battery 1 Prior to removing the battery press the red Power button to turn off the screen This sets the mobile computer to suspend mode 2 Simultaneously press both primary battery releases The battery partially ejects from the mobile computer 3 Pause 3 4 seconds while the mobile computer performs battery removal shutdown 4 Press the secondary battery release on top of the battery and slide the battery out of the mobile computer Primary Battery Releases secondary Battery Release Figure 1 4 Main Battery Removal 1 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Battery Charging T
150. ble tap the Display icon tap the Appearance tab From the tem drop down list select a display item Tap the square next to the tem drop down list From the Basic colors list select a color and tap OK View the color selection s in the preview box Tap Save to save the scheme In the Save scheme As box enter a name for the scheme and tap OK Tap Apply per i ee a qose qu 3 22 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Input Panel Use the nput Panel Properties window to switch input methods and to set the input options 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the nput Panel icon Input Panel Properties OK ix Input Panel Current input method Allow applications to change the input panel state To quickly switch input methods tap the Input Panel arrow and then tap the desired method from the menu that appears Figure 3 19 Input Panel Properties 2 From the Current input method drop down list select the input method 3 Tap Options to open the Soft Keyboard Options window Soft Keyboard Options OK EI O Large keys ejrjt afria c w b Lise gestures for Space Backspace Shitt and Enter KAR Space us Backspace F Lg Enter Figure 3 20 Soft Keyboard Options Window 4 Make the settings changes 5 Tap OK to save the changes and exit the Soft Keyboard Options window 6 Tap OK to apply the changes Settings 3 23 Keyboard Use t
151. blue LED Powers the mobile computer on and off Used to reset the mobile computer see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 Unassigned application function key See Appendix B Keypad Maps for mapping details ocan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger Moves up and down from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Moves left and right from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Exits the current operation Numeric value keys can have applications assigned with function key s Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights and the F icon appears on the taskbar see Table 2 9 on page 2 26 Press and release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad functions 2 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 2 3 53 Key Descriptions Continued Period Decimal Point Description Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights and the icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the CTRL key again to return to the normal keypad functions Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions The T icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal key
152. but no data transmission and reception can take place 10 Select the encryption algorithm used on the wireless network Open System 40 bit Shared Key 128 bit Shared Key or Kerberos To select 40 bit Shared Key 128 bit Shared Key or Kerberos enter the required data in the fields that appear in the window See the network administrator for this information 11 Tap the P Config tab Mobile Companion OK Encryption IP Config Power ap IP Type Figure 4 31 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab DHCP 15 16 Communications 4 31 In the P Type drop down menu select either DHCP or Static To select static IP enter the required data in the fields that appear in the window See the network administrator for this information Tap OK and Tap OK The Mobile Companion wireless status icon indicates that the mobile computer is connected to the AP If the status icon does not indicate that the mobile computer is connected to the AP see the system administrator oelect Start Programs Internet Explorer In the address bar enter the URL 4 32 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Chapter Contents 5 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET PURIS ee ae ee aos ERAS EHE ER ee LEE ee ed ded dod d 5 13 IE APAPAP AA PA PPO FII UE qud dob padded pA ORE HER EIER 5 14 QUE A APAN PR AA AA AA E E 5 16 ia 5 16 AUQUTA bs euis eua abating wade wend PR EHR
153. cates a wireless LAN s the ESSID name appears in the WLAN Profile list 4 Tap the ESSID name and then tap Connect 5 The Mobile Companion Mode tab appears Mobile Companion OK Mode Authentication Encryption 4 k Profile Name 802 11ES55ID 4101 Operating Mode infrastructure y Country usa Figure 4 25 Mobile Companion Mode Tab 6 The profile name and ESSID name appears in the respective fields 7 Inthe Operating Mode list select Infrastructure 4 28 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 8 select the Authentication tab to configure server based authentication through IEEE 802 1x or Kerberos Select an option None Kerberos LEAP EAP TLS PEAP from the Authentication drop down list See Table 6 3 on page 6 9 for Authentication option descriptions Mobile Companion OK Credential Options OK Made Authentication Encryption Prompt for Username Password at Connect T Time T Resume KOC lb kapa fis ius Ar i add REALM g Kerberos Authentication Credential Caching Settings Kerberos Options Figure 4 26 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab Kerberos Mobile Companion OK Made Authentication Encryption Figure 4 27 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab LEAP Communications 4 29 Mobile Companion OK Certificate Manager Made Authentication Encryption Manage Certificates Existing certificates
154. cation Tab Kerberos Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 9 Table 6 3 Authentication Tab Fields Kerberos Kerberos Kerberos is a different form of 128 bit data security An adapter is required to have its see Figure 6 4 request for access point resources authenticated with a Kerberos server before the server permits the access point to transmit and receive data with the associated adapter When Kerberos is selected the KDC and Realm entry fields appear The KDC field should remain with the default KDC name krbtgt unless it is changed in the server Enter the name of the server that hosts the Kerberos KDC in the Rea m field The KDC is located on a server and maintains information about the access points and users it supports The KDC also permits the transmission and receipt of data once the credentials of the user are verified Tap Kerberos Options to configure different caching modes for Kerberos credentials When connecting to a Kerberos supported profile the system can prompt for the associated user name and password at specified instances during the authentication process Caching of credentials is optional Kerberos Options oelect any combination of the following Kerberos Credential Caching settings Reset When selected the system prompts the user for the username and password upon a warm boot Connect When selected the system prompts the user for login information when the system initiates a connection to the ESSID Time When sel
155. ccessories 7 13 The Four Slot Ethernet cradle has the following attributes e Provides 12VDC power for operating the mobile computer e Enables data communication between the mobile computer up to four and a host computer over an Ethernet network using a standard 10Base T Ethernet cable e synchronizes information between the mobile computer and a host computer With customized or third party software it can also be used to synchronize the mobile computer with corporate databases e Simultaneously charges up to four batteries in the mobile computer Setup The Ethernet cradle must be connected to a power source and to an Ethernet Hub when applicable e El 5 NI L Re va AC Line Cord EM Power Supply Figure 7 7 Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Power Connection 7 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Battery Charging Indicators The mobile computers amber charge LED located in the Indicator LED Bar see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 shows the battery charging status See able 7 1 on page 7 11 for charging status indications he battery usually charges in less than four hours Four Slot Charge Only Cradle This section describes how to set up and use a Four Slot Charge Only cradle with the mobile computer 000000 Il 000000 QQ Power Port Figure 7 8 Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Accessories 7 15 The Four Slot Charge Only cradle has the followi
156. ch Kix A 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table A 1 Mobile Computer Technical Specifications Continued MC9000 G Series may include the following additional embedded radio capabilities 802 11b WLAN WLAN connectivity IEEE 802 1 1b Direct sequence topology Max data rate 11 Mbps Internal dual element supports spatial diversity Go to http software symbol com for a list of the latest supported symbologies 802 11b WLAN standard internal antenna in MC906R G RFID mobile computers Technical Specifications A 9 MDM9000 Modem Module Technical Specifications Table A 2 MDM9000 Modem Module Technical Specifications Asynchronous character format Up to 10 bits including data start stop and parity bits Asynchronous data rates Transmission rate fallback through 300 bps Compatible public switched network RJ11 Jacks Dialing capability Tone and rotary pulse Public switched telephone network PSTN including international connections Operating environment Altitude up to 20 000 ft Humidity 10 to 90 non condensing Operating temperature Operating 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage 4 to 149 F 20 to 65 C Operating modes Asynchronous full duplex automatic and manual call originate Performance Line speed up to 33 600 bps HHC to modem speed DTE speed up to 57 600 bps V 42bis data compression V 42 LAPM error correction Current consumption 100 mA active
157. ch partition Is loaded in the mobile computer Downloading Partitions to the Terminal TCM is used to specify a hex destination file for each partition and download each file to the terminal This download requires a program loader stored on the terminal The terminal comes with a program loading utility Initial Program Loader IPL stored in the terminal s write protected flash IPL IPL allows the user to upgrade the mobile computer with software updates and or feature enhancements Partition Update vs File Update There are two types of update supported by the mobile computer partitions and files The file system used by the mobile computer is the same as the file system used on a desktop computer A file is a unit of data that can be accessed using a file name and a location in the file system When a file is replaced only the contents of the previous file are erased The operating system must be running for a file to be updated so the IPL cannot perform individual file updates as it is a stand alone program that does not require the operating system to be running A typical partition is a group of files combined into a single partition that represents a specific area of storage Examples of partitions are the flash file systems such as Platform or Application Using the desktop computer comparison these partitions are roughly equivalent to a C or D hard disk drive In addition to the hard disk partitions some partitions are u
158. character if any stop character and trailing margin Within this framework each recognizable symbology uses its own unique format See Symbology The number of characters represented per unit of measurement e g characters per inch The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar A measure of the data flow or number of signaling events occurring per second When one bit is the standard event this is a measure of bits per second bps For example a baud rate of 50 means transmission of 50 bits of data per second Basic Input Output System A collection of ROM based code with a standard API used to interface with standard PC hardware Binary digit One bit is the basic unit of binary information Generally eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning Bits transmitted or received Bit bps Byte BOOTP boot or boot up CDMA CDRH CDRH Class 1 CDRH Class 2 Cellular Digital Packet Data Character GL 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Binary digit One bit is the basic unit of binary information Generally eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning See Bits Per Second On an add
159. computer for the changes to take effect Cache the Password until a Warm Boot Cache the password until a warm boot is the default setting A timeout value can also be set in the registry The timeout forces the user to enter the username and password after a power on If the device had not gone through the LEAP authentication processes after the set period of time Normally the device goes through the LEAP authentication process at every power up and every time It roams between APs The timeout setting can be set in minutes using hexadecimal in the registry file The default setting of zero disables the timeout feature To change the timeout setting edit the registry file using a text editor e g Notepad as follows A Ensure the LCachePwd value is set to dword 1 CachePwd dword 1 If a timeout is desired change the LlimeoutMinutes value from 00000000 to a desired value Examples are provided in the registry file The following example is for 240 minutes which Is represented as 000000F0 in hexadecimal LTimeoutMinutes dword 000000F0 Ensure that the UNAME and UPwd lines are commented out by putting a semicolon at the beginning of each line After these changes are made to the Spectrum24DS reg file the file must be copied onto the terminal Copy the file into the Platform folder of the device using Activesync overwriting the old file Once this is done cold boot the mobile computer for the changes to take effect Spectr
160. computer to the associated AP Infrastructure Mode only The number of times the mobile computer has roamed to and from APs the current data rate and the network status are displayed Signal quality is an indicator of how clearly the adapter can hear the associated AP Missed Beacons NA Txmit Retries Signal e Signal Quality Qut of network range Roaming Count O AP MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Network status Out of network range Transmit Rate 11 Mbps Figure 6 12 Mobile Companion Signal Tab The Signal tab is view only and is not available if the current operating mode is Ad Hoc Table 6 10 Signal Fields es GN Missed Beacons Displays the amount of beacons uniform system packets broadcast by the AP to keep the network synchronized missed by the mobile computer The fewer the missed beacons the better the signal As long as the LED to the right of the graph Is green the AP association is not jeopardized by an excess of missed AP beacons If the LED is Red an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount of missed beacons and improve the signal Txmit Retries Transmit Displays the number of data packets retransmitted by the mobile computer The Retries fewer transmit retries the stronger the signal As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized If the LED is red an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount
161. connection Tap a network and tap Connect to interoperate with the AP representing that network Once connected the Mode Encryption IP Config and power tabs display the ESSID security settings network address information and power consumption level set for that network For more information see Finding WLANs on page 6 6 Options Displays settings for system sounds AP and mobile computer association capabilities profile roaming options as well as the password protecting the Mobile Companion utility For more information see Setting Options on page 6 24 6 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Finding WLANs A completed profile is a set of mobile computer configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a Spectrum24 network Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre defined operating parameters available for use in various Spectrum24 network environments select Find WLANs from the Mobile Companion menu to locate the APs in the area The Mobile Companion window displays the available WLAN networks Mobile Companion OK Available WLAN Networks Figure 6 2 Available WLAN Networks 1 Select an available WLAN network from the list Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 7 2 Tap Connect The Mode tab appears Mobile Companion OK Mode Authentication Encryption El ud Profile Mame B 2 11ES55ID 4101 Operating Made Infrastructure y Countr
162. cript file is invalid Incorrect disk sizes in TCM ini file The total disk size specified in the script does not match the total disk size defined in the corresponding TCM ini section Check if the script is corrupt or the TCM ini has changed after the script was created INVALID DIRECTORY In Script Properties window the selected System File Path is not a valid directory 11 22 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 11 3 TCM Error Messages Continued One of the disk sizes Is one sector In Script Properties window one of the disks is too small one sector in size This may in size cause problem while building images especially when cushion is enabled Increase the disk size INVALID VOLUME NAME In Script Properties window one of the volume labels is not valid Corrupt TCM INI file Invalid The VolumeDivisor entry is missing or invalid in the TCM ini Reinstall TCM or recover value of VolumeDivisor TCM ini Invalid version of TCM script file The TCM script was not created by this version of TCM Corrupt or missing TCM ini file Or Corrupt or missing TCM ini file TCM ini file TCM could not find TOM inifile could not find TCM ini file FAILED CONNECTION TO COM While downloading images to terminal Loc failed to connect to the selected COM PORT Could not get status port Check if the COM port is free and is properly configured FAILED CONNECTION TO While downloading images
163. cters and check characters The ratio of symbol height to symbol width The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row Symbol Length Symbology TCP IP Telnet Terminal Terminate and Stay Resident TSR Terminal Emulation Glossary GL 17 Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone margin adjacent to the start character to the end of the quiet zone margin adjacent to a stop character The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type e g UPC EAN Code 39 PDF417 etc Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A communications protocol used to internetwork dissimilar systems This standard is the protocol of the Internet and has become the global standard for communications TCP provides transport functions which ensures that the total amount of bytes sent is received correctly at the other end UDP is an alternate transport that does not guarantee delivery It is widely used for real time voice and video transmissions where erroneous packets are not retransmitted IP provides the routing mechanism TCP IP is a routable protocol which means that all messages contain not only the address of the destination station but the address of a destination network This allows TCP IP messages to be sent to multiple networks within an Organization or around the world hence Its use in the worldwide Internet E
164. ctions on how to define generate and install AirBEAM packages to the server refer to the AirBEAM Package Builder Product Reference Guide p n 72 55769 xx AirBEAM Smart Client The AirBEAM Smart Client is installed on the handheld mobile computer It is configured with the server access information the names of the packages to be downloaded and other controlling parameters When the AirBEAM Smart Client is launched the device connects to the specified FTP server and checks the packages it is configured to look for If the package version was updated the client requests the transfer 9 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET AirBEAM Smart License The AirBEAM Smart Client is a licensed software product The AirBEAM Smart Client s version synchronization functionality is enabled through a license key file that is stored on the client device The license key file can be built into AirBEAM Smart Client s image or downloaded in a special AirBEAM package The AirBEAM smart license key file contains a unique key and a customer specific banner that is displayed when the AirBEAM Smart Client version synchronization logic is invoked The AirBEAM Smart Client package that is included on the mobile computer does not include a licence key This software version is limited to downloading of specific Symbol software products A license key can be purchased that will allow the downloading of custom applications and other non symb
165. d by a period for example 192 168 727 Most TCP IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage routed IP addresses Having an organization s network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address for example 255 259 255 0 Gateway The gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP addresses It is also used to control Internet e mail delivery Most Internet service requires DNS to operate properly If DNS is not configured Web sites cannot be located or e mail delivery fails 6 22 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 6 12 IP Status Fields Continued De Beim WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations MAC Address An IEEE 48 bit address the mobile computer is assigned at the factory that uniquely identifies the adapter at the physical layer Host Name Displays the name of the mobile computer Ho CO TI 9 Tap Renew to refresh the information displayed on the P Status tab The mobile device is releases the existing IP address and requests a new IP address from a DHCP server select the Ping tab to send and receive ICMP ping packets acros
166. d the SHIFT key and then press the 4 key once to produce the letter G press and release the ALPHA key press and hold the SHIFT key and then press the 4 key three times to produce the letter T 2 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 2 1 28 Key Keypad Descriptions Continued EE NENNEN GM Function blue Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions g shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights and the F icon appears on the taskbar see Table 2 9 on page 2 26 Press and release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad functions Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights and the icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the CTRL key again to return to the normal keypad functions The default keypad mode is the num lock number lock mode The num lock icon N appears on the taskbar to indicate num lock mode is active Press the orange ALPHA key to de activate the num lock mode and to access the alternate ALPHA characters shown on the keypad in orange Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions The icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric entries In default state produces a zero
167. dded Windows CE NET Table 11 1 TCM Components Continued ma n Properties button View change the current script properties Build button Build the current script into a set of hex files Check button Check the script for errors files not found Download the hex image to the terminal Arrange the sub windows in a tiled orientation Build and Send Build the current script into a set of hex images and send the hex Images to the mobile computer P Preferences button View change the global TCM options Mobile Computer Configuration 11 7 Defining Script Properties Before a script is created the script properties must be defined This defines the type of terminal flash type number of disks being created and the memory configuration of each disk partition To define the script properties 1 Select the Script window to make it active 2 Click the Properties button The Script Properties window Partition Data tab appears Ill SCRIPT PROPERTIES Terminal Y Partition Data Options Flash Type Disks s080C 2 m Partition Table Properties Volume Label Size Access Disk 1 Platform 19368 4 ReadWiite Disk2 Application 12032 Read Write Figure 11 2 Script Properties Window Partition Data Tab In the Terminal drop down list the MC9000w v1 0 64M entry is already selected Use the default F ash Type In the Disks drop down list select the number of disk partitions to create Select the memo
168. dem with other country telephone networks enter the Country of Installation command The modem adjusts its operating parameters to comply with the telephone network in the country specified oyntax GCl lt country_code gt Enter this command in the MC9000 when setting up communication via modem connection Table 7 3 Supported Countries Denmark FD or 31 Luxembourg FD TBR 21 FD Europe Accessories 7 35 Table 7 3 Supported Countries Continued Finland FD or 3C Mexico 73 United FD or B4 Kingdom E France FD or 3D Netherlands FD or 7B United States B5 Default Note Use FD where possible If connection problems occur use the alternate code where provided AT Commands The AT Command Set allows you to custom configure the modem Only experienced users having difficulty with default settings should use this Changing the Initialization String To enter AT commands 1 On the MC9000 tap Settings Control Panel Double tap the Network and Dial up Connections icon 2 Inthe Connection window double tap the My Connection icon to edit the settings File Zoom Tools Help xi Konnection 8 xd gt x El AH s Input Panel Keyboard Mouse a i Make New My Seriall e cg Connection Maggi y 115200 ma Owner 1 3 Connections P 37600 38400 Regional Remove Spectrume4 ca 3 NETWLAN1 Settings Programs FH Settings Figure 7 28 Network and Connections Windows 7 36 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide fo
169. dia Card MMIC iios us ea ra rac Pda re CER RR 1 6 Single Slot Serial USB Cradle 2 eens 7 8 sil hin EE PG 7 10 Battery Charging 7 11 Four Slot Ethernet Cradle 0 eee 7 12 DU rr rr E a er APAPAP PAA er ee 7 13 Battery Charging Indicators 0 0 0 ccc eee 7 14 Four Shot LBS DAN AAA 7 14 rta oak ne ads Heh NG KKK AGA 7 15 Battery Charging Indicators usua aae eae d des ea 7 15 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 0 0 c eene 7 16 Spare Battery Charging with the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 7 17 LED Charge ICO lt 1 620 eee usbsi AA 1 17 Magnetic Stripe Reader 1 18 MSR and CAM Installation Removal 0 0 0 cece eee eee 7 19 Power Cl s ea eoo be eae are oe een RR AGE N eure es dob CR JUR 7 20 LED Crore Inca ias aad ta dart Ere parida dd C bes 7 20 Serial USB Connection 7 21 Magnetic Stripe Reading Loue dics dil d abaco dean iO ease DAS PAA dee 1 22 Cable Adapter Module cee eee 7 24 CAM and MSR Communications Setup o oo naana 0000 ce eee 7 25 Universal Battery Charger UBC Adapter 0 e eee ee 7 26 Modem Module sssssssssseesen RR 1 29 sop corr 7 30 Connecting to the Mobile Computer 000 008 7 30 Connecting to the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle 7 31 Configuring the Mobile Computer for the Modem 7 31 Connecting the Modem 0 0 c
170. e Force local Figure 7 26 Phone Number Window CO Depending on the location when dialing additional numbers may need to be dialed e g a 9 prefix is often required if dialing from work a country code is needed if dialing internationally To avoid creating new modem connections for each situation tap use dialing rules to define frequently used dialing locations Connecting the Modem To connect to the host computer using the modem connection created in the last section 1 Tap Start Settings Control Panel Double tap the Network and Dialup Connections icon 2 Inthe Connection window double tap the name of the connection 3 created in Creating a Modem Connection on page 8 4 To modify dial up properties tap Dial Properties make the selections in the Device Properties window then tap OK 5 Tap Connect The modem attempts to connect 7 34 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Dial Up Connection BI My Connection A a User Mame Symbol Local settings are Password paaa Area code 425 Tone dialing Domain Country Region Fl O Pulse dialing Disable call waiting dial Phone 9 55555555 ps Dial fram Work Dialing patterns are cm Local Long Distance International Dial Properties j Figure 7 27 Dial Up and Dial Properties Window Modem Country Setup The modem defaults to operation with US telephone networks country code B5 To operate the mo
171. e File Help ma Figure 4 19 Comm Settings Window 2 Confirm that the Port Value is set to USB To change the setting tap Port to highlight and use the left and right arrow buttons to select the USB value 3 Tap OK to exit the Comm Settings window and tap Exit to exit the Control Panel window Communications 4 21 Host Computer Configuration The host computer must be setup with the appropriate communication software and connection settings This describes using Microsoft Activesync software on both the terminal and the host computer To configure the host computer 1 Download and install ActiveSync See Installing ActiveSync on page 4 3 2 Configure the connection settings The host computer must be configured for TCP IP network communications a Click the ActiveSync icon b Click on File Connection settings c In the Connection settings dialog box select the Allow Network Ethernet and Remote Access Service RAS server connection with this desktop computer option Other options may be selected for example Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port 3 Click OK Before communicating through an ethernet connection create a partnership between the mobile computer and the host computer See Setting up a Partnership on page 4 4 for detailed instructions CO 4 22 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET DHCP Server Configuration If you use a DHCP server to
172. e drop down list select the appropriate location 3 lfapplicable select the appropriate language from the User Interface Language drop down list 3 30 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Number Tab 1 Select the Number tab Region Number Currency Time Date Decimal symbol Ma af decimal places Digit grouping symbol Ma af digits in group List separators Negative sign symbol Negative number Display leading zeros Measurement system Figure 3 30 Regional Settings Properties Number Tab 2 Select desired options The available options are determined by the Your local selection and by the User Interface Language selection on the Region tab Currency Tab 1 Select the Currency tab Region Number Currency Time Date Currency symbol Currency symbol position 21 1 Negative number Decimal symbol Ma af decimal places Digit grouping symbol Ma af digits in group uH Universal currency symbol Figure 3 31 Regional Settings Properties Currency Tab 2 select desired options The available options are determined by the Your local selection and by the User Interface Language selection on the Region tab Settings 3 31 Time Tab 1 Select the Time tab Region Number Currency Time Date Time sample 11 39 04 AM Time style h mm ss tt F Time separator AM symbol ara iy er PM symbol Figure 3 32 Regional Setting
173. e MSR Cameo icon The MSR Cameo window appears Please Wait for MSR3000 to open Figure 5 21 MSR Cameo Window 2 Swipe a magnetic stripe card The content on the card displays in the window 3 If the MSR is not properly attached to the mobile computer the MSR error window appears MSR3UDU ERR API NOTS UPFOR TED Figure 5 22 MSR Cameo Error Window Applications 5 27 Printing The Printing application illustrates how an application should handle printer outputs From the est Applications window double tap the Printer icon The Printer window appears BasicPrint v1 11 Select a Printer Text pasicPrint Barcode 123456 Figure 5 23 Printing Test Window From the Select a Printer drop down list select a printer In the Text text box enter text to print Tap Print A ON gt The printer prints the contents of the exttext box and Barcode text box 5 28 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET RFID The MC906R G RFID sample application is provided for reading RFID EPC class 1 tags The demo program is launched from the Series 9000 Demo the default desktop window The sample application programs included in the Series 9000 Demo are provided for the purpose of demonstration and are to be used as is The RFID sample application in MC906R G RFID mobile computers with RFID technology provides the user with the ability to perform a set of typical operations on RFID tags In addition
174. e SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Period Decimal Point Produces a period for alpha entries a decimal point for numeric entries and the alphabetic character X when the ALPHA function key is activated Produces an asterisk and the alphabetic character Z when the ALPHA function key is activated Executes a selected item or function For detailed keypad configurations including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix B Keypad Maps CO 2 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 53 Key Keypad There are two physical configurations of the 53 key keypad however both of the keypads are functionally identical The 53 key keypads contain a Power button application keys scroll keys and function keys The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer s keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 3 on page 2 11 for key and button descriptions and Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for the keypad s special functions DO DOVOO DO OOOO DO GO 00 pa alo P E e oee o DO e c gt Figure 2 3 53 Key Keypads Operating the MC9000 G 2 11 Table 2 3 53 Key Descriptions Power red Green Red Dot Scan yellow scroll Up and Down scroll Left and Right Numeric Application Function
175. e default is set to cache the password until a warm boot with no timeout If a different password caching option is desired the Spectrum24DS reg registry file in the Platform folder must be re configured Configuring Advanced Password Options All password caching options are configured in the file Spectrum24DS reg located in the Platform folder The file must be edited on a PC and copied back onto the device after editing is complete The section of this file which needs editing reads HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Comm NETWLAN1 Parms Cache the Password To cache the password edit the registry file using a text editor with the following changes 1 Change the LCachePwd value from 1 to 0 LCachePwd dword 0 2 Uncomment the UNAME and UPwd values deleting the semicolons at the beginning of each line UNAME myLEAPUserName UPwd myLEAPPassword 3 Change myLEAPUserName and myLEAPPassword to the correct username and password Note that the user name and password should be in quotes If a domain name Is required this can be entered in the user name as domain username 6 28 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET CU A backslash is used and most setups do not require a domain name even if Microsoft Windows NT 2000 domains are used 4 After changing the Spectrum24DS reg file copy the file onto the mobile computer into the Platform using Activesync and overwriting the old file Then cold boot the mobile
176. e eodera dea a reese AA men des 1 5 20 ean otk TET TT ETE T TETTE A 1 6 symbol Windows CE SMDK and SDK 0 gnawa kakak bw ta 1 7 tz preis gis MERECE E A A ERE TIO AA T 1 7 vi MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide Main Battery Insertion and Removal 0 0 00 a 1 8 Insert the Main Battery AAA 1 8 Main Battery Removal nnana a 1 9 Bantar LIBI AA E AA AA R 1 10 Mobile Computer Charging Procedures o on nananana a 1 11 Spare Battery Charging 000 ccc ete eens 1 12 BS Loos EEO AMA APA E S 1 13 Strap Lanyard Lia sau rus KA AGA KAPAG da cn e delebo EE ae label Ran 1 14 Siar vind the NOONG COMPUTE ss aw da daw Gn PAKA KG t rra REY ERR CE TEE Ya 1 15 Calibration Screen 1 16 Mobile Computer Configuration RB 1 17 Chapter 2 Operating the MC9000 G Ps Leno A d AA 2 3 dos o 2 3 A oh ape hee oe en IURE SH Hoe delebo ped d HR DU ER 2 4 DO OI ua oeh pPERCAS PEU RE RPAERSPCMRQRESRPRIPIRERCHMERESS 2 7 53 Key Keypad Lisa X3 ead eae dae Rhee ERO CE weer ered 2 10 DU E i PEE AA PAHARAP PAPA AMP 2 13 TEN rr ETT T RTT ATA pA LOG KG KOLA 2 16 Ka AA 2 19 Keypad Special Functions 2 22 o M ees 2 23 PG APP PP ee oe oe ee ones 2 23 Series 9000 Demo Window 2 eee 2 24 Bells APAPAP PSP APP TPP PS PA PAP PAP 2 26 a HO METTRE TETTE TP 2 28 Keyboard Input Panel Button 0 0 0 a 2 28 Desko
177. e laser is an intense light source Light from a laser is all the same frequency unlike the output of an incandescent bulb Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy density A gallium arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a laser beam This laser type Is a compact source of coherent light oee Liquid Crystal Display A semiconductor diode LED Light Emitting Diode used as an indicator often in digital displays The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor s particular chemical composition Liquid Crystal Display LCD Light Emitting Diode MAC Address also called IEEE Address MC MIL Misread Misdecode Mobile Computer NCU NetBeui NetID Nominal Nominal Size GL 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET A display that uses liquid crystal sealed between two glass plates The crystals are excited by precise electrical charges causing them to reflect light outside according to their bias They use little electricity and react relatively quickly They require external light to reflect their information to the user See LED Spectrum249 devices like other Ethernet devices have unique hardware encoded MAC also called IEEE addresses MAC addresses determine the device sending or receiving data The MAC address is a 48 bit number written as six hexadecimal bytes sep
178. e network address parameters IP address subnet gateway DNS and WINS Changes made within the P Config tab only impact the profile selected in the Mode tab and do not impact the network address parameters configured for other profiles Encryption IP Config Power laf SHCE Figure 6 9 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab DHCP e Select Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP from the P Type drop down list to obtain a leased IP address and network configuration information from a DHCP server DHCP is the default setting for the mobile computer profile When DHCP is selected the IP address fields are read only 6 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET e Select Static to manually assign the IP subnet mask default gateway DNS and WINS addresses used by the mobile computer profile Mobile Companion KE OK Encryption IP Config Power En IP Tvpe IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway EU DNS WINS Figure 6 10 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab Static Table 6 8 IP Config Tab Fields DIN IN IP Address The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Internet Protocol address Each node on the IP network must be assigned
179. e proximity for file transfer It attaches to the serial ports of both machines and simulates what would occur naturally if modems and the phone system were used It crosses the sending wire with the receiving wire Non Volatile Memory see Open Data Link Interface Novell s driver specification for an interface between network hardware and higher level protocols It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC Network Interface Controller It is capable of understanding and translating any network information or request sent by any other ODI compatible protocol into something a NetWare client can understand and process Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm Personal area network Using Bluetooth wireless technology PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly Generally a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33 foot range Only devices within this limited area typically participate in the network A variable that can have different values assigned to it A plug in expansion card for laptop computers and other devices also called a PCMCIA card PC Cards are 85 6mm long x 54 mm wide and have a 68 pin connector There are several different kinds Type I 3 3 mm high use RAM or Flash RAM Type Il 5 mm high use modems LAN adaptors Type Ill 10 5 high use Hard Disks Personal Computer Memory Card Interface Association see PC Card
180. e system the Symbol splash window Figure 1 7 on page 1 15 appears for about a minute 5 Calibrate the screen See Calibration Screen on page 1 16to calibrate the mobile computer display Operating the MC9000 G 2 43 Waking the Mobile Computer The wakeup conditions are configurable and the current factory default settings are subject to change update The mobile computer wakeup configuration is set in the registry file registry file editing procedures are provided in the SMDK refer to Chapter 8 Software Installation for the SMDK installation Table 2 13 lists the wakeup conditions settings Table 2 13 Wakeup Conditions Power Off When the mobile computer goes into Power 1 Power button is pressed sleep mode by pressing Power 2 AC power added or removed these actions wake the mobile computer Trigger is pressed WLAN Wireless LAN accesses the mobile computer Real Time Clock set to wake up Auto Off When the mobile computer goes into Power 1 Power button is pressed sleep mode by an automatic power 2 AC power added or removed off function these actions wake the mobile computer Trigger is pressed WLAN Wireless LAN accesses the mobile computer Real Time Clock set to sleep 2 44 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET File System Directory Structure The mobile computer directory structure displays all of the file folders see Figure 2 20 The pre installed folders are i
181. ecial function or W by default or alpha value when the ALPHA key Is selected Alpha Application These keys can have an application assigned to the function value and have an alpha FI B F2 value assigned when used with the ALPHA function key Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights and the F icon appears on the taskbar see Table 2 9 on page 2 26 Press and release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad functions Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights and the icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the CTRL key again to return to the normal keypad functions Operating the MC9000 G 2 9 Table 2 2 43 Key Descriptions Continued Press and release the ALT key to activate the keypad ALT alternate functions The ALT icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the ALT key again to return to the normal keypad functions The default keypad mode is the num lock number lock mode The num lock icon N appears on the taskbar to indicate num lock mode is active Press the orange ALPHA key to de activate the num lock mode and to access the alternate ALPHA characters shown on the keypad in orange Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions The icon appears on the taskbar Press and release th
182. ected the system requests a user name and password after the specified time parameter Available time parameters are specified as an Interval in minutes or At hh mm a specified time chosen with the pull down menu If a time option is not selected authentication continues without a user name and password verification Resume When enabled the system prompts the user for username and password after the system is suspended and subsequently resumed If disabled the system prompts for a username and password only if the user s credentials are not in the registry 6 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Mobile Companion OK Mode Authentication Encryption Figure 6 5 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab LEAP Table 6 4 Authentication Tab Fields LEAP LEAP oelect this option to enable LEAP authentication LEAP is founded on mutual see Figure 6 5 authentication The AP and the mobile computer attempting to connect to it require authentication before access to the network is permitted Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 11 Mobile Companion OK Certificate Manager Made Authentication Encryption xs Manage Certificates Existing certificates Identifier SS Root Thawte Server CA Root Thawte Premium Ser Root Secure Server Certifi ha Install View Certificates Install new certificate oo User client 45 Root server TLS only TLS and PEAP
183. ed correctly Confirm main battery is charging under Start Settings System Power If a mobile computer battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge a battery if the mobile computer is off and longer if the mobile computer is operating Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery The mobile computer is not fully seated in the cradle Remove and re insert the mobile computer into the cradle ensuring it is firmly seated Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 13 5 Troubleshooting the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Continued Symptom Spare battery is not charging Possible Cause Battery not fully seated in charging Slot Action Remove and re insert the spare battery into the cradle ensuring it is firmly seated Battery inserted incorrectly Ensure the contacts are facing down and toward the back of the cradle Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery During data communications no data was transmitted or transmitted data was incomplete Mobile computer removed from cradle during communications Replace mobile computer in cradle and retransmit Incorrect cable configuration see your system administrator Communications software is not installed or configured properly Perform setup as described in Seri
184. ee Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 7 Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal E E N lt x pf a ae po LL pl Tf tse la L oL p Ld lolo peege LLL LLL LL LL LLL LLL LL LE LLL LL LLL LL LLL LL LL LLL LL LL OS IO L d d Pob Lobo ol Lio lol odo See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 2 28 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal AAA ee AAA ala Ra Trt See Table 2 9 on page 2 30 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet o N mE jum e E
185. en Confirm Calibration Resave Screen Figure 1 8 Calibration Screen Getting Started 1 17 Mobile Computer Configuration The following chapters provide the mobile computer configuration information To customize the mobile computer settings see Chapter 3 Settings To set up ActiveSync to synchronize the mobile computer and accessories with the host computer see Chapter 4 Communications To configure the mobile computer for Spectrum24 see Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration To install development software on the development PC see Chapter 8 Software Installation To set up AirBEAM to synchronize the mobile computer with the host server see Chapter 9 AirBEAM Smart To configure the mobile computer using the Rapid Deployment Client see Chapter 10 Rapid Deployment Client To configure the mobile computer using the Terminal Configuration Manager see Chapter 11 Mobile Computer Configuration 1 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET troductic Chapter Contents CY NU T Uc GV AG y p C 0 Emulate 5250 Emulate Emulator Ma ce aduana caza dte E ek a av wel rd Rx Re ba pawa wa ka ha 2 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET kenoad de ARS 2 28 BEA ee eco ee oes ese E PET PAA AP PR geist 2 28 IN TRETEN 2 29 ts FO qe SYA 2 29 IG APAKAN d Ede REDIERE A 2 29 AC Power Battery Status Icons cc cee
186. ence Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Serial Communications Setup The serial communications setup can be used to set up to communicate with a Single Slot Serial USB Cradle MSR or a CAM a For serial communications using the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle connect only the serial cable do not connect both the serial cable and the USB cable If both serial and USB communications cables are required the host computer USB port must be disabled in Activesync before serial communications can be enabled Serial Connection Setup 1 On the mobile computer double tap the Ct Panel icon and double tap on Comm Settings to enter the Comm Settings window For detailed procedures see Comm Settings on page 3 55 CtlPanel Example File Help E Seriali 115200 E Figure 4 8 Comm Settings Window 2 With Port highlighted use the left and right arrow gt buttons to select the value Comm port default value is set to USB change the value to Serial1 115200 or a serial setting appropriate for the host computer 3 Tap OK to exit the Comm Settings window and tap Exit to exit the Control Panel window Ensure that Activesync was installed on the host computer and a partnership was created see Installing ActiveSync on page 4 3 and Setting up a Partnership on page 4 4 9 Communications 4 11 start ActiveSync if it is not running on the host computer To start select Start Programs Microsoft ActiveSync 4 Micr
187. ent data available to 2 A Symbol HEX file download was attempted but the HEX file is invalid Ensure the file is in Symbol HEX file format complete record Invalid Symbol HEX file 23 A Symbol HEX file download was attempted but the HEX file is invalid Ensure the file is in Symbol HEX file format Unrecognized or unsupported HEX 24 The Symbol HEX file being downloaded contains an record invalid or unrecognized HEX record Ensure the file is in proper Symbol HEX file format Mobile Computer Configuration 11 25 Table 11 4 IPL Errors Continued Invalid data in HEX file The Symbol HEX file being downloaded contains invalid data Ensure the file is in proper Symbol HEX file format with valid HEX data Exceeded max size The download file is too large to fit into the space allocated for it Either make the file smaller or increase the space allocated for it by altering the partition Partition is not valid on this device The downloaded file specifies a partition entry that does not exist on the device Only download files that are valid for this device or change the partition table so that the new file is valid on the device Wrong destination code A specific partition was chosen from the Main Menu not Auto Select but the file selected for download was for another partition Ensure that the partition selected from the Main Menu matches the file selected for download File type does not support IPL Auto Monitor Pow
188. er Micro and Partition Table cannot be select loaded with Auto Select Select the appropriate area and try again Non contiguous record found A Symbol HEX file download was attempted but the HEX file is invalid Ensure the file is in Symbol HEX file Timed Out No data IPL was waiting for data from the source device but timed out before receiving any Check the source device connectivity and retry Fail Buffer Overrun The serial port device could not keep up with incoming data Retry the serial download with a lower baud Partition Table not Valid The size of flash memory is different than that described in the partition table Retry the download with the correct partition table file Invalid file format 34 The file format is invalid Only Symbol HEX files are supported by IPL 11 26 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Creating a Splash Screen The source bitmap files used to create the default splash screens for the mobile computer are Supplied with the Series 9000 SMDK These files can be modified using any of the standard windows image editors allowing customization for particular customers To create a custom splash screen perform the following steps 1 For mobile computers with monochrome screens open the Splashmono bmp file supplied with the Series 9000 SMDK using an image editor 2 For mobile computers with color screens open the Splashcolor bmp file supplied with the series 9000
189. er is constantly being supplied to the RFID module Gemini RFID Total 3 Attenuation E nn RFID module power on icon Mode menu Inventory Locate Tag Program Tag Scan Barcode Figure 5 28 Gemini RFID Inventory Mode Window 5 36 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Locate Tag his option is used to find a specific tag 1 Tap iJ in the Gemini RFID window or tap Mode Locate Tag The Masked Scroll window appears Masked Scroll Enter TagID to find below or select tag from main page Indicates the number of bits entered Tag ID hex string Back to Global Scroll Figure 5 29 Masked Scroll Locate Tag Window 2 Enter a valid Tag ID in the text box below the magnifying glass e an 8 byte hex string for 64 bits e a 12 byte hex string for 96 bits To pre fill the text box with a valid Tag ID select a tag in the Gemini RFID window and tap ka Co 3 Pull the trigger to locate the tag The mobile computer beeps when the tag is found The faster the beep the closer the mobile computer is to the located tag 4 Tap Back to Global Scroll to return to the Gemini RFID window Applications 5 37 Program Tag This option can be used to program RFID tags 1 fap f in the Gemini RFID window or tap Mode Program Tag Program Tags All tags in view will be programmed Enter ID below Indicates the d number of bits Tag ID
190. erformance is displayed using a verbal indicator of signal strength Mobile computer operating information differs depending on which profile was enabled as the current profile Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 21 3 Select the P Status tab to view the mobile computer s network address information Unlike the P Config tab in data fields Finding WLANs the P Status tab is view only with no user configurable Mobile Companion IP Type IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway DMS 0 0 0 0 WIKIS MAC Address O00 40 F8 3C DE 98 Host Mame WindowsCE Figure 6 14 Mobile Companion IP Status Tab Table 6 12 IP Status Fields ma GNE IP Type IP Address Subnet Mask If DHCP was selected from the P Config tab leased IP address and network address data displays for the mobile computer If Static was selected the values displayed were input manually in the P Config tab on page 6 16 The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier Enter the IP address as a dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separate
191. eries 9000 Demo CtlPanel Example mE FH est Apps Scan Files About dL py System Yersions A Unique Unit ID Sounds Images A i Z y A PC Link Terminal 524 DS Date and Time Emulators Settings Touch Calibrate El Printer Settings z Comm Sefinns Ly BE EX Control Panel Icon Power Settings Figure 3 2 Control Panel Power Settings 2 3 Settings 3 9 scroll down the Power Settings window and double tap wlp1 Wireless LAN Double tap D4 in the 524 Power Selection window This setting turns off the S24 radio CtlPanel Example CtlPanel Example File Help File Help Keyboard Power Key Wake Keylight Timeout Wake Power Key API Call Wake Resource Coordina Real Time Clock System Selected Touch Panel Wireless LAN USB Cable Lex w Cancel Lex w Cancel S24 Power Settings 524 Power Selection Figure 3 3 24 Power Settings 3 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 4 Scroll up the Power Settings window and double tap com3 Bluetooth serial 5 Double tap DO in the Bluetooth Power Selection window This turns on the Bluetooth radio CtlPanel Example CtlPanel Example File Help File Help Device yale Last Wake Power Key Power Key Wake acpi AC Power Timeout Wake bkl1 Backlight API Call Wake Yes Accessory serial ME Selected Bluetooth serial Display Keyboard Keylight eee Gee Lox v E ieie cance Power Settin
192. ermission from Symbol The user agrees to maintain Symbol s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes in whole or in part The user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof oymbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design oymbol does not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies Inc intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in Symbol products symbol Spectrum One and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies Inc Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Microsoft Windows and ActiveSync are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http www symbol com Revision History Changes to the previous manual are listed below Change 02 to 03 03
193. ertext is decoded decrypted at the receiving end and turned back into plaintext The encryption algorithm uses a key which is a binary number that is typically from 40 to 128 bits in length The greater the number of bits in the key cipher strength the more possible key combinations and the longer it would take to break the code The data is encrypted or locked by combining the bits in the key mathematically with the data bits At the receiving end the key is used to unlock the code and restore the original data see LAN see WAN Wireless Network Management Protocol This is Symbol s proprietary MAC layer protocol used for inter access point communication and other MAC layer communication See AirBEAM Manager GL 20 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Numerics 128 bit shared key 20 000 cece eee 4 30 2 D barcodes 0 0 cece eee eee 2 36 40 bit shared key o o oooooooooooo 4 30 A AC power sseeeee RI 1 20 JONES TOTS acre TEINE EEDPIRI 4 27 accessorles ooo 1 6 accessory keyboard 005 1 6 auto charge cable 1 6 7 4 NAPAPA APA 1 6 7 4 A Ta PAG ween bas TS 1 6 7 4 USB connection 1 18 7 25 DER AG Lcd ceases aden deba 1 6 7 4 four slot charge only cradle 1 3 1 14 four slot Ethernet cradle 7 3 four slot charge only cradle 1 6 four slot Ethernet cradle
194. erver is enabled on this device This file is a placeholder and should be replaced Please see your Platform Builder docs or our web site at http msdn microsoft com er Figure 5 6 Internet Explorer Window Browsing the Web To browse the Web 1 Connect to a network using a wireless connection See Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network on page 4 27 Once connected go to a specific Web page in one of the following ways Use the keypad to enter the web address In the address bar press the ENT key Tap the address bar drop down arrow to select a previously entered addresses Eu Vc e que To end the connection select File Close If Internet Explorer is selected before setting up the network connections a window may appear to proceed to the connection settings window CU Applications 5 11 Setting up a Proxy Server Proxy servers are often used when connecting to the Internet through a local network such as a corporate network for added security To set the proxy server settings ll 2 3 From the menu bar select View Options Proxy Server tab select Use Proxy Server Enter the proxy server address and port For more information see the network administrator To bypass the proxy server for local addresses such as corporate intranet pages select Bypass Proxy for Local Addresses Tap OK 5 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Remote Desktop
195. ervicing If that is necessary you will be given specific directions CO Symbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty If the Original shipping container was not kept contact Symbol to obtain a new shipping container Symbol Support Center About This Guide xxiii For service information warranty information or technical assistance contact or call the Symbol oupport Center in United States oymbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 Tel 1 800 653 5350 United Kingdom oymbol Technologies oymbol Place Winnersh Triangle Berkshire RG41 5TP United Kingdom Tel 0800 328 2424 Inside UK Tel 44 118 945 7529 Outside UK Australia oymbol Technologies Pty Ltd 432 St Kilda Road Melbourne Victoria 3004 Tel 1 800 672 906 Inside Australia Tel 61 3 9866 6044 Outside Australia Denmark Danmark oymbol Technologies AS Dr Neergaardsvej 3 2970 H rsholm Tel 7020 1718 Inside Denmark Tel 45 7020 1718 Outside Denmark Finland Suomi Oy Symbol Technologies Kaupintie 8 A 6 FIN 00440 Helsinki Finland Tel 9 5407 580 Inside Finland Tel 358 9 5407 580 Outside Finland Canada symbol Technologies Canada Inc 2540 Matheson Boulevard East Mississauga Ontario Canada LAW 472 Tel 905 629 7226 Asia Pacific
196. ery Timeout 180 sa a value in ms AC Power Timeout 0 time value in ms tch1 Touch Panel Power Key Wake Timeout Wake API Call Wake DO D3 D4 set the Wake on Yes off No set the Wake on Yes off No set the Wake on Yes off No When selected the Touch Panel is turned on When selected feature is on standby When selected the Touch Panel is turned off Settings 3 49 Table 3 6 Example Power Setting Parameters Ca O Wireless LAN USB Cable Power Key Wake Timeout Wake API Call Wake DO D3 D4 Power Key Wake Timeout Wake API Call Wake Set the Wake on Yes off No Set the Wake on Yes off No Set the Wake on Yes off No When selected feature is on When selected feature is on standby When selected feature is off Set the Wake on Yes off No set the Wake onzYes off No set the Wake onzYes off No 3 50 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Bluetooth Settings Use the Bluetooth Settings window to display the Bluetooth parameters Mobile computers that do not have Bluetooth capability display UNKNOWN values CO 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Bluetooth Settings The Bluetooth Settings window displays CtlPanel Example File Help Pass SymBth Ver 2 0 H W Yer 00000733 F W Yer 00008004 BD Addr OOAOFSB37730 En Ext Yer 2 0 E Es Cancel Figure 3 48 Bluetooth Status Window 2 lap OK to return to the Control Panel window Settings 3 51
197. et to remove any previously scanned data Rapid Deployment Client 10 5 Table 10 1 Rapid Deployment Window Tap Exit to close the application A confirmation window displays Tap Yes to exit or No to return to the Rapid Deployment window Note If the application is exited prior to scanning all required bar codes any scanned data collected up to that point is lost 10 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Scanning RD Bar Codes When the mobile computer scans and successfully decodes a single or multiple RD bar codes the data encoded in the bar code can e Reset the device connection profile A connection profile is a set of Mobile Companion parameters that the device uses to access the wireless network e Initiate downloads of one or more software packages from an HP server to the mobile device Currently RD only recognizes AirBEAM software packages See Chapter 9 AirBEAM Smart for more information eu To scan an RD bar code 1 Obtain the appropriate RD bar code s from the MSP Administrator 2 Launch the RD application on the mobile computer by tapping Start Programs Rapid Deployment Client The Rapid Deployment window displays Scan Bar Codes OK Scan Bar Codes OK Please scan all of the bar codes Please scan all of the bar codes Waiting Waiting Bar codes left to scan ABH Mee aoa Bar codes left to scan Waiting Ready to Scan Ready to Scan
198. etwork IP Address IPX SPX Kerberos Key LAN laser scanner LASER Laser Diode LCD LED Indicator Glossary 61 11 Internet Protocol address The address of a computer attached to an IP network Every client and server station must have a unique IP address A 32 bit address used by a computer on a IP network Client workstations have either a permanent address or one that is dynamically assigned to them each session IP addresses are written as four sets of numbers separated by periods for example 204 171 64 2 Internet Package Exchange Sequential Packet Exchange A communications protocol for Novell IPX is Novell s Layer 3 protocol similar to XNS and IP and used in NetWare networks SPX is Novell s version of the Xerox SPP protocol Kerberos is a network authentication protocol It is designed to provide strong authentication for client server applications by using secret key cryptography A free implementation of this protocol is available from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology Kerberos is available in many commercial products as well A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data Also see Encryption and Decrypting Local area network A radio network that supports data communication within a local area such as within a warehouse of building A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation Th
199. file Use the Encryption IP Config and Power tabs as necessary to edit the profile power consumption and security parameters Creating a New Profile Tap New to display the Mode tab used to set the profile name and ESSID Use the Encryption IP Config and Power tabs as required to set security network address information and power consumption level for the new profile Deleting a Profile oelect a profile to delete from the list and tap Delete to remove the selected profile Ordering Profiles oelect a profile from the list and tap Move Up or Move Down to order the profile If the current profile association is lost Mobile Companion attempts to associate with the first profile in the list and then the next until a new association is achieved Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 27 Using LEAP for Wireless Network Security LEAP is a security protocol that provides authentication and encryption for wireless networks Authentication is provided through the use of user names and passwords here are multiple options for caching of these credentials available to the administrator of the device through the registry There are multiple password caching options used for LEAP The methods are e Save the password in the registry e Save the password until a warm boot soft reset but not saved in the registry This method also has a timeout available e Never save the password requiring a dialog box on every power up suspend resume Th
200. g driver reads the new registry values Do not use Regmerge to modify built in driver registry values or merge the same Registry value to two files in the same folder as the results are undefined Mobile Computer Configuration CopyFiles Windows CE expects certain files to be in the Windows folder residing in volatile storage Windows CE maintains the System Registry in volatile storage CopyFiles copies files from one folder to another on a cold boot Files can be copied from a non volatile partition Application or Platform to the Windows or other volatile partition during a cold boot During a cold boot CopyFiles looks for files with a CPY extension in the root of the Platform and Application FFS partitions Platform first and then Application These files are text files containing the source and destination for the desired files to be copied separated by gt The following example from the file application cpy is contained on the demo application partition included in the Series 9000 SMDK It can also be obtained from the symbol web site at http devzone symbol com Files are copied to the Windows folder from the Flash File System using copy files cpy in the following order Wlatform Application Example Application scanSamp2 exe gt Windows Scansamp2 exe This line directs CopyFiles to copy the ScanSamp2 exe application from the Application folder to the Windows folder Non FFS Partitions Non FFS Partitions i
201. ger pan head screw holes in the slide with the left two screw holes on the bracket 2 secure the slide to the bracket by inserting the two pan head screws provided from below the bracket up through the brackets screw holes and then through the slides pan head screw holes 3 Place a slide on the right hand bracket aligning the larger pan head screw holes in the slide with the right two screw holes on the bracket 4 Secure the second slide to the bracket as described in Step 2 7 46 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Installing the Cradle Charger on the Bracket Install the cradle or charger onto the bracket inserting the bracket s slide into the grooves on the bottom of the cradle charger and sliding the cradle charger into the desired position 1 Forone single slot cradle four slot charger center it on the bracket x olide grooves on bottom of cradle charger over bracket Figure 7 35 Attaching Two Shelf Slides 2 Fortwo single slot cradles four slot chargers slide one onto the left hand slide and one onto the right hand slide Insert set screws l Figure 7 36 Attaching Two Shelf Slides 3 Fora four slot cradle slide the cradle on to the slides across both brackets 4 Secure each cradle or charger to its slide using the two set screws provided 5 Position the power supply on the shelf behind the cradle Accessories 7 47 Power Supply Figure 7 3
202. gger is released the mobile computer stops interrogating tags The total number of unique tags found displays in the ags window In Figure 5 25 on page 5 31 3 unique tags were found and the selected tag was read a total of 7 times To read tags Ib Double tap the RFID icon in the Series 9000 Demo screen 2 Ensure that the mobile computer is within the RF field of view 3 Position the mobile computer horizontally or vertically see Reading RFID Tags on page 2 39 depending on the orientation of the tag 4 Press the mobile computer trigger 5 Abeep sounds one time and the green LED flashes once for each new tag found A tag icon Is added to the ags window display see Figure 5 24 on page 5 28 6 Release the trigger Selecting Tags he ags window can display up to 20 tags If more than 20 tags are found the application allows the user to page forward and backward through the list of icons representing the tags found To select a tag to view the tag s data ne Fa 3 Double tap the RFID icon in the Series 9000 Demo screen Read a tag see Reading lags select a tag icon in the Gemini RFID window Applications 5 31 4 The data contained in the tag along with a count of how many times the selected tag was read displays in the Gemini RFID window Gemini_RFID selected tag Indicates the number of bits in the selected tag Pull Trigger to Start Reading Selected tag data ID 9000800428254041 Attenuation 0 JU
203. gs 3 39 Series 9000 Demo Window On mobile computer power up the Series 9000 Demo window appears this window is used to access the Series 9000 Demo window settings functions and the demo applications Table 3 4 provides the settings functions icons and able 5 1 on page 5 4 provides the demo application icons Series 9000 Demo m m i Sa Jz x Ww ye PC Link Terminal 524 DS Emulators Settings 2 4L dir Figure 3 41 Series 9000 Demo Menu Table 3 4 Series 9000 Demo Window Settings Functions in s Displays the Control Panel window see Control Panel on page 3 40 Ctl Panel Displays the Mobile Companion window see Mobile Companion on page 6 4 524 DS Settings Displays the S24 WLAN window see Spectrum24 Frequency Hopping FH Settings 1 and 2 MB Radios on page 6 31 S24 FH Settings 3 40 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Control Panel Use the Control Panel to change settings for the mobile computer From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap the Ct Panel icon to display the Control Panel window CtlPanel Example CtlPanel Example Control Panel Value About Power Settings System Versions Bluetooth Settings Unique Unit ID Date and Time Persist No Touch Calibrate Battery Printer Settings Power Settings Comm Settings Bluetooth Settings Display Settings Date and Time Audio Settings Touch Calibrate Scanner Set
204. gs Bluetooth Power Selection Figure 3 4 Bluetooth Power Settings Settings 3 11 Starting Bluetooth 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Bluetooth Device Properties icon Bluetooth Manager OK Scan Device Scan Device Figure 3 5 Bluetooth Manager Window 2 Tap the Scan Device button to initiate a scan for Bluetooth hardware The Bluetooth manager lists the Bluetooth devices that it finds see Figure 3 6 If Bluetooth hardware is not found the Bluetooth Errorwindow appears see Figure 3 7 Table 3 2 described the Bluetooth Icons Bluetooth Manager OK Scan Device om 3 Unnamed 000272b02333 O68 Unnamed 000272602433 Oost Unnamed 0002726023431 om S Unnamed 000272602343 On E Unnamed 000272b02333 OX MHO1690 008037 1a88a4 om 63 THAD123 qur Figure 3 6 Bluetooth Manager Device List Window 3 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Bluetooth Error OK x Bluetooth hardware error 10050 controller not present Figure 3 7 Bluetooth Error Window CO If the device to which the mobile computer is bonding does not appear in the list ensure it is turned on in discoverable mode and within range 30 feet 10 meters of the mobile computer Table 3 2 Bluetooth Icons Desnpo m rene A is not defined FE CL Device is locked and cannot be bonded to o Not locked icon er is not locked and can be bonded to e Blueto
205. he Keyboard Properties window to change the keyboard repeat rate and repeat delay 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Keyboard icon Keyboard Properties OK Repeat Repeat delay Long Short Repeat rate Slow Fast Tap here and hold down a key to test Pa Figure 3 21 Keyboard Properties Repeat Tab Tap the Enable character repeat check box Drag the Repeat delay slider to change the repeat delay time Drag the Repeat rate slider to change the repeat rate Test the new settings in the text box provided Tap OK to apply the changes El PE dope NG 3 24 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Mouse Use the Mouse Properties window to adjust stylus double tap timing 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Mouse icon Mouse Properties Double click Double click this grid to set the double click sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between Double click this icon to test your double click settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above Figure 3 22 Mouse Properties Window 2 Double tap the checkerboard grid at a comfortable speed 3 Double tap the clapboard to test the settings 4 Tap OK to apply changes Settings 3 25 Network and Dial up Connections Use the Connection window to set connections to other computers networks and the Internet 1 Select Start Setti
206. he Mobile Computer for the Modem To create a modem connection on the mobile computer 1 Connect the modem to the mobile computer see Connecting to the Mobile Computer on page 7 30 2 Onthe MC9000 tap Settings Control Panel Double tap the Network and Dial up Connections icon 7 32 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 3 Inthe Connection window double tap Make New Connection to create a connection File Zoom Tools Help Input Panel Keyboard Mouse Seriall Seriall 115200 57600 gt 7s A Cal C ti Seriall USB NETWLAN1 DPI IBCTICHI 39400 o Regional Remove Spectrume4 Settings Connection Figure 7 24 Network and Connections Windows 4 Enter a name for the connection on the Make New Connection window then tap Next 5 Inthe Select a modem list select Hayes Compatible on COMT then tap Next Type a name for the connection i Fl My Connection 2 Select a modem Select the connection type Dial Up Connection mr Tar pla Direct Connection O virtual Private Network PPTP TCP IP Settings Virtual Private Network L2TP PPP over Ethernet PPPoE Bossa reside Sel Figure 7 25 New Connection and Modem Windows Accessories 7 33 6 Inthe Phone Number window enter the phone number for the connection then tap Finish Phone Number Al My Connection 2 Country region code Area code Phone number 55 5555 Force long distanc
207. he mobile computer s cradles snap ons and spare battery chargers can be used to charge the mobile computer s main battery Before using the mobile computer for the first time fully charge the main battery until the charge indicator light remains lit see Table 1 1 on page 1 11 Charge time is less than four hours The mobile computer can be charged using a cradle a CAM or MSR with a charging cable or the main battery can be removed and charged using a spare battery charger The mobile computer is equipped with a memory backup battery which automatically charges from the fully charged main battery When the mobile computer is used for the first time the backup battery requires approximately 15 hours to fully charge This is also true any time the backup battery Is discharged which occurs when the main battery is removed for several hours The backup battery retains data in memory for at least 30 minutes after the mobile computer s main battery is removed When the mobile computer reaches very low battery state the combination of main battery and backup battery will retain data in memory for at least 2 hours Do not remove the main battery within the first 15 hours of use If the main battery is removed before the backup battery is fully charged data may be lost eu Batteries must be charged within the 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C ambient temperature range The following accessories can be used to charge batteries e Cradles The mobile
208. he selected item s state on or off e Tap About to view the software information Tap Exit in the Notify window to return to the Test Applications window 5 22 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Keyboard Use the Keyboard application to test the mobile computer keypad functions 1 From the Test Applications window double tap Keyboard icon The KeyCheck window appears KeyCheck Example File Help Hit any key to see its code Figure 5 16 KeyCheck Window 2 Press any key the corresponding value displays on the KeyCheck window 3 Tap File Exitto close the window Applications 5 23 Display Use the Display window to test the mobile computer display functions 1 From the Test Applications window double tap Display to enter the Display window The display test automatically runs through the display test windows The shade above is Red Figure 5 17 Display Test Window 5 24 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Memory Use the Memory application illustrates how an application should handle memory messages it receives from the Shell in the event of low memory conditions 1 Fromthe est Applications window double tap the Memory icon The Memory lest Window appears 2 The memory test automatically tests the mobile computers memory and displays the results MemTest Example File Help Free mem KB 32540 Usage 5 2o Allocs KB H
209. hernet Available Devices Comm Port Baud Rate Flow Control IP Address C COM1 v 115200 None ASCTBD 48531 157 235 22 242 Active RTSCTS e XONXOFF Close Window After Download Cancel Cancel Figure 11 15 Load Terminal Window Serial and Ethernet Tabs 17 For Serial port connections click the Seria tab and select the mage Files To Load Comm Port and Baud Rate trom their respective drop down lists For Wireless connections click the Ethernet tab A list of available devices and their IP addresses appear Only those devices placed into the Wireless transport mode of IPL appear in this dialog Select the files to download and the device to receive the files To load a device the status must be Active 18 Click Download to begin the operation 19 During download the Downloading screen on mobile computer displays the Device Status and a progress bar 20 When complete Device Status displays Result was Success or in the case of an error the cause of the error 21 On completion press Enter to return to the IPL menu to select the next partition to download 22 lo exit IPL select the System Reset item from the IPL menu see Figure 11 7 on page 11 12 Mobile Computer Configuration 11 21 TCM Error Messages TCM validates the cells in the partition table when the Execute button is clicked Cells highlighted in red contain an error Partition loading is disabled until all errors are corrected
210. iX HEU uos sesqtiad qu ATE 05 RER AER V REPRE dE EG AYANG NS Bb KUA 3 45 Gp UP TETTE TT APA AYA PAT TOT E E 3 46 BIN SONS ih Sg du a 4r dio RR a dos Cae Oe D ORE OR Ced 3 50 Date and IME Re CR 3 51 Printer Settings RR 3 52 Comm Settings 3 55 DEDE UN Lee GG ae dE RE EROR EN ean Ge KAN GAS ee Ea re CN KONG 3 56 DIE cH I lt a pa BAKE KAB KG Kao Radboud bed ee haan esd AL ead 3 57 So NR TETTE TOT T TT 3 58 Reader ParamelirS ciocorcenceccuebewukerdadaeeEgdue igx beds 3 59 Interface Parameters 00 eee 3 62 au PaIamelill us oe con tret vee CY acu OR EATER HR CES 3 63 T Le coe ae ede tweed dango de cde uide ad XS WON aus eat oes 3 65 NG Moama odi chad en eee da dro dia dtd p rper a v we ass 3 66 Scanner Version Lisci ck doce ODORE PERA NGA BERTA KAKA 3 67 Chapter 4 Communications EO PMF 4 3 Installing Communication Software 4 3 installing ACUDIR be sacor e Uc 4 Sew RO COR DAP PAPA ROR E 4 3 Setting up a Partnership iue es emite Eee GA KIA ce aed 4 4 Lar RA 4 9 Serial Communications Setup 4 10 SEAL COMBI EU akan prado rcr AK GA RR GA KGG dens 4 10 UU reir ae EX rd WDR doc eR cdd Rs 4 13 Usmo ODE NEA aber bo de ab O4 4G IDEE E AA Rs 4 15 Ethemet Setup APA AAP PRN PAP 4 16 Installing MobileDox Cradle Manager 4 16 INSTA ECON ct ic sese reique PRERTPe Ra EY CREER eed 4 17 Mobile Computer Configuration illis 4 19 DHCP Server Configuration 0 0
211. ibernates lo Figure 5 18 Memory Test Window 3 Tap Alloc to increase the amount of allocated memory and correspondingly reduce the amount of free memory 4 Tap Free to increase the amount of free memory and correspondingly decrease the amount of allocated memory Applications 5 25 MSR9000 The MSR9000 application is designed to work with the MSR This sample application illustrates how an application should handle MSR inputs The MSR must be attached to the mobile computer before the sample application is executed Co 1 From the Test Applications window double tap the MSR9000 icon The MSR window appears Please Wait for MSR3000 to open Figure 5 19 MSR Window 2 Swipe a magnetic stripe card The content on the card displays in the window 3 If the MSR is not properly attached to the mobile computer the MSR error window appears Error Exit and start a OK MSR SOO0_ERR_APINOTS WIPPORTED Figure 5 20 MSR Error Window 5 26 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET MSR Cameo The MSA Cameo application is designed to work with the MSR Cameo magnetic stripe reader and printer This sample application illustrates how an application should handle MSR inputs See the MSR Cameo product documentation for use and setup instructions The MSR Cameo must be attached to the mobile computer before the sample application is executed eu 1 From the Test Applications window double tap th
212. ient uploads a WNMS information file at the end of each version synchronization Misc 2 Tab This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features Auto retry Retry Delay In use Test Wait Welcome Close Apps Table 9 5 Misc 2 Tab KA pn Auto retry This field is used to specify whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries if there is a failure during the synchronization process If this feature is enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client displays a popup dialog indicating the attempt of a retry The popup dialog is displayed for the number of seconds specified in the Retry Delay field The valid values for this field are 1 the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries indefinitely 0 the AirBEAM Smart Client does not automatically retry 0 the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries up to the number of times specified Retry Delay This field specifies the amount of time in seconds that the AirBEAM Smart Client will delay before automatically retrying after a synchronization failure In use Test This checkbox specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client tests to determine if a file is in use before downloading If the n use Testfeature is enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client downloads a temporary copy of any files that are in use If any temporary in use files are downloaded the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically resets the client to complete the copy of the in use files If the n use Testfeature is di
213. igger the Imager attempts to locate and decode enabled bar codes within its field of view The Imager remains in this mode as long as the trigger is pulled or until a bar code is decoded Aiming the Imager The imager version of the mobile computer projects a laser aiming pattern shown below similar to those used on cameras The aiming pattern is used to position the bar code or object within the field of view ip q ls JJ Figure 2 16 Laser Aiming Pattern Imager symbol scanning 1 Center the symbol in any orientation within the aiming pattern Ensure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the brackets in the aiming pattern Linear bar code PDF417 symbol p ye EN l 7 a View Finder P lid Aiming Pattern Figure 2 17 Centering Symbol in Aiming Pattern 2 38 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET The imager can also read a bar code presented within the aiming pattern but not centered such as the figure below on the left The figure on the right however can not be decoded 1 n 1 NEL LF d Right Wrong Figure 2 18 Imager Aiming 2 The aiming pattern is smaller when the Imager is closer to the symbol and larger when it Is farther from the symbol Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements mil size closer to the unit and those with larger bars or elements mil size farther from the unit 3 Hold the mobile computer between two and nine inches dependi
214. in use or use a screen saver application Settings 3 57 Audio Settings Use the Audio Settings window to set the audio parameters 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Audio Settings The Audio Settings window appears CtlPanel Example File Help API Version Notify API Version Lv L Figure 3 55 Audio Settings Window Tap Beeper Volume in the Audio Settings column Use the left and right arrow gt buttons to select the volume value to 0 1 2 or 3 API Version and Notify API Version are display values only RH gb on O Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window 3 58 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Scanner Settings Use the Scanner Settings window to set the scanner information 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Scanner Settings The Scanner Settings window appears CtlPanel Example File Help Scanner Settings Reader Params Interface Params Scan Params Device Info Scanner Yersion Lv L Figure 3 56 Scan Settings Window 2 Tochange any item in the Scanner Settings column use the up and down v arrows to select the item Se ected Scanner is a display only value 3 Double tap the item to open a new window e Header Parameters see Reader Parameters on page 3 59 e Interface Parameters see Interface Parameters on page 3 67 e Scan Parameters see Scan Parameters on page 3 63 e Device Informatio
215. indow t To successfully write data to a tag the tag must be no less than 1 ft 31 m from the antenna and no greater than 2 ft 61 m from the antenna Scan Bar Code his option launches the scan bar code sample application to scan bar codes 1 Tap HI in the Gemini RFID window or tap Mode Scan Barcode ScanSamp2 Example File Help Scanning Type ss SIC o Time HU Evt Waiting for Trigger Scan View Param Codes Cancel Figure 5 31 Bar Code Scan Window 2 Tap Cancel to return to the Gemini RFID window Spectrum24 Networl Chapter Contents 6 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Spectrum24 Frequency Hopping FH Settings 1 and 2 MB Radios oona o 6 31 tale Wl id E series eee PA 6 32 Pi enti QOO 6 34 miii ae rr ew GG ee Ree eee dod ed Be oad eh kw OE Ree a ee ROR 6 35 WLAN Adapter Tab 20 RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRI RI 6 3 Password Protecting NCPA RR IRR 6 38 Configuring the S24 DS 11 Mb Radio Using a Registry File 0000 cece eee eee eee 6 39 Configuring the S24 FH 2 Mb Radio Using a Registry FIl8 ooooooooooooococoooooo 6 39 Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 3 Introduction Wireless LANs allow the mobile computers to communicate wirelessly and to send captured data real time to a host device Before a mobile computer can be used on a Spectr
216. ings Response timeout sec E Did battery status displa Pixel colors to test 2 16 ta d oe Stepped test duration sec s Default record time sec E Prompt for status after each test fes will be assumed in 3 seconds self Test Settings Test Confirm Window Figure 5 14 Self Test Settings Windows 4 Tap on a self test item from the Self Jest list to select the item for testing tap item again to de select the item Tap Start in the Se f Test window to start the self test for the selected items Follow the prompts provided for the test Tap Exit to return to the est Applications window Figure 5 1 on page 5 3 Applications 5 21 Notify Use Notify to test the mobile computer LED functions ll BU ges sr ope From the Test Applications window double tap the Notify icon The Notify window appears Notify Example Notify Example File Help File Help mu 5 Duration Object Name m pil Count Notify Window Edit Notify Parameters Window Figure 5 15 Notify Windows Tap an Object Name to select the item Tap Edit to set the parameters Drag the slide bars to adjust the values Tap OK to return to the Notify window Repeat edit procedure if required for remaining items The following Notify window functions are available e Tap Off to turn off the selected item e Tap On to turn on the selected item e Tap Cycle to cycle the selected item on and off e Tap State to display t
217. inter cable APA 1 6 7 4 USB charger 000 08 1 6 7 4 calibrating the screen 1 16 3 7 CAM ooo 1 6 7 4 USB COMECON escoria ar ones 7 18 7 25 certificates 0 oo oo o 3 6 3 15 changing profiles 6 26 changing the date 3 16 3 51 changing the time 3 16 3 51 charging spare batteries 1 12 charging batteries ocoseceveserrteziewcuaexi 1 10 charging spare batteries 1 12 charging the main battery 1 11 cleaning terminal 13 3 CAO RFD A SC clock display 2 31 cold DOOU Loose soia 1 45 223 6 39 11 28 contacting Symbol css aaaa du ens All ALI PAPA PAA AA COG BONE Laus quaa b eae o a eC de country code 0 00 cee eee eee D cradle performing ActiveSync 4 10 cradles four slot charge only 7 3 7 14 four slot Ethernet nl four slot charge only A four slot Ethernet 1 12 Ethernet connection 416 four slot ethernet 1 6 serial USB cradle 1 6 7 3 single slot 7 31 SURE SS al a LED indicators 7 11 spare battery charger 7 16 power connection 1 creating splash screen 11 26 currency League ELI KPA
218. interface by means of which one software component communicates with or controls another Usually used to refer to services provided by one software component to another usually via software interrupts or function calls The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view See API A display terminal that follows commands in the ANSI standard terminal language For example it uses escape sequences to control the cursor clear the screen and set colors Communications programs support the ANSI terminal mode and often default to this terminal emulation for dial up connections to online services ASCII Autodiscrimination Bar Bar Code Bar Code Density Bar Height Bar Width Baud Rate BIOS Bit Bits per Second bps Glossary GL 3 American Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit plus parity code representing 128 letters numerals punctuation marks and control characters It is a standard data transmission code in the U S The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code After this determination is made the information content is decoded The dark element in a printed bar code symbol A pattern of variable width bars and spaces which represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine readable form The general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin start character data or message character check
219. ion key The VI emulator keypad uses the 53 key mapping when not in the emulator mode see Table B 6 for descriptions for the 53 key mappings The emulator mapping functions include VT key functions VI 100 emulation keys VI 220 emulation keys VT HP character map DA Wi N JE aa o 3e 08 U DE TO UN p a Is BE Sol pa SC SY CD D 99 D YE NE JA Al Ja Sa L 3 SON DAT a 2 DOS 0098 29990 Be y ejeje D JIJI AE JYIIDE Ore E z E 5 52 uw ou N a So SEDED 9999 cus AS Figure B 6 VT Emulator Keypad B 62 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 13 VT Terminal Functions Table B 14 VT 100 Emulation Keys Keypad Maps B 63 B 64 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 15 VT 220 Emulation Keys Table B 15 VT 220 Emulation Keys Continued Keypad Maps B 65 B 66 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 16 VT HP Character Map CN eu men Ca Keypad Maps B 67 Table B 16 VT HP Character Map Continued NENNEN eee EENL NN NENL I s 99
220. ires Contents XV Chapter 12 Desktop Emulator Pei ai Pv P 12 3 Software Requirements 0 0 ccc ce teens 12 3 lnea Ls crie baec dic Cere ie E PAA AA 12 3 Starting the CUA sco cde awed caw acr aee dk C X aa A 12 3 Emulator Parameter Settings and Displays ooooooocooo 12 7 Aur AA APAPAP PPT ETT 12 9 E EDO og oer een gees TP 12 10 A me 12 11 S e pa AA NANA hk T EE E EEEE 12 12 oole a PAPA PAPA PAA T EEE E EE E EK TS 12 13 cu AE E 12 14 DS RE e NO A 12 16 1 e 12 16 AAA 12 16 LO ani ias 12 16 PO ind ia 12 16 AO rs is epa es 12 16 AC Power Battery Status Icons oooocoooooooooo 12 17 E A SENS EI E Dad pe ERES 12 17 Kb D ETE TTE TET tT TET T ET TT 12 17 Main MENU RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRIRRRR RI le 12 17 Start MENU RR es 12 17 id A 12 17 Resetting the Emulator 12 18 Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting ip AAA 13 3 Maintaining the Mobile Computer 0000 ee 13 3 LO rs ara tr KA KEN deb dt des 13 4 Four slot Charos Only Glade Lsisces e aac eR RR ER YAG RC dar 13 9 Four Slot Ethemet LI rra RRECESOR D EROR RESO d es 13 10 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 13 12 single Slot Serial USB Cradle 00 0 000 13 12 Cable Adapter Module 0 0 13 14 Magnetic Stripe Reader n n nanunua cee eee 13 14 MDM9000 Modem Module 0 0 0 cee nen 13 16 XVI MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET P
221. isting and Increment to move forward on the WAV file listing Tap OK to select the WAV file Start Beep Time 0 5000 in increments of 100ms Start Beep Freq 2500 3500 in increments of 10 Start LED Time 0 5000 in increments of 500 Interim WAV File see Figure 3 60 on page 3 65 lap Decrement to move back on the WAV file listing and Increment to move forward on the WAY file listing Tap OK to select the WAV file Interim Beep Time 0 5000 in increments of 100ms Interim Beep Freq 2500 3500 in increments of 10 Interim LED Time 0 5000 in increments of 500 Fatal WAV File see Figure 3 60 on page 3 65 lap Decrement to move back on the WAV file listing and Increment to move forward on the WAY file listing Tap OK to select the WAV file Fatal Beep Time 0 5000 in increments of 100ms Fatal Beep Freq 2500 3500 in increments of 10 Fatal LED Time 0 5000 in increments of 500 Nonfatal WAV File see Figure 3 60 on page 3 65 lap Decrement to move back on the WAV file listing and Increment to move forward on the WAY file listing Tap OK to select the WAV file Nonfatal Beep Time 0 5000 in increments of 100ms Nonfatal Beep Freq 2500 3500 in increments of 10 Nonfatal LED Time 0 5000 in increments of 500 Activity WAV File see Figure 3 60 on page 3 65 lap Decrement to move back on the WAV file listing and Increment to move forward on the WAY file listing Tap OK to select the WAV file Activity Beep Time 0 5000 in increments of 100ms Activity Beep Freq 2
222. ity than Code 39 Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters not including those characters A cold boot restarts the mobile computer and erases all user stored records and entries Communication port ports are identified by number e g COM1 COMZ2 A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code The absence of gaps allows for greater information density A cradle is used for charging the terminal battery and for communicating with a host computer and provides a storage place for the terminal when not in use Data Communications Equipment DCE DCE DCP Dead Zone Decode Decode Algorithm Decryption Depth of Field Device Configuration Package DHCP DHCP Server Discrete Code GL 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET A device such as a modem which is designed to attach directly to a DTE Data Terminal Equipment device oee Data Communications Equipment oee Device COnfiguration Package An area within a scanner s field of view in which specular reflection may prevent a successful decode To recognize a bar code symbology e g UPC EAN and then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol Decryption is
223. ize at which the mobile computer alerts the AP with a Request To Send RTS signal prior to transmission Once the mobile computer receives a Clear To Send CTS signal from the AP the mobile computer transmits the data packet Establishing an RTS threshold in advance of sending large volumes of data helps ensure data transmission with little interference International Roaming Check the International Roaming check box to enable the mobile computer to associate with APs with different country codes Preferred BSS Use the Preferred BSS field to enter the IEEE MAC address of the AP where the mobile computer prefers to associate The mobile computer assigns a higher priority to this AP when transmitting over the network Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 33 Table 6 14 Mobile Unit Tab Fields Continued IGN Remp Mandatory BSS Use the Mandatory BSS field to enter the IEEE MAC address of the AP where the mobile computer is required to associate The mobile computer associates to only this AP when communicating on the network Enter an AP MAC address to associate to an AP that has a compatible ESSID Power Mode A Spectrum24 radio has two main power consumption modes Continuous Aware Mode CAM and Power Save Poll PSP mode Use the Power Mode drop down list to specify the power mode to be used by the radio CAM provides the best performance but uses the most power CAM is the preferred mode for devices running on AC power PSP saves
224. ksheet B 30 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 4 43 Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Shift VK Code ASCII Value Alpha State AlphaState Decimal Decimal D AA A E e E an paan a a AA pe AAA qe Ld d Jd Jg qm fw Ol qm ee mj o o jo o LL LT ee COU Ta ow L1 4k80 E hk o fh E a mj See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 31 Table B 4 43 Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Shift VK Code ASCII Value Alpha State AlphaState Decimal Decimal D a mx ARO O e is mp LP Ad AAA Rh LE ess re i 0 CO LL 8E E CT Th p a See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 32 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 4 43 Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Shift VK Code ASCII Value State Alpha State AlphaState Decimal Decimal ET i ON 61 fm fw L1 1 TO we p S SO A AE A 1 1 RA bl Mpw WO bo we See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B
225. l 27 11 809 5311 Outside South Africa Italy Italia symbol Technologies Italia S R L Via Cristoforo Columbo 49 20090 Trezzano S N Navigilo Milano Italy Tel 2 484441 Inside Italy Tel 39 02 484441 Outside Italy Mexico M xico oymbol Technologies Mexico Ltd Torre Picasso Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho No 88 Lomas de Chapultepec CP 11000 Mexico City DF Mexico Tel 5 520 1835 Inside Mexico Tel 52 5 520 1835 Outside Mexico Norway Norge oymbol s registered and mailing address oymbol Technologies Norway Hoybratenveien 35 C N 1055 OSLO Norway oymbol s repair depot and shipping address symbol Technologies Norway Enebakkveien 123 N 0680 OSLO Norway Tel 47 2232 4375 Spain Espana symbol Technologies S L Avenida de Bruselas 22 Edificio Sauce Alcobendas Madrid 28108 opain Tel 91 324 40 00 Inside Spain Tel 34 91 324 40 00 Outside Spain Fax 34 91 324 4010 Sweden Sverige Letter address symbol Technologies AB Box 1354 5 171 26 SOLNA oweden Visit shipping address oymbol Technologies AB Solna Strandv g 78 S 171 54 SOLNA Sweden Tel Switchboard 08 445 29 00 domestic Tel Call Center 46 8 445 29 29 international Support E Mail Sweden Support se symbol com About This Guide xxv If the Symbol product was purchased from a Symbol Business Partner contact that Business Partner for service For the latest version of this guide go to http www sy
226. l These settings are temporary and never saved to the registry Tap Refresh to update the list of the APs with the same ESSID A signal strength value of 32 Is the highest possible The APs tab only appears when Infrastructure is selected as the mobile computer operating mode from the Mode tab 11 If the mobile computer is in Ad Hoc mode select the Peers tab to display the BSSID or MAC addresses of the other mobile computers in the network their operating mode PSP or CAM their transmit rate their supported data rate and the length of time an adapter has been out of the Ad Hoc network Tap Refresh to update the Peers tab to the latest Ad Hoc network performance and mobile computer membership data 6 24 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Mobile Companion Info IP Status Peers known Peers 00 40 FO 30iBE D5S PSP Figure 6 17 Mobile Companion Peers Tab Setting Options select Options from the Mobile Companion menu to e Access APs or Ad Hoc networks for the Find WLAN search e Enable or disable profile roaming e Enable system sounds e Enable Rogue AP Detection to check the system for unauthorized APs e Place password protection on the current WLAN profile Mobile Companion OK Option Settings Access Ad Hoc networks Disable Profile Roaming Enable Sounds Enable Rogue AP Detection Change Password Figure 6 18 Mobile Companion Option Settings 1 Select the
227. l Mount Bracket One Single Slot Cradle Four Slot Battery Charger To attach the shelf slide to the wall mount bracket for use with one single slot cradle or four slot battery charger 1 Place the slide on the bracket aligning the larger pan head screw holes in the slide with the center two screw holes on the bracket secure the slide to the bracket by inserting the two pan head screws provided from below the bracket up through the brackets screw holes and then through the slides pan head screw holes Insert screws from below Figure 7 33 Attaching One Shelf Slide Two Single Slot Cradles Four Slot Battery Chargers To attach the shelf slide to the wall mount bracket for use with two single slot cradles or two four slot battery chargers ll Place the slide on the bracket aligning the larger pan head screw holes in the slide with the left or right two screw holes on the bracket oecure the slide to the bracket by inserting the two pan head screws provided from below the bracket up through the brackets screw holes and then through the slide s pan head screw holes secure a second slide to the remaining two screw holes on the bracket in the same manner Accessories 7 45 Pan head screw holes Insert screws from below Figure 7 34 Attaching Two Shelf Slides Four Slot Cradle To attach the shelf slide to the wall mount bracket for use with a four slot cradle 1 Place a slide on the left hand bracket aligning the lar
228. l is a built in driver that allows registry edits to be made to the Windows CE Registry Regmerge dll runs very early in the boot process and looks for registry files reg files in certain Flash File System folders during a cold boot It then merges the registry changes into the system registry located in RAM oince the registry is re created on every cold boot from the default ROM image the RegMerge driver Is necessary to make registry modifications persistent over cold boots RegMerge is configured to look in the root of two specific folders for reg files in the following order Wlatform Application Regmerge continues to look for reg files in these folders until all folders are checked This allows folders later in the list to override folders earlier in the list This way itis possible to override Registry changes made by the Platforms partitions folders Take care when using Regmerge to make Registry changes The Series 9000 SMDK contains examples of reg files Regmerge only merges the reg files on cold boots The merge process is skipped during a warm boot eu Typically do not make modifications to registry values for drivers loaded before RegMerge However these values may require modification during software development Since these early loading drivers read these keys before RegMerge gets a chance to change them the mobile computer must be cold booted The warm boot does not re initialize the registry and the early loadin
229. l mounting applications spare lithium ion battery Stylus performs pen functions Device Configuration Package for NET SMDK for NET available at http www symbol com mc9000 g symbol Windows CE SMDK for Series 9000 available at http www symbol com mc9000 g Holsters to hold the mobile computer when not in use Headphone use in noisy environments Getting Started 1 7 Symbol Windows CE SMDK and SDK Symbol offers two development kits for the MC9000 G e Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET SMDK for NET available at http www symbol com mc9000 g e Symbol Windows CE SDK for Series 9000 available at http www symbol com mc9000 g The Symbol Windows CE SDK for Series 9000 allows users to develop Windows CE applications for Series 9000 mobile computers This SDK contains libraries and other Symbol value add software not available in the standard Microsoft Windows CE Platform SDK For detailed information see Software Installation on page 8 1 Symbol also offers other development kits see http software symbol com Getting Started The main battery can be charged before insertion into the mobile computer or after it is installed Use one of the spare battery chargers to charge the main battery out of the mobile computer or one of the cradles to charge the main battery while it is installed in the mobile computer After installing and charging the battery press the Power button to start the mobile computer Mo
230. l the MobileDox Cradle Management Software on the host computer download the latest version of the software from http devzone symbol com Refer to the instructions included with the software Communications 4 17 Installing eConnect eConnect allows the mobile computer to make a Direct Serial Remote Access Service RAS Connection Without it the mobile computer cannot communicate through the ethernet cradle eConnect is used only when establishing a connection using the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle 1 To install the eConnect on the mobile computer download the latest version of the software on to the host computer from http devzone symbol com 2 On the mobile computer copy the eConnect cab file to the Application directory posas Ink Wiz Example Is amp C Application amp C Application Data El Control Panel Ink amp C My Documents ETT amp C Platform 1 profiles amp C3 Program Files Figure 4 14 Copy eConnect cab File Window 3 Double tap the eConnect cab file the eConnect install window appears Double tap OK CJ Progr CJ Recer Eg Start CO Start Figure 4 15 eConnect Install Window 4 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 4 Double tap the Files icon open the Windows directory and double tap the control nkTile the eConnect Icon window appears InkWiz Example commdlg dll 8 ConfigReaderCE EX T8 connmc exe console dll 8 co
231. lPanel Example File Help RcmAPT32 dll RCM CAPI Yer 01 01 Rescoord Yer 01 04 UUID Yer 01 00 Temp Yer 00 00 UUID Pt 1 3000800 UuID Pt 2 EC3D439A Ly E Figure 3 45 Unique Unit ID Window 2 lap OK to return to the Control Panel window 3 44 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Persist The Persist setting is made in the Control Panel window see Figure 3 42 on page 3 40 It is used in conjunction with a parameter settings to save the new setting s in a reg file in the Applications directory Enable Persist prior to changing any settings if the settings are to be saved over a cold boot 1 From the Control Panel window tap Persist 2 Use the right arrow button to toggle the value to between Yes or No he created registration files can be found in the root directory of the application drive and the filenames are the same as the registry key names For example for a key called ZOT with a registry path of HARDWARE ONE FUZZY the filename would be HARDWARE ONE FUZZY ZOT REG Settings 3 45 Battery Use the Battery window to view the battery status 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Battery The Battery window appears CtlPanel Example File Help aaa AC Power Battery Type Lithium ION Battery Charge 100 Battery Level Good Backup voltage 4237 Backup level Good Figure 3 46 Battery Status Window a Do not use the Backup voltage value 2 Tap OK to re
232. latform storage paths are set when the emulator is started for the first time The ISD MMC storage path is used to set the SD MMC path IJ Emulator System Settings ERU Ini xi Stop Emulator Exit Emulator Tool r A 5 J Wi fel E GREEN RED FUNC SHIFT UNTL COMM Figure 12 6 Storage Tab Desktop Emulator 12 11 Scanner Tab Use the Scanner tab to allow the user to specify the type of simulated scanning provided by the emulator the emulator does not have an integrated scanner WI Emulator System Settings E D x Emulator POTSO00 Gemini53keysplit Stop Emulator Tool Embedded Visual C Exit Always on top Scanner Options All Code Data C Manual E 0077162431201 Serial Emulation COM bs LAN amp 6 GREEN RED FUNC SHIFT UNTL COMM Figure 12 7 Scanner Tab Table 12 3 Scanner Tab Functions PO aT i n Scanner Options Manual Enter scan data manually to be returned to the scanner application Scanner Options Serial scan data is entered via a serial connection to the specified serial port 12 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Spectrum24 Tab Use the Spectrum24 tab to allow the user to modify the simulated characteristics of the Spectrum24 interface Both the simulated network card and the access point ESSID2MAC addresses can be modified to simulate a specific network environment Mill Emulator System Se
233. lator is designed to launch via the SSD The SSD is accessed from the desktop Start menu under the PDT9000 program group 12 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 1 In the PDT9000 program group double click SSD exe file The Emulator System Settings window appears Emulator System Settings E aj xj Emulator POTSO00 Gemini53keysplit Stop Emulator Tool Embedded visual m Exit Always on top Stop Action Memory MB 15 Es C Tum off emulator C Save emulator state Prompt Communication Ethernet Shared Debug Port come Browse Emulation COM com Browse GREEN RED FUNC SHIFT CNTL COMM Figure 12 1 Emulator System Settings Window 2 Click the Storage tab to set the storage paths Application Set Path to C Program Files Windows CE Tools wce410 PDT9000 Emulation Flash Partition Application Platform Set Path to C Program Files Windows CE Tools wce410 PDT9000 Emulation Flash Partitions Platform Desktop Emulator 12 5 Mill Emulator System Settings a E JO x Emulator Pb T3000 Gemini53keysplit stop Emulator Tool Embedded Visual C E zit Always on top v Application Browse esprogram files Windows CE Tools weed1 OXPDT S000 E mulation v Platform Browse CaProgram Files Windows CE Toalszwced10 PD TS30DU E mulation SD MMIE Browse S E E UU M GREEN RED FUNC SHIFT UNTL CO
234. layed see Regional Settings on page Settings 3 29 for more information Remove Programs Remove loaded programs from RAM see Remove Programs on page 3 32 for more information Calibrate the touch screen and adjust double tap timing see Stylus on page 3 33 for more information View system information and change memory settings see System on page 3 35 for more information 3 8 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Bluetooth Device Properties Use the Bluetooth Manager window to discover and create bonds with other Bluetooth devices The mobile computer can receive information from discovered devices without creating a bond However the exchange of information between the mobile computer and a bonded device occurs automatically when the Bluetooth radio is turned on Creating a bond involves entering the same PIN on the two devices to bond Once a bond is created and the Bluetooth radios are turned on the devices recognize the bond and are able to exchange information without re entering a PIN Bluetooth S24 Power Settings Both the S24 802 11b and Bluetooth operate in the same 2 4 GHz unlicensed frequency band Sharing the same frequency band could result in performance degradation To minimize interference use the power settings to turn off the S24 radio while the Bluetooth radio is being used 1 To turn off the S24 radio and turn on the Bluetooth radio double tap Control Panel Power Settings S
235. lder icon gg to display the contents of the images folder Select File to View Launcher 9000 re 8 LowBattWarning e 8 MemTest exe i E CN ee Figure 5 10 Select File to View Window 3 Double tap the image name to display it 4 Use the positioning sizing and save icons to manipulate and save the image see able 5 2 on page 5 15 Applications 5 15 Table 5 2 Images Button Descriptions Bum Description Pan Up panning mode increase vertical size Pan Down panning mode decrease vertical of image KZ size of image Pan left panning mode decrease horizontal Pan right panning mode increase horizontal size of image size of image Set mode to fine panning Set mode to rough panning 5 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET PC Link Use the PC Link icon as a shortcut to the device side Active Sync component repllog exe Microsoft Activesync synchronizes the information on the desktop computer with the information on mobile computer Synchronization compares the data on the mobile computer with the desktop computer and updates both computers with the most recent information 1 From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap PC Link icon to start ActiveSync a Activesync automatically connects when the mobile computer is connected to the host computer Connected to Desktop Eb 115200 pa Getting Connected Hide this message Disconnect Figure 5 11 Con
236. le on charged computer Lithium ion battery not Ensure battery is installed properly See Main Battery installed properly Insertion and Removal on page 1 8 system crash Perform a warm boot If the mobile computer still does not turn on perform a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 Rechargeable lithium ion battery Battery failed Replace battery If the mobile computer still does not did not charge operate try a warm boot then a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 Mobile computer removed Insert mobile computer in cradle and begin charging from cradle while battery was The lithium ion battery requires about four hours to charging recharge fully Cannot see characters on display Mobile computer not powered Press the Power button on During data communication no Mobile computer removed Replace the mobile computer in the cradle or reattach data was transmitted or from cradle or unplugged from the Synchronization cable and re transmit transmitted data was host computer during incomplete communication Incorrect cable configuration See the System Administrator Communication software was Perform setup See Chapter 4 Communications for incorrectly installed or details configured No sound is audible Volume setting is low or Unit may be a beeper only unit or incorrect Config turned off Block is programmed into device Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 5
237. liance Stations that use frequency hopping change their communications frequency at regular intervals A hopping sequence determines the pattern at which frequencies are changed Messages take place within a hop See Hopping Sequence and Spread Spectrum See File Transfer Protocol Flash memory is responsible for storing the system firmware and is non volatile If the system power is interrupted the data is not lost Gateway Address Hard Reset Hopping Sequence Hz Host Computer IDE IEC IEC 825 Class 1 IEEE Address Interleaved 2 of 5 IOCTL Glossary GL 9 An IP address for a network gateway or router A mobile computer may be part of a subnet as specified by its IP address and Netmask It can send packets directly to any node on the same subnet If the destination node is on a different subnet then the terminal sends the packet to the gateway first The gateway determines how to route the packet to the destination subnet This field is an option used by networks that require gateways see Cold Boot A set of random frequencies designed to minimize interference with other sets of random frequencies A hopping sequence determines the pattern with which a station that uses frequency hopping changes its communications frequency See Frequency Hopping Hertz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second A computer that serves other terminals in a network providing such services as computation datab
238. m To launch the keyboard input panel tap Start tap the Soft KeyBd menu selection and then tap the icon Tap on a key to enter the key s value Tap on the keyboard selection icon to display or to hide the keyboard input panel 56011213121316 1 8 9 0 i G2 C0 I C ODA Figure 2 14 Keyboard Input Panel Entering Data via the Bar Code Scanner Scan Wedge The integrated bar code scanner uses the Scan Wedge program to scan data into data fields in the same way data is entered via the keypad The Scan Wedge program is provided as a sample application in the SMDK see Chapter 8 Software Installation for the SMDK installation 2 34 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Data Capture Mobile computers with an integrated laser scanner allow you to collect data by scanning one dimensional bar codes Mobile computers with an integrated imager allow you to collect data by decoding one dimensional bar codes including RSS and two dimensional bar codes including PDF417 and DataMatrix and capture and download images to a host for a variety of imaging applications Mobile computers with RFID technology MC906R G allow data collection by decoding in range RFID tags that beam back to the mobile computer the information they contain Laser Scanning To scan bar codes with the mobile computer ila CU Ensure that the mobile computer is loaded with a scanning application See ScanSamp2 Windows on page 5 6 for a
239. mall computer contained within the mobile computer that controls several system resources In the unlikely event that the Power Micro Firmware needs updating selecting this item allows the device to be programmed Partition Table Contains the partition information for all other partitions Note The partition table should never need changing unless the sizes of the platform and application images are changed within TCM If this is done then the new partition table should be loaded first followed by both platform and application in any order 11 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 11 2 IPL Menu Partitions Continued system Reset selecting this item provides a simple method to exit IPL and to boot the operating system Auto Select selecting this item allows one or more files to be downloaded without having to manually select the destination The content of the files being downloaded automatically directs the file to the correct destination For technical reasons Auto Select cannot be used to download Monitor Power Micro or Partition Table These items must be specifically selected a If the platform or application partition sizes are changed a new partition table must be download first 5 IPL displays the Select Iransportmenu which lists the available methods of downloading the file select Transport Wireless 24 DS Serial Previous Top Figure 11 8 Select Transport Menu M
240. mbol com manuals xxvi MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Chapter Contents 1 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Staring NG PUN LO aae exc audcs bob op DERI as e e EHI MAA Mobile Computer Configuration RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRIRRR RII Getting Started 1 3 Introduction This chapter describes the mobile computer s physical characteristics how to install and charge the batteries replace the strap lanyard remove and replace the stylus and start the mobile computer for the first time Indicator LED Bar Touch Screen Microphone optional Headphone Jack Power Trigger Strap Figure 1 1 MC9000 G Mobile Computer 1 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Figure 1 2 MC906R G RFID Getting Started 1 5 Unpacking Carefully remove all protective material from around the mobile computer and save the shipping container for storage and or re shipping Verify that all of the equipment listed below was received MC9000 G mobile computer Main lithium ion battery strap lanyard attached to the mobile computer stylus in the handle Regulatory Guide Quick Start Guide poster Inspect the equipment for damage If any equipment is missing or damaged contact the Symbol Technologies Support Center immediately See page xxiii for contact information 1 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows
241. meric characters 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded The Control Panel allows you to set the IP address for a DNS Server if used This allows users to use server names rather than IP addresses It is set on the Network tab of the Control Panel The Control Panel allows you to set a Domain Name for the DNS Server if used e g symbol com It is set on the Network tab of the Control Panel Disk Operating System This is basic software that allows you to load and use software applications on your computer Also see NetID Dynamic random access memory See Data Terminal Equipment European Article Number This European International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and symbology standards Element dimensions are specified metrically EAN is used primarily in retail Generic term for a bar or space Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern including start stop characters and data ENO software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the host Encryption is the scrambling and coding of data typically using mathematical formulas called algorithms before information is transmitted over any communications link or network A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data Also see Decryption and Key Electronic Product Code The Electronic Product Code is an electronically coded 64 or 96 bit tag which contains a number called
242. n 2 Place a run file in the Startup folder of the Application partition Refer to the SMDK Help File for Symbol Terminals included with the SMDK for more information on the Startup folder Run Files A run file is a simple text file that contains the path to an application as well as the name of the application to run Refer to the SMDK Help File for Symbol Terminals included with the SMDK for more information on the Startup folder Audio Event Aliasing Audio Event Aliasing is the means by which standard Windows wav files are rendered on a non audio terminal using only a beeper The audio driver of the mobile computer supports a feature called Event Aliasing This feature allows a special wav file to play This wav file replaces the sound normally produced when running a wav file with other actions such as LED flashing etc This feature allows applications that play wav files to be portable between two devices one that supports real audio and one that supports audio aliasing 2 46 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Terminal Emulators Use the Terminal Emulator icon to enter the Wavelink terminal emulator application From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap the Terminal Emulators icon The Terminal Emulator window appears To exit tap TelnetCE Options and tap Exit No host connection Enter to Connect wavelink Figure 2 21 Terminal Emulator Windows Refer to the d
243. n see Device Information on page 3 66 e Scanner Version see Scanner Version on page 3 67 4 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window Settings 3 59 Reader Parameters Use the Reader Parameters window to set the scanning read parameters The reader parameter settings are dependent on the type of scanner used either a laser scanner or an imager See Table 3 8 on page 3 60 for laser scanner settings and see able 3 9 on page 3 61 for imager settings CtlPanel Example CtlPanel Example File Help File Help aie EL ES Reader Params Value 4 Laser Reader Type Imager Aim Type Ec Aim Type Trigger Aim Duration 500 Aim Duration 500 Aim Mode Dot Aim Mode Reticle Beam Width Normal Beam Timer 5000 Raster Mode Smart Pointer Timer Beam Timer 5000 Image Capture T Control LED False Image Compress LED Level i Linear Sec All cades j prod Laser Scanner Reader Parameters Imager Reader Parameters Figure 3 57 Reader Parameters Window 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Scanner Settings double tap Reader Parameters The Reader Parameters window appears To change any item in the Reader Parameters column use the up and down v arrows to select the item Use the left and right arrow gt buttons to increment the value Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window 3 60 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 3 8 Laser Scanner Reader Parameters Reader
244. n 2 45 PA a oh doe og een QE TOT LT TD IT 2 46 Chapter 3 Settings scs TP FO Windows Control Panel Menu ees 3 b Bluetooth Device Properties sess 3 8 Bluetooth S24 Power Settings 3 8 Starting COO Lua eee etae RI RERO AR EE RES ACE dn 3 11 EM ET eset ret HUE OL EPREPYTESTAUER YA 3 15 I3 ARR PP PR PERA 3 16 vill MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide Device Management a 3 17 ivo EP PDA PAA PA PPT PAPA PAA 3 18 LIE aie eho ona KA KAN PANA ANAN ENNA KARANASAN aa OR eran 3 20 Pace OU Ed 3 20 Appearance Tab 2 ccs 3 21 Input Panel 0 cent eee III 3 22 DEDOS ns oo pede ae baba ee A DPI OQ 3 23 ee ee RETE AU ee APA 3 24 Network and Dial up Connections 3 25 a poses et PA PANO NPA PANO AT PAT 3 26 fa 3 26 AS 3 27 da 0 AA 3 2 kb AA APP APA PAPA 3 28 Regional Settings 3 29 ic INI 3 29 cl AAA 3 30 Currency Tab cette teens 3 30 Brom 3 31 BAGAL AAP ERE DRESS VIELES d 3 31 KAO APA D TO COT T TIT TT 3 32 rra Pi dapaYA C e ID aba 3 33 I SENI C 3 33 ee AU oie tag Men 3 34 SA 3 35 kapo GA RO boone Ge PM AA 3 35 A 3 36 Device Name VA ci AN 3 37 DO IB caw ase E ULAN EP AKDA NA KP TAE PEERS 3 38 Series 9000 Demo Window 0 m RRRR B 3 39 co AAA AA 3 40 Blur DU SA 3 41 VC EVI eho oy dee hoy ae T E T T 3 42 NIE ct paaa doa Cd EE ERT Eh GA LED NAGA ae ER br chee ness 3 43 dci APAPAP AA 3 44 Contents
245. n Is blue indicating that the blue function key must be selected first to access the display backlight On the 43 key keypad the display backlight icon is white indicating that the display backlight is the default value for that key Table 2 7 Keypad Special Functions 53 Key 3270 5250 VT Keystrokes 43 Key Keystrokes Special Function sl Blue function key sis key Turns on and off the display backlight H and Z U Blue function key key Turns on and off the keypad backlight eqs andX s Blue function key Blue function key Increases display contrast on monochromatic and D and F1 units only Blue function key Blue function key Decreases display contrast on monochromatic and and F5 units only Blue function key Blue function key Increases scan decode beeper volume and H and F4 Blue function key Blue function key Decreases scan decode beeper volume E df and M and F8 Blue function key Not Available Enables Alt keypad functions ALT and cree Use of display and keypad backlighting can significantly reduce battery life Co Mobile computers with color screens do not have contrast settings Operating the MC9000 G 2 23 Power Button Press the red Power button to turn the mobile computer screen on and off The mobile computer Is on when the display is on and the mobile computer is in suspend mode when the display is off For more information see Starting the Mobile Computer on page 1 15 Do not hold down a
246. n flash file system memory and optional removable storage devices MMC storage cards amp C Application amp C Application Data El Control Panel Ink amp C My Documents EC Platform amp C profiles amp C Program Files C Recycled Figure 2 20 Mobile Computer Directory Structure e Application and Platform folders are located in flash file system memory e The Windows Program Files profiles and My Documents folders are composites RAM based folders generated from ROM many of these files are marked read only e The Network folder is a link to file systems mapped using the network redirector The files do not physically reside on the terminal e The empand Recycled folders typically contain RAM based files eo All files copied to the RAM based folders are lost after a cold boot Operating the MC9000 G 2 45 Flash Storage In addition to the RAM based storage the mobile computer is also equipped with a non volatile Flash based storage area which can store data partitions that can not be corrupted by a cold boot see Flash Storage on page 11 27 for a detailed discussion Startup Folder The Applications Startup folder is used to launch programs automatically when the mobile computer Is started either after a warm or cold boot CO The Windows Startup folder is not supported There are two ways to launch programs automatically 1 Place the executable in the Startup folder of the Application partitio
247. n page 6 4 for more information about wireless profiles 10 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET OI r INN UN G Mobile Compt Chapter Contents 4 troduction 11 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET PITONG ASAS 11 27 ibizgii AAP PAA PAPA PETE PAPS 11 27 Working wiih Hes PANID acta BAKA bor Facio d dl XC EG LARA awe C e DEOR 11 27 EBENE BS OI arco dto GA pa oes II CVR Sd ORE NG VIR 11 28 CopyFiles RR RR e elles 11 29 Dele geek a Ut TTC EUR TT CT TTE TITIUS 11 29 Downloading Partitions to the Terminal liliis eee 11 30 Mr CEPI DERE RE Edu CC RF ee E E ds 11 30 Partition Update vs AAA 11 30 upgrade Regum cuiua saure iab dde iced BG GG WG Kae ddd ia koe abn eb Rd 11 31 Mobile Computer Configuration Introduction Terminal Configuration Manager TCM is an application used to customize flash file system partitions for the mobile computer The most common use is to create an application partition hex file that contains the customer s application TCM can also be used to load hex files to the flash memory of the mobile computer The program resident on the mobile computer that receives the hex file and burns it to the flash memory is called Initial Program Loader IPL The customization of partitions is controlled by TCM scripts The scripts contain all of the necessary information for building an image The script is a list of c
248. n your network b Ensure that the Use NAT checkbox is not selected in the Port Settings tab 2 Insert the terminal into the cradle The mobile computer displays a succession of dialog boxes appear indicating the status of the connection Also the ActiveSync icon on the host computer s system tray turns green to indicate that the host computer and the mobile computer are communicating 4 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Ethernet Setup The Ethernet connection can only be established with the Four Slot Ethernet cradle To establish a connection between the mobile computer and the host computer to communicate over an Ethernet network perform the following e Install MobileDox Cradle Manager e Install eConnect e Mobile computer configuration e Host computer configuration e DHCP server configuration e Cradle configuration Installing MobileDox Cradle Manager MobileDox Cradle Manager software required to configure the Ethernet cradle it is only used when establishing an Ethernet connection with the Four slot Ethernet Cradle The Cradle Management software features e View cradles that are attached to the network via MobileDox Net e View cradle status e Modify cradle settings including e P address settings e DNs and WINS settings e Identification settings e USB port specific settings e Restart cradles connected to the network via MobileDox Net e Update the firmware of MobileDox Net To instal
249. nce to simulate the stylus screen tap e Double Click Double click the mouse to simulate the stylus double screen tap Use double click to execute application software e Drag Drag the mouse simulate the stylus screen drag Use drag across the screen to select text and images Drag in a list to select multiple items Keypad Inputs The development computer keypad can also be used for entering data Taskbar The Taskbar at the bottom of the window displays the Start button active programs in this case PC Link and Mobile Companion battery status and the communication status Start Button Open Programs and Status Icons Desktop Menu and Application Buttons Keyboard Input Panel Figure 12 11 Taskbar Start Button The Start button is used to launch the Start Menu see Start Menu on page 12 17 Desktop Emulator AC Power Battery Status Icons AC Power Battery Status icons are shown in the taskbar to indicate present power supply status They appear and function the same as in the mobile computer see AC Power Battery Status Icons on page 2 29 Taskbar Icons The askbar icons and buttons are displayed in the taskbar They appear and function the same as in the mobile computer see Table 2 9 on page 2 26 and see lable 2 10 on page 2 27 Open Programs If more than program is open the taskbar icons can be used to toggle between the open programs applications Tapping on a icon opens the associated program These icons
250. nclude additional software and data pre loaded on the mobile computer that can be upgraded Unlike FFS Partitions these partitions are not visible when the operating system Is running They also contain system information Non FFS partitions include the following e Windows CE The complete Windows CE operating system is stored on Flash devices If necessary the entire OS image may be downloaded to the mobile computer using files provided by Symbol The current OS partition on the mobile computer is included as part of the TCM installation package Any upgrades must be obtained from Symbol This partition is mandatory for the mobile computer e Splash Screen a bitmap smaller than 16 Kb and limited to 8 bits per pixel is displayed as the mobile computer cold boots To download a customized screen to display see Creating a Splash Screen on page 11 26 11 23 11 30 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen images Once Windows CE is running the color density is 16 bits per pixel CU e PL This program interfaces with the host computer and allows downloading via cradle or serial cable any or all of the partitions listed above as well as updated versions of IPL Use caution downloading updated IPL versions incorrect downloading of an IPL causes permanent damage to the mobile computer IPL is mandatory for the mobile computer e Partition Table Identifies where ea
251. ndow 2 With Port highlighted use the left and right arrow gt buttons to select the value select the Comm port setting appropriate for the host computer choose the default value of USB or set to Serial1 115200 3 Tap OK to exit the Comm Settings window and tap Exit to exit the Control Panel window 4 Ensure that ActiveSync was installed on the host computer and a partnership was created see nstalling ActiveSync on page 4 3 and Setting up a Partnership on page 4 4 7 26 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Universal Battery Charger UBC Adapter The UBC Adapter can be used with a power supply as a standalone spare battery charger or it can be used with the four station UBC2000 to provide charging to simultaneously charge up to four spare batteries For additional information on the UBC 2000 see the UBC 2000 Quick Reference Guide 70 33188 XX 1 Connect the power supply to the power port on the side of the UBC Adapter Power Port DC Cable AC Line Cord Power Supply Figure 7 18 UBC Adapter Power Connection Ze Accessories 7 27 Insert the battery into the battery slot with the charging contacts facing down over charging pins and gently press down on the battery to ensure proper contact See Table 7 2 for the UBC Adapter LED indications Battery Battery Release UBC Adapter Figure 7 19 Battery Insertion To remove the battery press the battery release and
252. ndow appears displaying two child windows Script and File Explorer The Script window contains a newly created script and the File Explorer window contains a file explorer view used for selecting files to be placed in the script TCM Script1 File Script View Window Help De Qs sm t PAV TP E Script TAS amp 9 Platform 3 Application El File Explorer 3 Outlook Express d raw bi Pm PowerArchiver Add ons Application Platform Splash Ey eves Roxio 13 Symantec Symbol Symbol Device Configuration Packages MC9000w fg v0 1 v1 0 Ey Flash Folders Y Hex Images 3 TCMscripts 3 Tools Ready MC9000w v1 0 64M Figure 11 1 TCM Startup Window Mobile Computer Configuration 11 5 The following table lists the components of the TCM window Table 11 1 TCM Components km Comme nc script Window Displays the files to be used in the creation of the partition s File Explorer Window Used to select the files to be added to the script Create button Create a new script file Open button Open an existing script file save button save the current script file Large icons button View the current script items as large icon small icons button View the current script items as small icon View the current script items as a list Details button View the current script items with more details About button Display version information for TCM 11 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embe
253. necting to Host Computer Copying Files Copying a file results in separate versions of a file on the mobile computer and desktop computer since the files are not synchronized changes made to one file will not affect the other 1 Connect the mobile computer to the host computer 2 n ActiveSync on the host computer click Explore Windows Explorer will open the Mobile Device window for the mobile computer 3 Open a new Windows Explorer and browse to the file to be copied on the mobile computer or host computer 4 Doone ofthe following e locopy the file to the mobile computer right click the file and select Copy Place the cursor in the desired folder on the mobile computer right click and select Paste e To copy the file to the host computer right click the file and select Copy Open a new Windows Explorer browse to the desired folder on the host computer right click and select Paste Applications 5 17 About OTL Use About OTL example application window to display the OTL software version information 1 From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap About OTL icon The About OTL window appears Series 9000 Demo Otl Example Otl version 4 1 7 1 Copyright 1999 2003 Symbol Technologies o A Figure 5 12 About OTL Window 2 lap OK to return to the Series 9000 Demo window 5 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Self Test Use Self Test to test the specified mobile comp
254. nection https ff Figure 3 13 Device Management Window 2 Enter the host system server name or IP address the System Administrator can supply this information in the Server name or IP address field 3 Tap the Use Secure connection selection box to require that a secure connection is used Tap OK to close the window and set up the next poll to contact the new server 3 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Dialing Use the Dialing Properties window to set dialing properties for modem communication and change telephony settings 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Dialing icon Local settings ae Area code 425 Tone dialing Country Region ji 0 Pulse dialing Disable call waiting dial Dialing patterns are Local Long Distance International Figure 3 14 Dialing Properties Window To remove a location from the Location drop down list select the location and tap Remove Enter or edit the area code and local country code as needed select Tone dialing or Pulse dialing most phone lines are tone oelect the Disable call waiting check box to automatically disable call waiting Then select the appropriate number sequence from the dial drop down list or enter a new sequence 6 locreate a new location tap New and enter a name for the new location in the Location name field c gf DN Create Mew Location Location n
255. ng attributes e Provides 12VDC power for operating the mobile computer e Simultaneously charges up to four batteries in the mobile computer Setup DC Cable AC Line Cord Power Supply Figure 7 9 Four Slot Cradle Power Connections Battery Charging Indicators The mobile computers amber charge LED located in the Indicator LED Bar see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 shows the battery charging status See able 7 1 on page 7 11 for charging status indications he battery usually charges in less than four hours 7 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Four Slot Spare Battery Charger This section describes how to set up and use the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger to charge up to four MC9000 G spare batteries opare Battery opare Battery Charging olot opare Battery Charging LEDs 4 DC Cable PT TTYTT TY Power Supply ANN Figure 7 10 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Accessories 7 17 Spare Battery Charging with the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 1 Connect the charger to a power source 2 Insert the battery into a spare battery charging slot and gently press down on the battery to ensure proper contact LED Charge Indications An amber LED is provided on the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger to indicate spare battery charging status see able 7 1 on page 7 11 for charging indication details 7 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows
256. ng on symbol density from the symbol centering the aiming pattern cross hairs on the symbol 4 Press and hold the trigger until the mobile computer beeps indicating the bar code is successfully decoded Operating the MC9000 G 2 39 RFID MC906R G RFID Only While the trigger is pressed on MC906R G mobile computers with RFID technology the mobile computer interrogates all of the RFID tags within the radio frequency RF field of view The mobile computer captures data from each new tag found When the trigger is released the mobile computer stops interrogating tags In addition RFID tag data can be stored on the mobile computer Using the MC906R G RFID sample application tags that are read display in the main RFID Tags window see Figure C 24 on page C 35 For more information about reading RFID tags and using MC906R G RFID mobile computers see Appendix C RFID Demo Program Reading RFID Tags 1 Ensure that an RFID tag reader enabled application is loaded on the mobile computer 2 Aim the scan exit window at the tag Figure 2 19 RFID Tag Reading For a successful tag read the allowable read distance from the front of the mobile computer s scan exit window to the tag is 0 2 ft 10 ft 0 061 m to 3 1 m Reader motion horizontally and or vertically may enhance tag reading ability CO 3 Position the mobile computer horizontally or vertically as shown in Figure 2 19 depending on the orientation of the tag 4 Pull
257. ngs Control Panel and double tap the Network and Dial up Connections ICON Connection Seriall Seriall 115200 5 600 2 2 9 Seriali amp USE NET WLANI 39400 Connection Figure 3 23 Connection Window 2 Double an icon to select a connection type 3 Follow the connection type instructions 4 Tap OK to apply changes 3 26 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Owner Use the Owner Properties window to enter the owner information The information can be displayed when the mobile computer is turned on To enter information Identification Tab 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Owner icon 2 select the dentification tab Identification Notes Network ID Mame Company Address Work phone Home phone At power on Display owner identification Figure 3 24 Owner Properties Window Identification Tab 3 Fill in or edit the owner information 4 Select the Display Owner Identification check box to display this information when the mobile computer starts Settings 3 27 Notes Tab 1 Select the Notes tab and enter information in the Notes box to add more information 2 select the Display owner notes box to include this information on the startup display Identification Notes Network ID Mates At power on Display owner notes Figure 3 25 Owner Properties Window Notes Tab Network I
258. ns Continued TO NN Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights and the icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the CTRL key again to return to the normal keypad functions Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions The T icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric entries Produces an asterisk Executes a selected item or function a For detailed keypad configurations including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix B Keypad Maps 2 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 5250 Emulator There are two physical configurations of the 5250 emulator keypad however both of the keypads are functionally identical The 5250 emulator keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computers keypad may not function exactly as described See able 2 5 on page 2 17 for key and button descriptions and lable 2 7 on page 2 22 for the keypad s special functions Nu PNL 9 S P el Qu gt 5 a
259. ntrol exe El US copy htm 8 copyfiles dll 8 copyfiles exe EB copyrt Ink copyrts txt Figure 4 16 Windows Directory control Ink File 5 Double tap the eConnect icon the eConnect Properties window appears FH Settings Figure 4 17 eConnect Icon Window Communications 4 19 6 Tap the Establish TCP IP Connection checkbox and select USB from the Serial Port Baud Rate drop down menu Double tap OK to enter the settings and complete the eConnect installation eConnect Properties OK x Docking About Use eConnect for Docking Events When Docked Launch ActiveSync Establish TCP IP Connection Launch Application Params Serial Port Baud Rate Query cradle for DNS domain Figure 4 18 eConnect Properties Window Mobile Computer Configuration Inserting the mobile computer into the cradle provides direct connect Remote Access Service RAS service Configure each mobile computer for use with the cradle just as any remote client would be configured to connect to an Internet Service Provider ISP See Persist on page 3 44 to save the settings to the registry The computer comm port to setting was set to USB during the eConnect installation procedure To confirm the setting 4 20 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 1 On the mobile computer double tap the Ct Panel icon and double tap Comm Settings to enter the Comm Settings window CtlPanel Exampl
260. ntry Codes to use the modem with the appropriate country s telephone network he following items are required for communication e MC9000 Series or MC906R G RFID mobile computer e Cable Adapter Module CAM Symbol p n ADP9000 100 see Cable Adapter Module on page 7 24 e Serial Adapter Cable for communication via cradle Symbol p n 25 63856 01 e Microsoft ActiveSync e Setup of host computer and mobile computer 7 30 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Setup Connecting to the Mobile Computer Phone cord Figure 7 22 Modem Module Connection Mobile Computer Do not connect the modem s 15 pin connector into a VGA port of a host JN computer CAUTION Using the Correct Telephone Line Type Use a standard analog phone line as in most households In an office use a line connected to a fax machine or modem In a hotel request a room with a standard phone line or data port If necessary check with the local phone company or administrator to make sure you are using the right type of line before sending data Accessories 7 31 Connecting to the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Adapter cable Male 15 pin connector Figure 7 23 Modem Module Connection Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Do not connect the modem s 15 pin connector into a VGA port of a host JN computer CAUTION eo If using a phone connect the cord from the phone to the Phone port on the modem Configuring t
261. ny key button or the trigger other than the Power button JN during a reset caution Cold boot resets the mobile computer to the default settings All added applications and all stored data will be removed Do not cold boot without support desk approval Any data previously synchronized with a computer can be restored during the next ActiveSync operation See Chapter 4 Communications for detailed ActiveSync instructions The Power button is also used to reset the mobile computer by performing a warm or cold boot e Warm Boot Soft Reset Resets the mobile computer e Cold Boot Hard Reset Resets the mobile computer removes all added applications and restores all factory default settings For information about rebooting the mobile computer refer to Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 Headphone An optional headphone is available The headset plugs into the optional headphone jack located at the top of the mobile computer see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 Set the mobile computer volume appropriately before putting on the headset When a headset is plugged into the jack the speaker is muted 2 24 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Series 9000 Demo Window On initial power up or on a warm or cold boot the Series 9000 Demo window appears The Series 9000 Demo window icon functions are provided in Table 2 8 Series 9000 Demo D tw Test Apps Scan Op Sounds PC Link Terminal
262. o p p AAA AA m LL ff ee Ld E SO kao 4T AWad KK Lo qs Jg qu dd ome m See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 43 Table B 6 53 Key Mapping Continued VK Code ASCII Value Default State Decimal Decimal MEI 160482 E 5o o o lo ls qe Do O o 18 la 8o ll p JM lug L LLL 160 108 E LLL fm fe a a CIA CN CT FF l1 fe fe See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 44 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 6 53 Key Mapping Continued VK Code ASCII Value Default State Decimal Decimal 9 US ee 1 160488 s E mai B loo po le fa WAS O IAN CP GN See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 45 32 0 emulation keys 32 0 character map 32 0 key functions The 3270 emulator keypad uses the 53 key mapping when not in the emulator mode see Table B 6 e he 3270 emulator keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key for descriptions for the 53 key mappings The emulator mapping functions incl
263. obile Computer Configuration 11 15 If the mobile computer does not have a radio then the WirelessS24XX selection is not available on the ransport menu CU 6 Use the up and down scroll buttons to select the method of transport then press Enter 7 f the Serial transport method is selected the Baud Rate Menu appears Baud Rate Menu 115200 57600 38400 19200 9600 Previous Top Figure 11 9 Baud Rate Menu 8 Use the up and down scroll buttons to select the appropriate baud rate then press Enter 11 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 9 If the Wireless S24XX transport method was selected the Address Configuration menu appears Address Configuration DHCP Previous Top Figure 11 10 Address Configuration Menu For wireless downloads the ESSID must be loaded via serial before Wireless S24 DS can be used The PC running TCM must be on the same network as the terminal and the ESSID partition must be loaded with the correct ESSID 10 Use the up and down scroll buttons to select DHCP then press Enter Mobile Computer Configuration 11 17 11 The Download File menu appears Download File Download Cancel show Parms Previous Top Figure 11 11 Download File Menu 11 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 12 Use the up and down scroll buttons to select Show Parms to verity the file to download Press Enter to display the P
264. ocumentation provided with the terminal emulator software package for setup and use Chapter Contents ntroduction J L J 10 dz MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET De io dard enw ve hale arid ERRORI 3 24 Network and Dial up Connections 3 25 kA IURE PERDERE Ee a ee ee 3 26 junii MAA E E O 3 26 Notes Tab eR RR IR e es 3 2 Network ID Tab uon ccc RR RRRRRRRRRRRRIII 3 27 APAM ene i EEE de ab aw emda EET PULAG Hannes TE ri 3 28 cc AS 3 29 iS IET AnS 3 29 DM ae EEE E nn A ond ens ones bee eases os 3 30 IO TE m A wee nG 3 30 IUS D a eu a9 A o o o IZ 3 31 A 3 31 POT A In 3 32 coz tora 3 33 Wido EN EE 3 33 CM oir iaa irc rider E 3 34 Vi A dd a 3 35 Soo TR ar ov sra REPOS E diis gd Vu PP be ene eg EN 3 35 ENG TR sew M he E d PARA RAP RM Era Fido ERE P dU ETUDES RR 3 36 BE AAP AA AAEE 3 37 Copyrights Tab a 3 38 series 9000 Dama VVIFDOM nica cewek eee key obo aeo be d p Eod a 3 39 en AAAH EY 3 40 le AA AA APAPAP PO PA 3 41 AGE ne ee to p AA AA AA AA AY 3 42 gol APA AA AP SE 3 43 i AA AO 3 44 0 AAP PP AAP APAPAP AA APA PYRA 3 45 Power Settings cri A de 3 46 A A IS 3 50 LOT A 3 51 cd ci nS a AG pa Gob DTE 3 52 DU AAA O 3 55 Display Settings 3 56 Settings 3 3 e Ls acis adici APA AA oic dor oed AA 3 57 eta ESI cog hs 40 Gee TT TET TOTO TT T TT
265. ocuments listed in the Start Documents entry see Start Button on page 2 28 lypically this list is empty but if there were documents in the list the Clear button would delete them 3 Tap the Expand Control Panel checkbox to display the entire contents of the MS control panel in list form rather than icons Taskbar and Start Menu OK General Advanced TAA f Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Documents Menu Figure 2 13 Taskbar and Start Menu Advanced Tab 4 Tap OK to save the settings and exit the window Operating the MC9000 G 2 33 Entering Information To enter information e Use the keypad e Use the input panel soft keyboard to enter typed text e Scan bar code data into data fields e Use Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize or copy information from the host computer to the mobile computer For more information on ActiveSync see Chapter 4 Communications or ActiveSync Help on the host computer Entering Information Using Keypad The alphanumeric keypads produce the 26 character alphabet A Z numbers 0 9 function keys and assorted characters he keypads default characters functions are printed white and the function character functions are printed blue See Keypads on page 2 3 for keypad configurations and see Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Entering Information Using the Keyboard Input Panel Use the keyboard input panel to enter information in any progra
266. of the device Enter the desired IP address to assign to the device Refresh the list when complete MAC Address Desired IP Address Cancel Figure 4 20 MobileDox Set IP Address of Unlisted Device Window Enter the appropriate MAC Address and IP address 4 Click OK 4 24 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Modifying Cradle Settings 1 Launch the MobileDox Cradle Manager on your host computer 2 Select the name of the cradle you want to configure from the list 3 Click Device Modify Settings 4 Usethe General Settings tab to modify the identification settings of the cradle Field Description Status General Settings TCPAP Settings Port Settings Device Name A text string used to describe the MobileDox device Any 15 character string may be entered ustom String i Custom Sting Custom String A text string for any desired usage Identification Device Name Security examples are location asset ID etc EM iore Admin Privileges to EO Settings Any 15 character string may be entered Hequire Admin oelecting this checkbox will require Privileges to Modify users to have administrative privileges Settings checkbox in order to modify MobileDox settings Administrative privileges are validated using standard Windows authentication Figure 4 21 MobileDox General Settings Window Communications 4 25 Use the PC IP
267. ol software products Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client 1 Select Start Programs AirBEAM Client The AirBEAM CE window appears 2 Tap File Configure The AirBEAM configuration window appears Packages 1 Packages 2_ lt gt Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 Package 4 Figure 9 1 AirBEAM Smart Configuration Window The configuration window is used to view and edit AirBEAM smart Client configurations This dialog box has six tabs that can be modified Packages 1 Packages 2 Server Misc 1 Misc 2 and Misc 3 Packages 1 Tab This tab is used to specify the package name of the first four of eight packages that are to be loaded during the AirBEAM Smart synchronization process The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the package a specified package server Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 Package 4 Packages 2 Tab his tab is used to specify the package name of the last four of eight packages that are to be loaded during the AirBEAM Smart synchronization process The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the package 7 specified package server Package 8 AIrBEAM Smart Packages 1 Packages 4 gt Package 1 Package 2 Package 4 Table 9 1 Package 1 Tab Description Package name of the first of eight packages This is an optional field Package name of the second of eight packages This is an o
268. om Possible Cause Action MSR cannot read card Mobile computer detached from MSR during card swipe Re attach mobile computer to MSR and reswipe the card Faulty magnetic stripe on card see your System Administrator MSR application is not installed or configured properly Ensure the MSR application is installed on the mobile computer Ensure the MSR application is configured correctly Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 13 7 Troubleshooting the Magnetic Stripe Reader Continued Symptom Mobile computer battery is not charging Possible Cause Mobile computer was removed from MSR or MSR was unplugged from AC power too soon Action Ensure MSR is receiving power Ensure mobile computer is attached correctly Confirm main battery is charging under Start Settings System Power lf a mobile computer battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge a battery if the mobile computer is off and longer if the mobile computer is operating Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery The mobile computer is not fully attached to the MSR Detach and re attach the MSR to the mobile computer ensuring it is firmly connected During data communications no data was transmitted or transmitted data was incomplete Mobile computer detached from MSR during communications
269. om of the cradle Ensure the power supply is securely connected and receiving power Battery is not recharging Mobile computer removed from the cradle too soon Replace the mobile computer into the cradle It can take up to 4 hours to recharge a completely depleted battery pack if mobile computer is suspended or longer if the mobile computer is on Tap Start Settings System Powerto view battery status Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery Mobile computer is not inserted correctly into the cradle Remove the mobile computer and reinsert it correctly Verify charging is active Tap Start Settings System Powerto view battery status Warning Message Unable to obtain a server assigned IP address Try again later or enter an IP address in Network settings This message occurs If a suspend resume cycle is performed and the mobile computer radio is not associated e g due to being out of range Tap OK to close the message The mobile computer will obtain address information and communicate through the ethernet cradle 13 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Table 13 4 Troubleshooting The Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Symptom Possible Cause Action Batteries not charging Battery was removed from the charger or charger was un
270. om the image The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code A bar code in which characters are paired together using bars to represent the first character and the intervening spaces to represent the second A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces Interleaving provides for greater information density The location of wide elements bar spaces within each group determines which characters are encoded This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces Only numeric 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded See IP interface The connection between two devices defined by common physical characteristics signal characteristics and signal meanings Types of interfaces include RS 232 and PCMCIA O ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the terminal s memory Series 9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports Internet Protocol The IP part of the TCP IP communications protocol IP implements the network layer layer 3 of the protocol which contains a network address and is used to route a message to a different network or subnetwork IP accepts packets from the layer 4 transport protocol TCP or UDP adds its own header to it and delivers a datagram to the layer 2 data link protocol It may also break the packet into fragments to support the maximum transmission unit MTU of the n
271. ommunication CO 7 20 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Power Connection The MSR or CAM can accept power from either a Symbol approved power supply or from a 12 VDC vehicle power source 1 Select either the universal AC power supply or the 12VDC power cable 2 Plug the power cord into the unit 3 Plug the other end of the power cord into the power source AC Power Supply Vehicle Power Supply Figure 7 13 MSR or CAM Power Connection LED Charge Indications The mobile computer s charging LED blinks amber to indicate that the battery is charging and turns solid amber when battery is completely charged The battery usually charges in less than four hours See Table 7 1 on page 7 11 for charging indication details Accessories 7 21 Serial USB Connection The MSR can connect to and communicate with a serial USB device such as a printer or host computer through its serial port See CAM and MSR Communications Setup on page 7 25 for the host computer communication setup procedure To connect the MSR to a serial USB device connect one end of the serial device cable into the communications port on the MSR and the other end into the serial USB port on the device Communications Port To Device Figure 7 14 MSR or CAM Serial USB Connection 7 22 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Magnetic Stripe Reading The MSR9000 application is designed to work with the MSR
272. onfiguration Select Win32 WCE ARMV4 Debug as the Active Configuration If both Microsoft Visual C v3 0 and Microsoft Visual C v4 0 are installed on the development computer then confirm that Microsoft Visual C v4 0 is the one being launched eu Software Updates Updates to the SMDK can be downloaded from the Symbol Developer Zone web site at http devzone symbol com This site can be easily accessed using a shortcut added to the Windows start menu It should be checked periodically for important updates and new software versions ter Contents Chap introducit 9 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET COMI VH DIO SENET Louis ausi sicud op ole Ra OE ERE nara S Cc nbc Ge pene es Red YR Re UR RI PY bara QU dci FER REX e d Automatic Synchronization 00 RR CI NGA AG e ek ended Qd o ek kee ghee dei ow tg ha d CREER Ed AIrBEAM Smart 9 3 Introduction The AirBEAM Smart product allows specially designed software packages to be transferred between a host server and Symbol wireless handheld devices Before transfer AirBEAM Smart checks and compares package version so that only updated packages are loaded AirBEAM Smart resides on radio equipped client devices and allows them to request download and install software as well as to upload files and status data Both download and upload of files can be accomplished in a single communications session The ability to transfer software
273. onfiguration explains how to use the Terminal Configuration Manager TCM and explains how to use the Initial Program Loader IPL Chapter 12 Desktop Emulator provides instructions for installing the desktop emulator on the host computer and using the desktop emulator as an aid in developing applications Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting provides information on proper mobile computer maintenance and troubleshooting Appendix A Technical Specifications includes the technical specifications and connector pin outs for the mobile computer Appendix B Keypad Maps provides the keypad mapping information for the mobile computer About This Guide xxi Notational Conventions he following conventions are used in this document Mobile computer refers to any Symbol terminal MC9000 G Series refers to all configurations of the MC9000 G with the exception of MC906R G RFID configurations User refers to anyone using an application on the terminal Italics are used to highlight the following e chapters and sections in this and related documents e dialog box window and screen names e drop down list and list box names e check box and radio button names e icons on a screen Bold text is used to highlight the following e key names on a keypad e button names on a screen Bullets e indicate e action items e lists of alternatives e lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential sequential lists e g
274. only appear if a program Is open Main Menu On Emulator power up the Main Menu window appears and functions the same as in the mobile computer see Series 9000 Demo Window on page 2 24 Start Menu On Emulator power up the Main Menu window appears The Start button functions the same as in the mobile computer see Series 9000 Demo Window on page 3 39 Exiting the Emulator The emulator may be exited in one of two ways e Press the Stop Emulation button on the SSD e Press the red Power button and select the Stop Emulation Button to turn the emulator off In either case two additional exit states are provided e Turn off emulator re initiate Emulator on next start Copies all files form the desktop flash file system and restarts the emulator e Save emulator state restore previous state on next start Restores the last Emulator state To restart the emulator see Starting the Emulator on page 12 3 12 17 12 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Resetting the Emulator The emulator does not support a the reset function Warm and cold boots cannot be performed on the emulator Cha NAINT VIUITIL Maintenance and Iroubleshootinc pter Contents 13 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 3 Introduction This chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing the mobile computer and provides trouble
275. onnection icon to access the Remote Desktop Connection window Operating the MC9000 G 2 29 Taskbar Icons The taskbar icons display the function status indicate what programs are active and Indicate the battery charge status The taskbar icons are provided in Table 2 9 on page 2 26 Status Icons The status icons indicate the function key status If the Function Shift CTRL or ALT functions are active the appropriate status icon is displayed Active Programs Icons If more than one program is active the applications icons can be used to toggle between the open programs applications Tap on a taskbar application to maximize the application AC Power Battery Status Icons The AC Power Battery Status icons are shown in the taskbar to indicate the present power supply status of the mobile computer he battery status icons provide the battery status in 10 increments from 10 to 100 see able 2 9 on page 2 26 Battery status can also be viewed on the battery status window see Battery on page 3 45 a The amber LED in the mobile computer indicator LED bar see Figure 1 7 on page 1 3 also indicates low battery status and or incorrect battery insertion 2 30 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Task Manager and Properties Use the Task Manager to control an application s use and use the Properties functions to set display and clock options Task Manager 1 Select Function CTRL to activate the ALT s
276. ons with your desktop computer Figure 3 28 Change Connection Window 4 Select the connection type from the drop down list 5 Tap OK to select the connection type and exit the Change Connection window 6 Inthe PC Connection Properties window tap OK to apply the changes Settings 3 29 Regional Settings Use the Regional Settings to set the way the mobile computer displays dates times currency amounts large numbers and numbers with decimal fractions The system of measurement can also be set to either metric or U S Region Tab The selectable input locales are listed in the Your local drop down list Corresponding User Interface Language choices are provided where appropriate for a particular location selection Some location selections also provide special features such as font characters or spell checkers designed for different languages 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Regional Settings icon Regional Settings Properties OK E Region Number Currency Time Date Your locale nglish United States User Interface Language English United States Appearance samples Time 11 34 11 4M Short date 12 15 2003 Long date Monday December 15 2003 Positive numbers 123 456 789 00 Negative numbers 123 456 789 00 Positive currency 123 456 789 00 Negative currency 123 456 789 001 Figure 3 29 Regional Settings Properties Region Tab 2 Fromthe Your local
277. oo close to tag The minimum write distance is 1 foot from the antenna Moving closer than 1 foot during killing can damage tag and render it unreadable Maintenance and Troubleshooting 13 9 If after performing these checks the mobile computer is still not reading symbols contact the distributor or Symbol Technologies CU Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Table 13 2 Troubleshooting the Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Mobile computer charge Cradle is not receiving power Ensure the power supply is securely connected indicator LED does not light and receiving power Mobile computer is not seated Ensure the battery is properly installed in the correctly in the cradle mobile computer and re seat the mobile ter in th dle The battery is not properly ka IUE installed in the mobile computer The battery in the mobile Verify that other batteries charge properly If so computer is faulty replace the faulty battery Note The Four Slot Charge Only Cradle has no power indication Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Table 13 3 Troubleshooting the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Attempt by the mobile computer to ActiveSync failed Mobile computer removed from the cradle while the LED was blinking green Activesync on the host computer has not yet closed the previous Activesync session 13 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Wait one minute and reinsert the mobile computer in the cradle This allows
278. operation Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters SPACE BKSP Space and backspace functions Application These keys can be assigned to an application Function blue Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate d functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights and the LE F icon appears on the taskbar see Table 2 9 on page 2 26 Press and release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad functions Operating the MC9000 G 2 21 Table 2 6 VT Emulator Descriptions Continued TO a Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights and the icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the CTRL key again to return to the normal keypad functions Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions The T icon appears on the taskbar Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Produces a period for alpha entries and decimal point for numeric entries Produces an asterisk Executes a selected item or function a For detailed keypad configurations including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix B Keypad Maps 2 22 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Keypad Special Functions The keypad special functions are color coded on the keypads For example on the 53 key keypad the display backlight ico
279. opy commands specifying the files to copy from the development computer to the partition TCM works with a pair of directory windows one displaying the script and the other displaying the source files resident on the development computer Using standard windows drag and drop operations files can be added and deleted from the script window The SMDK includes scripts used by Symbol Technologies to build the standard factory installed Platform and Application partitions provided on the mobile computer The standard Platform partition contains drivers while the Application partition contains demo applications and optional components The standard TCM scripts can be found in the following folder C Program Files Symbol Windows CE SMDK PDT9000 SymbolPlatforms PDT9000 TCM Scripts eo Before creating a script to build a hex image identify the files required system files drivers applications etc and locate the files source directories to make the script building process easier The required processes for building a hex image in TCM include e Starting TCM e Defining script properties e Creating the script for the hex image e Building the image e Sending the hex image e Creating a splash screen e Flash storage 11 3 11 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Starting Terminal Configuration Manager Click the Windows start menu TCM icon Symbol Windows CE SMDK for Series 9000 to start TCM The 7CM wi
280. ories include cradles keypads Magnetic Stripe Reader MSR and Cable Adapter Module CAM snap ons four Slot spare battery charger headphone Multimedia Card MMC Universal Battery Charger UBC adapter wall mounting bracket and shelf slide Cradles Keypa single Slot Serial USB Cradle charges the mobile computer main battery and or a spare battery It also synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through either a serial or a USB connection Four Slot Charge Only Cradle charges the mobile computer main battery Four Slot Ethernet Cradle charges the mobile computer main battery and synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through an Ethernet connection ds Optional Keypads include the five interchangeable modular application specific keypads listed below The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized applications e 43 key Keypad e 53 key Keypad e 32 0 Emulator Keypad e 5250 Emulator Keypad e VI Emulator Keypad Miscellaneous Four Slot Spare Battery Charger charges up to four mobile computer spare batteries Headphone can be used in noisy environments The MMC provides optional secondary non volatile storage a SD card may also be used UBC Adapter adapts the UBC for use with the MC9000 batteries Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide is used for wall mounting applications 7 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Snap on Mod
281. ory Device Name LiL System Microsoft Windows CE NET Version 4 20 Copyright 1996 2003 Microsoft Corp All rights reserved This computer program is protected by LS and international copyright law Computer Processor intel Intel R 1 PXA Memory 62268 KB RAM Expansion cards Symbol Spectrt y Registered to Figure 3 37 System Properties General Tab 3 36 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Memory Tab Use the Memory tab to adjust the RAM allocation 1 2 Select the Memory tab oelect Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the System icon System Properties OK General Memory Device Name LiL Move slider to the left for more memory to run programs Move it to the right for more storage space Only unused RAM black portion of th H Storage memory 21792KB total B460KB in use Program memory 40476kB total b20KB in use Figure 3 38 System Memory Tab 3 loadjust RAM allocation move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage If there is not enough space for a file increase the amount of storage memory If the mobile computer is running slowly try increasing the amount of program memory CO Programs supplied with the mobile computer are located in ROM and remain after a cold boot User installed programs are located in RAM and need to be reinstalled after a cold boot
282. osoft ActiveSync LE a ES File View Tools Help Sine Stop al Detalle Explore Options WindowsCE Not connected Information Type Status Files Figure 4 9 ActiveSync Not Connected In the ActiveSync window select File Connection Settings and ensure the selections shown in Figure 4 10 are made Select the appropriate COM port for the host computer ENA xj Connection Settings m Click Get Connected to connect your mobile device to this Lala computer Status Waiting for device ta connect Get Connected Status COM port is available Allow USB connection with this desktop computer Status USE is available Allow network Ethernet and Remote Access Service R5 server connection with this desktop computer Status Network connections are disabled Status icon v Show status icon in Taskbar ea Hob Figure 4 10 Serial Connection Settings 4 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 7 Tap OK to save any changes made Every mobile computer should have a unique device name Never try to synchronize more than one mobile computer to the same name eu 8 Connect the device to the host computer see Figure 7 5 on page 7 10to set up a Single Slot serial USB Cradle or see Figure 7 14 on page 7 21 to set up a MSR or a CAM he cradle requires a dedicated port It cannot share a port with an internal modem or other device Refer to the computer
283. oth device icon Kan device 5 Bonded device Icon Bonded Bluetooth device Settings 3 13 3 Double tap the device to connect to on the device list The Bluetooth Manager Authentication window appears Tap No to connect to the device without authentication or tap Yes to authenticate the device before connecting Bluetooth Manager 9 Do you need to se authenticate the device Figure 3 8 Bluetooth Manager Authentication Window 4 Ifthe Yes button was selected in the Bluetooth Manager Authentication window the enter PIN windows appears Enter a PIN between 1 and 16 characters in the Enter PIN text box and tap OK The mobile computer sends the PIN request to the device for bonding Enter FIN Figure 3 9 Bluetooth Enter PIN Window 3 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 5 When prompted the same PIN must be entered on the other device When the PIN is entered correctly on the other device the bonded icon amp appears on the device list Bluetooth Manager OK sp Unnamed 008037128834 oom F CTVOU 00027201646a 6963 TRILLION 000272b02223 GAE TRILLION 000272b02333 Gm E TRILLION 000272b02a23 Oe SF TRILLION 000272b02aa3 Oem El TRILLION quer Scan Device Figure 3 10 Bluetooth Bonded Devices Window Settings 3 15 Certificates Certificates are used by some applications for establishing trust and for secure communications Certificates are signed and iss
284. p Tan vo ncn PAPA PAPA e ROLES Een sias 2 28 E o MET 2 29 Oe A RT RERO TET 2 29 Active Programs Icons 0 0 cee ene 2 29 AC Power Battery Status Icons a 2 29 Task Manager and Properties 0 0c c ccc cece eee eens 2 30 TE ge xs NI REA GATA 2 30 GG SAA 2 31 Contents vil Erntenno NON uo dac dope opp RUE KALA ERREUR EO REO EE irii Ren 2 33 Entering Information Using Keypad a 2 33 Entering Information Using the Keyboard Input Panel 2 33 Entering Data via the Bar Code Scanner Scan Wedge 2 33 o RERO T TIT TTE ede ened 2 34 Exe s zac qoe REC RARIOR d n od ad i arae de OE ERREUR 2 34 o AAA 2 35 scanning Considerations 0 000 cece eee eee 2 35 lui a ERIT TTE Oboe E E Ly rte be bes PAA AETA 2 36 Es ig Adee NGI BG BAGAL KAP AKA hd KG FE bd be ba ers 2 36 Mi RET O QUT 2 36 D KA CERE dde tidie iq ER 2 36 Image Capture Mode 0 00 2 37 Aiming the Imager 0 0 000 ccc eects 2 3 RFID MC906R G RFID Only 2 39 eI Ee AA APP 2 39 Scan LED Indicator eee eens 2 40 Resetting the Mobile Computer 2 41 PEO 8 YVAN BODL usa deiade EA RH id ies 2 41 Fer enia d CONI BOB arrasadas 2 42 Waking the Mobile Computer 0 0 ccc cece eee eee 2 43 File System Directory Structure 2 44 Hans PNE AN 2 45 Startup Folder naana nanara eee 2 45 idi rra E E AAP yr ra 2 45 Audio Event ABs isa eed DR need EROR Re EE Coe eres ab e os ka
285. pad functions Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric entries Produces an asterisk Executes a selected item or function a For detailed keypad configurations including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix B Keypad Maps Operating the MC9000 G 2 13 3270 Emulator There are two physical configurations of the 3270 emulator keypad however both of the keypads are functionally identical The 3270 emulator keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computers keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 4 on page 2 14 for key and button descriptions and lable 2 7 on page 2 22 tor the keypad s special functions 0 OF 0 Q a t gt gt z3 2 PA PA3 O R5 O Q m DWP 7 a pan LD MR K C 0 E 3 8 BCKTAB CLREOF HG m 006 o m e C 6 t 5 cele CEOE a so es f y J E G n JA N o Yj 3 Co If d Figure 2 4 3270 Emulator Keypad The 3270 emulator keypad is onl
286. partnership to synchronize data between your device and this computer or a quest partnership to simply transfer data between your device and this computer What kind of partnership would you like to establish between your device and this computer want to synchronize data between my device and this computer keeping data such as e mail and calendar items up to date in both places C Guest partnership want to only copy and move information between my device and this computer add and remove programs or restore a backup image on a device whose memory has been reset do notwantto synchronize data Back Cancel Help Figure 4 2 New Partnership Window 5 Click the Standard partnership radio button and then select Next The New Partnership Specify how to synchronize data window appears New Partnership Specify how to synchronize data Choose to synchronize with your desktop and or a server You can synchronize data such as e mail messages and calendar items between your device and this desktop computer However if you have access to a Microsoft Exchange Server with Exchange ActiveSync you can also choose some information types to synchronize directly with a server getting the most up to date information even when your desktop computer is turned off How do you wantto synchronize with your device Synchronize with this desktop compute C Synchronize with Microsoft Exchange Server and orthis de
287. performs 1 dimensional bar code scanning with integrated laser scanner or 1 dimensional and 2 dimensional bar code scanning with integrated imager 802 11b Spectrum24 wireless technology to perform wireless local area network WLAN communication memory configuration 32 or 64 MB ROM 32 or 64 MB RAM 43 key 53 key 3250 Emulator 5250 Emulator and VI Emulator interchangeable keypads QVGA monochrome or color touch panel display e MC9060 G Windows CE operating system performs 1 dimensional bar code scanning with integrated laser scanner or 1 dimensional and 2 dimensional bar code scanning with integrated imager 802 11b Spectrum24 wireless technology to perform wireless local area network WLAN communication memory configuration 32 or 64 MB ROM 32 or 64 MB RAM 43 key 53 key 3250 Emulator 5250 Emulator and VI Emulator interchangeable keypads QVGA monochrome or color touch panel display e MC906R G RFID Windows CE operating system performs 1 dimensional bar code scanning with integrated laser scanner reads EPC Class 1 RFID tags 802 11b Spectrum24 wireless technology to perform wireless local area network WLAN communication memory configuration 64 MB ROM 64 MB RAM 53 key 3250 Emulator 5250 Emulator and VT Emulator interchangeable keypads QVGA monochrome touch panel display XX MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Chapter Descriptions Topics covered in this guide are as follows
288. pically indicated by 6 5 seconds of silence followed by a ringing tone Use special controls on some systems tone only ABCD or or 3 20 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Display Use the Display Properties window to change desktop background image and the display appearance Background Tab To select the background image 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Display icon tap the Background tab Display Properties Image Windowsce Ce Tile image on background Figure 3 17 Display Properties Background Tab 2 From the mage drop down list select the desktop background image To locate an image in another folder tap Browse 3 To have the image cover the entire background select i e image on background Tap OK to save settings Settings 3 21 Appearance Tab To change the color scheme 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Display icon tap the Appearance tab Display Properties Background Appearance Scheme Selec Active i LOK Dialog Box Text z Iter Desktop F Figure 3 18 Display Properties Appearance Tab 2 From the Scheme drop down list select a scheme 3 Select the color scheme item from the tem drop down list 4 View the choice in the preview box tap Apply to apply the scheme To create a custom scheme 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and dou
289. plications e Advanced intuitive laser aiming for easy point and shoot operation Imager he imager uses digital camera technology to take a digital picture of a bar code stores the resulting image in its memory and executes state of the art software decoding algorithms to extract the data from the image A typical bar code decoding process is as follows Aim the imager version of the mobile computer at a bar code and pull the trigger he red laser aiming pattern turns on to assist in aiming the mobile computer If necessary the mobile computer turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target bar code The mobile computer takes a digital picture image of the bar code and stores it in memory for decoding yup a 5 Anaudible beep occurs indicating the bar code was decoded properly 6 Release the trigger This process usually occurs instantaneously Steps 2 4 are repeated on poor or difficult bar codes as long as the trigger remains pulled Operational Modes The imager version of the mobile computer has two modes of operation Decode Mode and Image Capture Mode activated by pulling the trigger Decode Mode In this default mode upon pulling the trigger the Imager attempts to locate and decode enabled bar codes within its field of view The Imager remains in this mode as long as the trigger is pulled or until a bar code is decoded Operating the MC9000 G 2 3 Image Capture Mode In this default mode upon pulling the tr
290. plugged from AC power too soon Ensure MSR is receiving power Ensure mobile computer is attached correctly Confirm main battery is charging under Start Settings System Power If a mobile computer battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge a battery if the mobile computer is off and longer If the mobile computer is operating Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery Battery contacts not connected to charger Verify that the battery is seated in the battery well correctly with the contacts facing down Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Table 13 5 Troubleshooting the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Symptom Possible Cause Action LEDs do not light when mobile computer or spare battery is inserted Cradle is not receiving power Mobile computer is not seated firmly in the cradle Ensure the power cable is connected securely to both the cradle and to AC power Remove and re insert the mobile computer into the cradle ensuring it is firmly seated opare battery is not seated firmly in Remove and re insert the spare battery into the charging the cradle slot ensuring it is firmly seated Mobile computer battery is not charging Mobile computer was removed from cradle or cradle was unplugged from AC power too soon Ensure cradle is receiving power Ensure mobile computer Is seat
291. port provides several benefits e Many devices can be simultaneously loaded over the RF network e The AirBEAM staging utility provides a simple single dialog user interface that is used to quickly start the software installation process 9 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Chapter Contents t peu peperit rone Ion TUU UU LU 1 n mant VM 10 2 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Rapid Deployment Client 10 3 Introduction The Rapid Deployment RD Client facilitates software downloads to a mobile device from a Mobility services Platform MSP Console FIP server The MSP Console is a web based interface to the wireless infrastructure monitoring and management tools provided by the MSP Lite or MSP Enterprise server When software packages are transferred to the FIP server mobile devices on the wireless network can download the packages to the mobile device The location of software packages are encoded in RD bar codes When the mobile device scans a bar code s the software package s is downloaded from the FIP server to the mobile device A single RD bar code can be scanned by multiple mobile devices For detailed information about the MSP Console MSP Lite MSP Enterprise servers and creating RD bar codes refer to the MSP Users Guide CO Rapid Deployment Window The Rapid Deployment window displays bar code scan status and provides features for resetting
292. pply more than 4 in lbs of torque when tightening the keypad screws CAUTION 4 Replace the keypad and re attach using the two screws see Figure 7 2 on page 7 6 7 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Single Slot Serial USB Cradle This section describes how to set up and use a CRD 9000 10008 Single Slot Serial USB Cradle with the MC9000 G For cradle setup see Figure 7 4 for cradle communications setup procedures see Serial Communications Setup on page 4 10 Indicator LED Bar Spare Battery Spare Battery Charging Well Spare Battery Charging LED USB Port Serial Port Power Port Mobile Computer Slot Figure 7 4 Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Accessories 7 9 The Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Provides 15VDC power for operating the mobile computer Provides serial USB ports for data communication between the mobile computer and a host computer or other serial devices e g a printer oynchronizes information between the mobile computer and a host computer with customized or third party software it can also be used to synchronize the mobile computer with corporate databases Charges the mobile computer s battery Charges a spare battery 7 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Setup The cradle requires a dedicated port on the host on the host computer CO serial Port serial Cable serial Port USB Port Power Port
293. ptional field Package name of the third of eight packages This is an optional field Package name of the fourth of eight packages This is an optional field Packages 2 Server Mi KO Package 5 Package 6 Upload Pkg Table 9 2 Package 2 Tab m eii OoOO Package 8 Package name of the eighth of eight packages This is an optional field Upload Pkg Package name of a package that is to be processed for upload files during the AirBEAM Smart synchronization process The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the specified package server This is an optional field 9 5 9 6 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Server Tab This tab is used to specify the configurations of the server to which the client connects during the package synchronization process Table 9 3 Server Tab Packages 2 Server wi IP Address KA Dmm 00000 IP Address The IP Address of the server It may be a host name or a dot notation format Directory The directory on the server that contains the AirBEAM Smart package definition files All AirBEAM Smart package definition files are retrieved from this directory during the package synchronization process User The FIP user name that is used during the login phase of the package synchronization process password is used during the login phase of the package synchronization process The
294. quency range larger than normally required for robust transmission of data spreading the signal without adding additional information adds significant redundancy which allows the data to be recovered in the presence of strong interfering signals such as noise and jamming signals The primary advantage of spread spectrum technology is its ability to provide robust communications in the presence of interfering signals A radio protocol that may be used by the Symbol opectrum24 radio card Symbol Radio cards that use the opring protocol also have an Net ID A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code oymbol Terminal Enabler Program A subset of nodes on a network that are serviced by the same router See Router A 32 bit number used to separate the network and host sections of an IP address A custom subnet mask subdivides an IP network into smaller subsections The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address to turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets Default is often 255 255 255 0 A foundation material on which a substance or image Is placed oymbol Virtual Terminal Program A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology usually including start stop characters quiet zones data chara
295. r o o 7 16 DOWEL COMECI N scciadiaersesevied eas 7 17 er enm Em A 1 OSU 6 3 splash SIGE A 11 29 KITI PA PAPAYA 11 26 si a i PP 2 24 12 17 starting the mobile computer 1 7 Starting the terminal sesi coser nes 1 15 Startup folder 0 0 eee eee 2 45 A 6 16 2r A e 4 31 UN ds osa seas 6 5 E aaa tonnes bw AG NAGA 2 26 2 29 12 17 status Mobile Companion 6 20 CUE as 1 14 SIUS errada dans dd 1 6 1 13 3 24 3 33 12 16 OUT AS 6 16 subnet masks 0 0 0 00 cece eee eee 6 21 A A tes 1 9 suspend mode 0 eee oo 2 23 symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET see SMDK for NET STO subDart CANIS Lus cased eves is xxiii system IMOMADON zssaes pira 3 7 T lack eG aos adie eirt errn des 2 30 MA ORTI 2 24 2 26 12 16 TCM building hex image 11 3 11 10 11 11 creating Script AA PRA AA 11 8 defining properties isses ec s 11 7 error MESSAGES a kaaa AS KAGAGAWA 11 21 hex image download 11 11 SAVING SONI ccccaneceateesdesabecaeess 11 9 LO oa daaa rra proa 11 4 Index terminal 2 A TU ETT E TT TIT 1 15 customizing 0 ee eee eee ee 3 5 A 2 41 2 42 power ON 00 eae 2 23 12 17 DE apres oes Sane PEPPER AES E 2 41 soft reset a 2 41 A 1 15 A CEU DIU PERPE 2 43 terminal emulator o o o ooo 2 46 j Q 3 6 3 16 3 51
296. r Embedded Windows CE NET 3 To modify dial up properties tap Dial Properties make the selections in the Device Properties window 4 lo edit the Dialing Patterns tap Edit Dial Up Connection Al My Connection User Name Symbol Password por Domain Phone Bg 55555555 Dial from Work Dial Properties Dialing Prop Location ft Local settings are Area code 425 Tone dialing Country Region ji C Pulse dialing Disable call waiting dial Dialing patterns are Local Long Distance International Figure 7 29 Dial Up and Dial Properties Window 5 he Edit Dialing Patterns window appears ME cM EE Edit Dialing Patterns OK x For Lacal calls dial For Long Distance calls dial FG For International calls dial O11 EFG Ee country region code F f area code Gig number Figure 7 30 Edit Dialing Patterns Window Edit the dialing properties see able 7 4 on page 7 38 Tap OK to exit the Edit Dialing Patterns window Tap OK to exit the Dialing Patterns window Tap Connect at the Dial Up Connection window The modem attempts to connect Accessories 7 37 Basic AT Command Syntax A command line is made up of three elements e Prefix consists of the characters AT or at or to repeat the execution of the previous command line A or a e Body made up of individual commands described later Space ch
297. ressable boundary eight adjacent binary digits 0 and 1 combined in a pattern to represent a specific character or numeric value Bits are numbered from the right 0 through 7 with bit 0 the low order bit One byte in memory is used to store one ASCII character A protocol for remote booting of diskless devices Assigns an IP address to a machine and may specify a boot file The client sends a bootp request as a broadcast to the bootp server port 67 and the bootp server responds using the bootp client port 68 The bootp server must have a table of all devices associated MAC addresses and IP addresses The process a computer goes through when it starts During boot up the computer can run self diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software Code Division Multiple Access is a cellular technology originally know as IS 95 Center for Devices and Radiological Health A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety This agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification This class is considered intrinsically safe even if all laser output were directed into the eye s pupil There are no special operating procedures for this class No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit Laser operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human exposure See CDPD A pattern of bars and
298. roduct Reference Guide Appendix A Technical Specifications Mobile Computer Technical Specificati0nS ooooo o o MDM9000 Modem Module Technical Specifications Mobile Computer Pin Outs 0 0 20 0 0 eee Accessory CAM and MSR Pin Quts 0 00 000 0000 Appendix B Keypad Maps E APR A NS rr AA 28 Key Keypad 2 tenes 43 Key Keypad 00 cee RR e e AP AAP os ues ao IT T PLC d NN oo ns oed MP3 E JR GORGE ES RUF qa PRG VI Emulator o LL uaa bash ev Ba wen Xd HER PAKI KIARA Glossary Index Tell Us What You Think Chapter Contents xviii MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET About This Guide xix Introduction The MC9000 G Product Reference Guide provides information about the MC9000 G mobile computer using the Embedded Windows CE NET operating system and Its accessories The MC9000 G includes the following variations e MC9010 G Windows CE operating system performs 1 dimensional bar code scanning with integrated laser scanner or 1 dimensional and 2 dimensional bar code scanning with integrated imager 802 11 Spectrum24 wireless technology to perform wireless local area network WLAN communication memory configuration 32 or 64 MB ROM 32 or 64 MB RAM 43 key 53 key 3250 Emulator 5250 Emulator and VT Emulator interchangeable keypads QVGA monochrome touch panel display e MC9050 G Windows CE operating system
299. rtitions 0 11 29 A AA APA 11 30 splash screen oo o o o 11 29 A ae cary NAALALA NA ues LA 11 27 copyfile 0 0 2 eee eee 11 29 tud p PPP 11 28 ash storage abad ha AG La xr Pis 2 45 11 27 tour slot charme only iuc eoo cce ees 1 3 four slot charge only cradle 1 14 tour BOL EINGMEL naa maka KARA KAG hr KAG iisi 1 3 LOGIN CORTOS UN 54 i0asdatsavess dera 1 6 four slot ethernet oo oooooooooooo 1 6 four slot Ethernet cradle 7 12 Ethernet connection 4 16 G G9000 MainMenu 2 24 12 17 sci MewP T U O 6 16 6 21 H handstrap BEBE oaa BANAKA NAGA ETE 1 14 hard reset osos a PRX S Ead 2 23 2 41 2 42 6 39 headset 000 c eee ee eee 1 6 2 23 7 3 BUM cusuetkusgedeedacseysyaasereuseeue E 1 6 ITE eese Laus to EG RIqed staskxuRid 6 22 PTR a P dH 2 36 Imager operational modes 2 36 Imager options decode mode 0 eee 2 36 mager SCANNING sate deer e bahag vee ened pag 2 36 infrastructure eee eee 6 7 6 17 Initial Program Loader 11 30 international roaming 008 6 32 internet wireless connection 4 2 internet explorer 02 eee 5 10 BENI An aad qu RAE af ED EU 5 10 IN 4 MC9000 G for Embedded Windows CE NET Product Reference Guide ll AA PP a APP
300. ry Size for each partition Note that adding space to one disk partition subtracts it from another 7 In the Access drop down list for each disk partition determine and select the Read Write access option OT ue O 11 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 8 Click the Options tab The Script Properties window Options tab appears E SCRIPT PROPERTIES Terminal MCS000w v1 0 64M v Partition Data Options Script File Path C Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages MC9IO00w v0 1 TCMScripts Browse Flash File Path C Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages MC3000w v0 1 Flash Folders Browse Hex File Build Path C Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages4MC3000w v0 1 Hex Images Browse OK Cancel Figure 11 3 Script Properties Window Options Tab 9 Set the paths for the Script File Flash File and Hex File Build 10 Click OK Creating the Script for the Hex Image On start up 7CM displays the 7CM window with the Script window and File Explorer window pointing to the following directory Program Files symbol Device Configuration Packages MC9000W vO0 1 TCMScripts The Script window directory pane displays two partitions Platform and Application Depending on the type of flash chip the number of partitions may change Files can be added to each of the partitions TCM functionality includes e Opening a new or existing script file e Copying
301. s Properties Time Tab 2 Select desired options The available options are determined by the Your local selection and by the User Interface Language selection on the Region tab Date Tab 1 Select the Date tab Calendar Gregorian Calendar Date samples Short 12 15 2003 Long date Monday December 15 2003 Date styles Short Midivvvy v Date separator i F Long date f dda MIMIMIM dd vyyy Figure 3 33 Regional Settings Properties Window Date Tab 2 Select desired options The available options are determined by the Your local selection and by the User Interface Language selection on the Region tab 3 32 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Remove Programs Use the Remove Programs window to remove user installed programs from the mobile computer 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Remove Programs icon 2 select the program to be removed from the programs list Remove Programs OK Remove Programs To remove a program select it and then press Remove Remove Figure 3 34 Remove Programs Window 3 Tap Remove 4 Tap OK or X to exit the Remove Programs window Settings 3 33 Stylus Use the Stylus Properties window Double Tap to adjust double tap timing and use the Calibrate tab to recalibrate the touch screen Double Tap Tab 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Stylus icon Stylus Properties O
302. s Timeout is not supported Timeout 100ms Linear Sec All codes 2 sets the number of times a barcode is re read to confirm an accurate All Codes 3 decode Long 2 Short 3 All codes 2 Two times read redundancy for all bar codes Short Redun All codes 3 Three times read redundancy for all bar codes Short Codabar Long 2 Short 3 Two times read redundancy for long bar codes three times for short bar codes Short Redun Two times read redundancy based on redundancy flags and code length Short Codabar Two times read redundancy if short bar code or CODABAR Fixed Auto Smart Fixed mode is the only focus mode supported Focus Position Far Near specifies the Fixed setting focus position for Faris 9 inches and focus position for Near is 5 inches 3 62 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Interface Parameters Use the nterface Parameters window to set the scanning interface parameters 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Scanner Settings double tap Interface Parameters The Interface Parameters window appears CtlPanel Example File Help Power Settle Time 500 Power Off Settle Time 1000 ae gee Figure 3 58 Interface Parameters Window 2 To change any item in the Interface Parameters column use the up and down v arrows to select the item 3 Use the left and right arrow gt buttons to increment the value Table 3 10 list the Reader Parame
303. s the network to the specified IP address Total Tx Total Rx O Retries O Avg Mbps O O 0 D D 9 Signal Level RT Time ms 100 Min 0 Max 0 j 2 Ss dl Avg O Figure 6 15 Mobile Companion Ping Tab In the P drop down list select a target device IP address In the Size drop down list select the size of the packet transmission Tap Start Test to begin the ping test Tap Stop Test to terminate the ping test The average mega bits per second signal strength data rate currently in use test statistics and round trip RT times are displayed for each test The associated AP MAC address is also displayed The signal strength level and the data transmission rate are displayed in real time bar graphs Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 23 10 Select the APs tab to view APs with the same ESSID as the mobile computer s profile Mobile Companion Signal Info IP Status Pino APs known Access Points JS Ja Figure 6 16 Mobile Companion APs Tab The associated AP displays a radio wave radiating from Its antenna to indicate Its associated status Tapping the icon displays a menu with Set Mandatory and Set Roaming options selecting the Set Mandatory item prohibits the mobile computer from associating with a different AP The letter M appears on top of the icon when the Set Mandatory option has been selected oelecting Set Roaming allows the mobile computer to roam to any AP with a better signa
304. sabled the synchronization process fails 813 If any download files are in use Wait Welcome This checkbox specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client waits for the WELCOME windows to be completed before automatically launching the synchronization process after a reset AIrBEAM Smart 9 9 Table 9 5 Misc 2 Tab Continued Ka Close Apps This checkbox specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically attempts to close non system applications prior to resetting the mobile unit If enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client sends a WM CLOSE message to all non system applications before resetting the mobile unit This feature offers applications the opportunity to prepare i e close open files for the pending reset 9 10 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Misc 3 Tab This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features Use DHCP server C Use DHCP bootfle Table 9 6 Misc 3 Tab Oe NN Use DHCP server This checkbox control specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the DHCP response option 66 to specify the P address of the FIP TFIP server If enabled special RF network registry settings are required to force the DHCP server to return the TFIP server name field option 66 The special RF network registry settings are included but commented out in the radio network registry initialization files essid xxxx yy reg Use DHCP bootfile This check box control
305. sed for single items such as the operating system monitor or splash screen Again using a desktop computer comparison these partitions are roughly the equivalent of the BIOS or special hidden system files When a partition is updated all data that was previously in its storage region Is erased i e it is not a merge but rather a replacement operation Typically the operating system is not running when partitions are update so IPL can perform partition updates Mobile Computer Configuration 11 31 Partition images for selected partitions can be created by TCM All partition images suitable for use by IPL are in hex file format for transfer by TCM from the development computer to the mobile computer Upgrade Requirements Upgrade requirements e The hex files to be downloaded on development computer e Aconnection from the host computer and the mobile computer either serial or wireless e TCM on development computer to download the files Once these requirements are satisfied the mobile computer can be upgraded by invoking IPL and navigating the menus See Sending the Hex Image on page 11 11 for procedures on downloading a hex file to the mobile computer 11 32 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Chapter Contents 12 2 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET LOO OD AS 12 16 eS ge ANG ID koh hd as BADA KAG PRA BALAG Oe ks KAG AN dada 12 16 ib bing al ou es eo P
306. shooting solutions for potential problems during mobile computer operating Maintaining the Mobile Computer For trouble free service observe the following tips when using the mobile computer e Take care not to scratch the screen of the mobile computer When working with the mobile computer use the supplied stylus or plastic tipped pens intended for use with a touch sensitive screen Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the screen e Although the mobile computer is water and dust resistant do not expose it to rain or moisture for an extended period of time e The touch sensitive screen of the mobile computer contains glass Take care not to drop the mobile computer or subject it to strong impact e Protect the mobile computer from temperature extremes Do not leave it on the dashboard of a car on a hot day and keep it away from heat sources e Donotstore or use the mobile computer in any location that is extremely dusty damp or wet e Usea soft lens cloth to clean the mobile computer If the surface of the screen becomes soiled clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window cleaning solution 13 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Troubleshooting Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer EN MEME NENNEN GN MC9000 G and MC906R G RFID Mobile computer does not turn Lithium ion battery not Charge or replace the lithium ion battery in the mobi
307. significant amounts of power over CAM and is the preferred mode for devices running on battery power 6 34 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET MicroAP Tab Use the MicroAP tab to configure the mobile computer to operate as an AP The MicroAP establishes a single cell wireless network for devices in mobile unit mode Each MicroAP requires a unique ESSID MicroAP cells can coexist as separate individual networks within the same site without interference The MicroAP does not roam but it does support roaming The mobile computer in MicroAP mode operates in CAM and supports devices operating in both PSP and CAM The MicroAP supports up to 16 mobile computers Symbol Spectrum24 W OK Mobile Unit MicroAP Encryption Left 802 11 Micro AP Settings 1 Megabit Base Rate 2 Megabit Base Rate Frequency Hop Settings Hop Set y Hop Sequence DTIM Delay 1 7 Figure 6 23 MicroAP Tab Table 6 15 MicroAP Tab Fields a in Enable MicroAP Tap the Enable MicroAP checkbox to support MicroAP operations Tap the 7 or 2 Megabit Base Rate check boxes to specify the data rate within the MicroAP cell A MicroAP and the mobile computer are required to use the same data rate Frequency Hop Settings Tap the Frequency Hop Settings drop down list to establish the Hop Set Hop Sequence and DTIM Delay to be used within the MicroAP cell Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 35 Encryp
308. sktop computer Note Y ou must have access to Microsoft Exchange Server with Exchange ActiveSync or Microsoft Mobile Information Server Back Cancel Help Figure 4 3 How To Sync Window Communications 4 7 6 Click the Synchronize with this desktop computer radio button and select Next The New Partnership Select Number of Partnerships window appears New Partnership E X Select Number of Partnerships Select whether you want to synchronize with Just this computer Your device can have up to two partnerships or a partnership with only this computer Do you want your device to have a partnership and synchronize with only this computer Nes wantto synchronize with only this compute Remove any existing partnerships on my device and set up a new partnership with just this computer C No lwantto synchronize with two computers Set up a partnership with this computer but do not remove any existing partnerships on my device Figure 4 4 How To Sync Window 7 Click the Yes want to synchronize with only this computer radio button and then select Next The New Partnership Select Synchronization Settings window appears TE New Partnership Nr Select Synchronization Settings Selectthe type of information you wantto synchronize To synchronize a particular type of information select its check box To stop synchronization of that information clear its check box
309. source laser or photoelectric cell illuminates a bar code 2 Photodetector registers the difference in reflected light more light reflected from spaces 3 Signal conditioning circuit transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern The scanner is energized programmed and ready to read a bar code A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by scanning bar code menus software MobilityDevelopment Kit A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol shared Key authentication is an algorithm where both the AP and the MU share an authentication key symbol Host Interface Program symbol Mobility Developer Kit see Warm Boot The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars oymbol s frequency hopping spread spectrum cellular network oymbol s implementation of the Spread Spectrum wireless network utilizing direct sequencing GL 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Specular Reflection Spread Spectrum Spring Radio Protocol Start Stop Character STEP Subnet Subnet Mask Substrate SVTP Symbol Symbol Aspect Ratio Symbol Height The mirror like direct reflection of light from a surface which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code A technique for uniformly distributing the information content of a radio signal over a fre
310. spaces which either directly represents data or indicates a control function such as a number letter punctuation mark or communications control contained in a message Character Set Check Digit Codabar Code 128 Code 3 of 9 Code 39 Code 93 Code Length Cold Boot COM port Continuous Code Cradle Glossary GL 5 Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for other symbologies Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol is decoded A discrete self checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 character types including all uppercase letters numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters 4 96 and space The code name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide while the remaining 6 are narrow An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding dens
311. ss is complete e ap Retry to restart the synchronization process This button is activated only if there is an error during the synchronization process Disconnecting Automatic Synchronization The AirBEAM Smart Client can be configured to launch automatically using the Misc 1 Preference tab see Misc 1 Tab on page 9 7 When setting automatic synchronization use the Auto load drop down list is to specify how the AirBEAM Smart Client should be invoked automatically when the client device is rebooted See Misc 1 Tab on page 9 7 for instructions on enabling Auto Sync AirBEAM Smart Staging The AirBEAM Smart staging support is intended to speed up and simplify the process of staging custom or updated operating software onto mobile devices directly from manufacturing The staging support is part of the AirBEAM Smart CE Client that is integrated into the mobile computer The AirBEAM Smart support works by defaulting the AirBEAM Smart Client configuration to a known set of values and launching the AirBEAM Smart package download logic A staging environment including an RF network FIP server and AirBEAM Smart packages must be setup Ideally a staging network and server should be setup to match the default AirBEAM Staging client configuration The AirBEAM Smart staging utility is invoked by selecting the Files icon from the Series 9000 Demo screen select Platform Airbeam and double tap on the abstage nk file The AirBEAM Staging sup
312. t button Tap to display the Start menu The Keyboard Input Panel display button Tap to display the Keyboard Input Panel The Keyboard Input Panel hide button Tap to hide the Keyboard Input Panel The Desktop display button Tap to display the Desktop 2 28 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Start Button Tap the Start button to launch the Start Menu or tap the Start button while in the ALT state and the Task Manager Properties menu appears see ask Manager and Properties on page 2 30 Programs Use to access available programs Favorites Displays files in Favorites Documents Displays files in Documents Settings Accesses the Control Panel the Network and Dial up Connections and the Taskbar and Start Menus Run Runs a program or application Suspend Suspends the mobile computer Programs hg Favorites Documents Lx Settings RUN BP Suspend Figure 2 9 Start Menu Keyboard Input Panel Button Use the Keyboard Input Panel as an alternate input device see Entering Information Using the Keyboard Input Panel on page 2 33 Desktop Button Use the Desktop button to minimize all open programs and display the Desktop Major desktop functions include My Computer Double tap icon to open My Computer Recycle Bin Deleted files remain in the recycle bin until the recycle bin is emptied Once emptied the files cannot be retrieved Remote Desktop Connection Use the Remote Desktop C
313. tab sets the mobile computer to operate as an AP and establishes a single cell wireless network see MicroAP Tab on page 6 34 Encryption The Encryption tab sets the WLAN adapter to make the wireless link less vulnerable to information theft see Encryption Tab on page 6 35 Mobile Unit 1 1 WLAN Adapter The WLAN Adapter tab sets the hardware and radio settings The password protection feature is turned on and off from the WLAN Adapter tab see WLAN Adapter Tab on page 6 37 6 32 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Mobile Unit Tab Use the Mobile Unittab to configure the mobile computer ESSID power management RTS threshold International Roaming capability and AP options Symbol Spectrum24 W E OK gt lt Mobile Unit MicroAP Encryption De 802 11 Mobile Unit i ESSID RTS Threshold 1600 y International Roaming Preferred B55 Mandatory B55 Power Management Power Mode cam iy Ja Beacon Algorithm Minimum 1 Maximum 7 Figure 6 22 Mobile Unit Tab Table 6 14 Mobile Unit Tab Fields Ca 0 Use the ESSID field to set the 802 11 Extended Service Set Identifier The ESSID is a 32 character string maximum address identifying the wireless LAN The ESSID assigned to the mobile computer is required to match the AP ESSID for the two devices to associate RTS Threshold Use the ATS Threshold drop down list to select the data transmission s
314. tate Decimal Decimal bolo lolol ls 9 Lo p lll Jj ps ESO ee mj OU 15 hk hm D SOLA A ESO ER Lo t p poes pe OU R1 1 ww E LA m L1 1 1 p me m ee 7 55 90 T8 111 4 h Im lv LALA h8 Im ni HTH E e a m Lo po p J qe py od E ao 2E See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet B 28 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 4 43 Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Shift VK Code ASCII Value State Alpha State AlphaState Decimal Decimal Bo o l y py L ff jJ 1l mj AREA m EYES LEA A SAA o ol pop pnm ARALAR L L R 10m AN A AAA L1 XU Pe m L1 l1 fe fw fa D4 hh Cf ff UN See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping worksheet Keypad Maps B 29 Table B 4 43 Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Shift VK Code ASCII Value State Alpha State AlphaState Decimal Decimal SF Lo D p eg D a 1 1 r wm gao Jap A kh 1 160468 AT A See Table 2 7 on page 2 22 for keypad special functions Note Blank lines are provided to allow the application developer to use this table as a keypad mapping wor
315. tate and tap the Start button to display the Task Manager Properties Selection menu 2 lap lask Manager to display the Task Manager window Task Manager Properties Figure 2 10 Task Manager Properties Selection Menu 3 lapataskin the Active Tasks list and tap Switch To to make that task the primary task or tap End Task to end the selected task 4 Tap X to exit the Task Manager window Task Manager Active Tasks Control Panel Series 9000 Demo Switch To End Task Figure 2 11 Task Manager Window Operating the MC9000 G 2 31 Properties 1 Select Function CTRL to activate the ALT state and tap the Start button to display the Task Manager Properties window see Figure 2 10 on page 2 30 2 Tap Properties to display the Taskbar and Start Menu General Tab 3 This menu provides taskbar options e Check the A ways on Top checkbox to keep the taskbar on top of all other windows e Check the AutoHide checkbox to make the taskbar disappear touch the bottom of the display to make the taskbar return e Check the Show Clock checkbox to display the clock on the taskbar 4 Tap OK to save the settings and exit the window Suto hide Show Clock Figure 2 12 Taskbar and Start Menu General Tab 2 32 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Advanced Tab 1 Tap the Advanced tab to enter the Taskbar and Start Menu Advanced Tab 2 Tap the Clear button to delete all of the d
316. ter Map Continued COEN INN EI PON IN pole pl pl pole ple Mb a pl B 52 MC9000 6 Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 9 3270 Character Map Continued aT NN NN CH Kom IN oee Keypad Maps B 53 5250 Emulator The 5250 emulator keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The 5250 emulator keypad uses the 53 key mapping when not in the emulator mode see Table B 6 for descriptions for the 53 key mappings The emulator mapping functions include e 5250 key functions e 5250 emulation keys e 5250 character map G B 11 HOME PRINT HEP M HOO CA DO O ERINP CIREOF ATTN 0 fouss ROLLON 6 CE O DELO DD arr Q RuP X SYSRQ RIDN mo CQ Q2 QO Q a CO GG C a OO 62 C92 DOODO Da a F E CO ONO E ew CO OO CE es eue ie pe Me 7 8 II SHIFT 9 SHIFT u o mg io o K S NB A m JOEL d N a w m mI mn Y y N a m m 9 Jic Y Y gt A Figure B 5 5250 Emulator Keypad B 54 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 10 5250 Key Functions Keyclicks On Off Quiet
317. ter value options Table 3 10 Interface Parameters Interface Parameter Values Interface Type symbol SSI Power Settle Time 0 1000 in increments of 50 Power Off Settle Time 0 1000 in increments of 50 4 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window Settings 3 63 Scan Parameters Use the Scan Parameters window to set the scan parameters 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Scanner Settings double tap Scan Params The Scan Parameters window appears CtlPanel Example File Help Forg Local Feedback True WAY File Beep Time 200 Beep Freq 2670 3000 Start Beep Time Start Beep Freq Start FD Time Figure 3 59 Scan Parameters Window 2 Tochange any item in the Scan Parameters column use the up and down v arrows to select the item 3 Use the left and right arrow gt buttons to increment the value Table 3 11 list the Scan Parameter value options Table 3 11 Scan Parameters ELLE NN WAV File see Figure 3 60 on page 3 65 lap Decrement to move back on the WAV file listing and Increment to move forward on the WAY file listing Tap OK to select the WAV file 0 5000 in increments of 100ms Beep Freq 2500 3500 in increments of 10 3 64 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 3 11 Scan Parameters Continued CO LED Time 0 5000 in increments of 500 Start WAV File See Figure 3 60 on page 3 65 Tap Decrement to move back on the WAV file l
318. the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data Also see Encryption and Key The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum element width The Symbol Device Configuration Pacage provides the Product Reference Guide PRG flash partitions Terminal Configuration Manager TCM and the associated TCM scripts With this package hex images that represent flash partitions can be created and downloaded to the mobile computer Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Software that automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP IP network Similar to BOOTP but also permits the leasing of an IP address It eliminates having to manually assign permanent IP addresses DHCP software typically runs in servers and is also found in network devices such as routers that allow multiple users access to the Internet A server in the network or a service within a server that assigns IP addresses A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters intercharacter gaps are not part of the code Discrete 2 of 5 DNS Server Domain Name DOS DRAM DTE EAN Element Encoded Area ENO RS 232 Encryption EPC Glossary GL 7 A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars two of which are wide The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded spaces are insignificant Only nu
319. the secondary radio firmware for the Spectrum24 HR radio card Note These partitions must be loaded to use wireless downloads through IPL with the HR radio They are only used by IPL and are not required by the Operating System or the 24 FH radios ESSID Identifies the ESSID used for wireless downloads Note This partition specifies the ESSID to be used for IPL downloads via all S24 radios If the partition is not present then an ESSID of 101 is assumed This partition is only used by IPL and Is not required by the Operating System Config Block Contains information to correctly configure the Operating System for the mobile computer This information is loaded by the manufacturer Note Great care should be taken to ensure that an incorrect config block is not loaded into the mobile computer Loading an incorrect config block prevents the correct operation of the computer Windows CE Contains the operating system for the mobile computer Contains the Monitor and IPL programs oplash Screen Contains the splash screen that displays while booting the mobile computer Note Splash screens are generated from bmp images and must be less than or equal to 240 pixels wide and 296 pixels deep For mono displays the bmp image must be 4 bpp and for color screens the color depth must be 8 bpp Note 8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen images Once Windows CE is running the color density is 16 bits per pixel Power Micro The Power Micro is a s
320. the trigger 5 Anaudible beep sounds by default and the Indicator LED bar flashes green one time to indicate the tag was decoded successfully 6 Release the trigger 2 40 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Tag decoding usually occurs instantaneously The mobile computer repeats the steps required to read a tag as long as the trigger remains pulled CO Scan LED Indicator The Indicator LED bar on the mobile computer provides a visual indication of the scan status See Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 for the location of the Indicator LED bar Table 2 12 Scan LED Indicators sess in Flash Once Green Operating the MC9000 G 2 41 Resetting the Mobile Computer If the mobile computer stops responding to input reset it There are two reset functions warm boot and cold boot A warm boot restarts the mobile computer by closing all running programs All data that is not saved is lost A cold boot also restarts the mobile computer but erases all stored records and entries from RAM In addition it returns formats preferences and other settings to the factory default settings Perform a warm boot first This restarts the mobile computer and saves all stored records and entries If the mobile computer still does not respond perform a cold boot Performing a Warm Boot Hold down the Power button for approximately five seconds As soon as the mobile computer starts to perform a warm boot release the Power
321. ther the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle or the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger see Single Slot Serial USB Cradle on page 7 8 or Four Slot Spare Battery Charger on page 7 16 CO Getting Started 1 13 Stylus Use the mobile computer stylus for selecting items and entering information The stylus functions as a mouse lap the touch screen once with the stylus to select options and open menu items To remove the stylus pull the stylus cord down and outward to remove the stylus Figure 1 5 Removing the Stylus To replace stylus push the stylus back into the storage position The stylus automatically locks in place 1 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Strap Lanyard he strap lanyard may be moved to either the left or right side of the mobile computer to suite user preferences To reposition the strap lanyard 1 Disconnect the strap lanyard disconnect clip 2 Open loop and slide the disconnect clip through the loop 3 Slide the loop out of the connector post 4 Repeat procedure on remaining connector to remove strap lanyard D Reverse procedure to re attach the strap lanyard Two strap lanyard connectors are provided on the mobile computer s main body the strap lanyard cord may be attached to either connector Strap Lanyard Cord Loop Strap Lanyard Disconnect Clip Strap Lanyard Connectors Loop Connection Details Figure 1 6 Reposition the Strap Lanyard Getting Started 1 15
322. tings Printer Settings Comm Setinna Hn Le Figure 3 42 Control Panel Window Table 3 5 Control Panel Menu a Bein Symbol Security Settings 3 41 About Ctl Panel Use the About Ct Panel window to view the system s control panel software version information 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap About The About window appears CtlPanel Example CtlPanel Example CtlPanel Version 4 1 14 1 Copyright 1999 2003 Symbol Technologies i Figure 3 43 About Window 2 Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window 3 42 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET System Version Use the System Version window to view the system software versions 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap System Versions The System Versions window appears CtlPanel Example File Help System Ve F SYMBOL WinCE OS Version 04 20 OEM Name SYMBOL MC9000G OEM version 91 00 01 IPL Version 01 16 ca E ES EST d Figure 3 44 System Version Window 2 lap OK to return to the Control Panel window Version data shown is example data only CO Settings 3 43 Unique Unit ID Use the Unique Unit ID UUID window to view the unique unit ID version information The UUID provides a way of uniquely identifying each unit Some software packages require a UUID 1 Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Unique Unit ID The Unique Unit ID window appears Ct
323. tinued Can t open the source An error occurred opening the source device either radio card or Serial port Check source device connectivity and retry Can t open the destination An error occurred opening the destination device either flash ROM or Power Micro Retry the download If the failure persists it is most likely due to a hardware failure the terminal requires servicing Can t read from the source device The source device either radio card or Serial port could not be read from Check source device connectivity and retry The destination device either flash ROM or Power Micro could not be written to Retry the download If the failure persists it is most likely due to a hardware failure the terminal requires servicing Transmission checksum error 11 An error occurred during transmission from the source device either radio card or Serial port and the checksum check failed Check source device connectivity and retry Can t write to the destination device Readback checksum error 12 A checksum generated from reading back data that was written to the destination device was Incorrect An error during transmission or a write error to the destination device could cause this There is no more heap space 14 There is no more heap space avallable for the avallable download procedure Restart IPL and retry the download If the failure persists contact service with details of what is being downloaded Insuffici
324. tion View and modify digital certificates which are used by some applications for establishing trust for Certificates secure communications see Certificates on page 3 15 for more information B Date Time Change date time and time zone information see Date Time on page 3 16 for more information Device Configure device management install and view available software see Device Management on Management page 3 17 for more information Set dialing properties for modem communication and change telephony settings see Dialing on page 3 18 for more information Change desktop background appearance backlight and brightness see Display on page 3 20 for more information Input Panel Switch input methods and set input options see nput Panel on page 3 22 for more information keyboard Change keyboard repeat delay and rate see Keyboard on page 3 23 for more information Settings 3 7 Table 3 1 Windows Control Panel Menu Icons Continued ee MN Adjust double click sensitivity for both the speed and timing Network and Connect to other computers networks and the Internet through a modem see Certificates on page Dial up 3 15 for more information Change owner s personal profiles see Owner on page 3 26 for more information PC Change settings for connectivity of a host computer see PC Connection on page 3 28 for more Connection information Regional Change how numbers currencies dates and times are disp
325. tion Tab Use the Encryption tab tor configuring encryption settings The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft Encryption is an efficient method of preventing data theft and improving data security The firmware supports Open System and Shared Key 40 bit Encryption algorithms MicroAP Authentication Options A MicroAP can use Open System Shared Key or both If Shared Key is enabled and Open System is not the MicroAP grants access to adapters that have Shared Key enabled and are using the correct Encryption Key algorithm Adapters using Open System cannot associate to the MicroAP when the MicroAP has Shared Key enabled Only when the MicroAP is using Open System can Open System mobile computers associate to It Mobile Unit Microap Encryption gt Micro AP Authentication Options o Open System Algorithm no encryption O Shared Kev Algorithm O Bath Algorithms Mobile Unit Authentication Options Encrv E ID leset Keys Cancel Figure 6 24 Encryption Tab 6 36 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 6 16 Encryption Tab Fields re TO wap MicroAP Authentication A MicroAP can use Open System Algorithm Shared Key Algorithm or both If Shared Key Options is enabled and Open System is not the MicroAP grants access to adapters that have shared Key enabled and are using the correct Encryption Key algorithm Adapters using
326. tions and tap the left or right arrow buttons to select a menu item or to toggle a selection value The Keypad arrows perform the same functions as the arrow buttons Tap OK to save any new selections and return to the previous window or tap Cancel to return to the previous window without saving any new entries CU Settings 3 47 Use the power settings with caution Some of the settings allow the user to turn off the display or to disable the keypad touch screen If the unit Is inadvertently disabled with the power settings see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 to restore the factory settings Table 3 6 Example Power Setting Parameters CC A Real Time Clock Displays the event that initiated the last wake up m bkI1 Backlight Accessory serial Bluetooth serial Power Key Wake Timeout Wake API Call Wake Battery Timeout AC Power Timeout DO D3 D4 Activities Trigger Touch Keyboard User Power Key Wake Timeout Wake API Call Wake DO D3 D4 Power Key Wake Timeout Wake API Call Wake DO set the Wake onzYes off No set the Wake onzYes off No set the Wake onzYes off No 60 time value in ms 0 time value in ms When selected feature is on When selected feature is on standby When selected feature is off oelect Yes to set Activities to function on Battery Power and or on AC Power Select No to set activities not to function on Battery Power and or on AC Power set the Wake
327. transmitting data A long preamble is approximately 8 bytes of the packet header attached to the packet prior to transmission Devices in Ad Hoc mode are required to use the same preamble length to interoperate The mobile computer initiating the Ad Hoc network sets the channel using the Channel drop down list used by each peer in the Ad Hoc network Country oelect the country of operation for the mobile computer from the Country drop down list This ensures the mobile computer is using country code information compatible with the country code data used by the associated AP 6 8 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET select the Authentication tab to configure server based authentication Select one of the following Authentication options trom the Authentication drop down list e None Default setting when authentication is not required on the network The client adapter does not use any authentication scheme when Open System Is selected on the Encryption tab e Kerberos see Table 6 3 e LEAP see Table 6 4 e EAP TLS see Table 6 6 e PEAP see Table 6 6 Mobile Companion OK Mode Authentication Encryption KDC fkrbtat REALM Kerberos Options Kerberos Authentication 7 C x Connect T Resume fis Min Credential Options interval O at hhimm Kerberos Password Credential Caching Settings Kerberos Options Figure 6 4 Mobile Companion Authenti
328. tring can be entered You can specify up to four port names one for each of the cradle s slots IP Address The IP address assigned to the cradled device There should be one IP address Der cradle slot This box Will be disabled for all devices if DHCP is used to obtain the IP address Use DHCP to obtain The cradle will use DHCP to obtain an IP IP Address checkbox address for the handheld Unchecking this selection allows the Status General Settings TCP IP Settings Port Settings m Port Specific Settings PPP Part 1 m Port Name PPP Port 1 IP Address cradle to use Static IP address for the handheld r Settings for All Ports B DILE TEES Use NAT checkbox The cradle will use Network Address Use NAT Translation NAT when forwarding handheld traffic onto the network No IP addresses are necessary for the handhelds This must be disable when using EC ActiveSync Figure 4 23 MobileDox Port Settings Window 7 Click OK Communications 4 27 Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network The mobile computer can connect to the Internet across a wireless network To set up a wireless connection 1 Tap the Mobile Companion icon 4 on the task bar 2 Tap Find WLANs The Mobile Companion window appears Mobile Companion WLAN Profiles Edit E Delete do Dj Figure 4 24 Find WLANs Window 3 The mobile computer tries to locate Access Points APs in the area When it lo
329. ttings p i aj xj Emulator POT3000 Gemnini53keysplit Stop Emulator Tool Embedded Visual C Exit Always on top signal Quality On Link Speed 11 MBit I Associated Roamed Simulated Access Point ESSID Emul P MAC Addr jor 2345678948 Simulated Spectrum 24 Radio ESSID Emut MAC Addr 0011228ABBCC Mfg ID Symbol Technolgies Mode L4411 Spectrum 24 WirelessLANP Fw Wer F2 71 28 0408 2000 s T7LOIKU API Version Major BU Minor 32 Ss E gt gt e GREEN RED FUNC SHIFT UNTL COMM Figure 12 8 Spectrum24 Tab Table 12 4 24 Tab Functions Signal Quality set the slide bar to represent the signal quality to be simulated Link Speed Select the simulated date transfer rate 1MBit 2MBit 5 5MBit or 1 1MBit Associated and Roamed Select the simulation mode Simulated Access Point Enter the simulated ESSID Enter the simulated MAC Address Desktop Emulator 12 13 Table 12 4 S24 Tab Functions Continued simulated Trilogy Adapter Enter the simulated MAC Address Enter the simulated Mfg ID Enter the simulated Model Enter the simulated FW Version Enter the simulated Serial Battery Tab Use the Battery tab to setup the power source to A C or battery Battery profiles life and discharge charge rate can also be set Battery status can be modified using the shell icon or using the Windows CE battery API calls Mill Emul
330. turn to the Control Panel window 3 46 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Power Settings Use the Power Settings window to view and set the power setting parameters Double tap the Ct Panel icon double tap Power Settings The Power Settings window appears CtlPanel Example File Help Device Value Ja Last Wake Real Time Clack acpi AC Power bkli Backlight comi Accessory serial com Bluetooth serial ddi1 Display kbd1 Keyboard kiti Keylight pky1 Power Key Dc ordi ce v A gt ce cest CtlPanel Example File Help Keyboard Keylight Power Key Resource Coordina Real Time Clock System Touch Panel Wireless LAN USB Cable Lor v A gt ce cance Figure 3 47 Power Settings Window The device list as well as the he parameters settings is dependent on the mobile computer setup and configuration However the parameter types are defined The parameter types are WakeUp control Power key Timeout and API call typical sample device acp1 Timeout control Battery and AC power typical sample device bkl1 State control DO D1 D2 D3 D4 typical sample device bkl1 Activity control Trigger Touch Keyboard User typical sample device bkl1 Use the power settings to set the individual power parameters see Table 3 6 for parameter settings Tap the up and down arrow buttons to scroll up or down on the menu selec
331. ude 3270 Emulator ll Yos EN END GA i40 08 pen Da yo YU Deje e aala ara a Pip aes AFA eo 115 atat p prae Occ DUE Ji a 528022919594 GOLOOOVE LA EERE PE PS Ef AS Pag O LR EOI A E a IP FDMRK BCK TAB R XA F rm F7 Figure B 4 3270 Emulator Keypad B 46 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 7 3270 Key Functions Keyclicks On Off Quiet Mode On Off Terminal Configuration Host Profiles Message Recall Free Cursor Mode Close Session Previous Session Next Session View Mode On Off Display Backlight On Off Keypad Backlight On Off Table B 8 3270 Emulation Keys Keypad Maps B 47 B 48 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 8 3270 Emulation Keys Continued Table B 9 3270 Character Map LERNEN NN o lee IN I a les p eR o AN Po mm Mb pole C p 1m pole kl pls pole a Keypad Maps B 49 B 50 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table B 9 3270 Character Map Continued COEN memes Oo pem COM pmm CO pem CO memes po lama po lomo eem CON F mee CON RO mem Keypad Maps B 51 Table B 9 3270 Charac
332. ued by certificate authorities and are valid for a prescribed period of time Windows CE manages multiple certificate stores 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Certificates icon Certificates Stores Trusted Authorities My Certificates Other Autharities Class 2 Public Primii Class 3 Public Prim Entrust net Certifl Entrust net Secur ia Equifax Secure Ce Globalsign Root Civ Figure 3 11 Certificates Window 2 Select the certificate group from the drop down list to be viewed or modified e The rusted Authorities store lists the top level certificates for trusted authorities e The My Certificates store contains the personal certificates which are used for identification e he Other Authorities store lists intermediate certificate authorities that help establish a chain of trust 3 To adda certificate or associated private key to the selected store tap Import To view more details of the selected certificate such as the expanded name or expiration date tap View To delete a certificate select it in the drop down list and tap Remove Tap OK for the settings to take effect 3 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Date Time Use the Date Time Properties window to change the date time and time zone information 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel and double tap the Date Time icon Date Time Properties OK Date Time
333. ues Note The default Hex digit keys are visible any time they are used As a security precaution after setting the key values for the network the digits are replaced with asterisks within the Encryption key fields If the associated access point is using an optional Passkey the active adapter WLAN profile is required to use one as well The Passkey is a plain text representation of the WEP keys displayed in the Encryption property window The Passkey provides an easy way to enter WEP key data without having to remember the entire 40 bit 10 character or 128 bit 26 character Hex digit string Tap Passkey to display the Passkey screen Enter an easy to remember 4 to 32 character string to be used as the WEP algorithm Click OK The access point transforms the Passkey string into a set of four WEP keys using MD5 algorithms and displays them in the WEP fields These are the new WEP keys for the adapter profile Once displayed in the WEP key fields the adapter profile behaves as if the keys were entered manually TKIP WPA Select this option for the client adapter to use Wireless Protected Access WPA via TKIP Manually enter the pre shared keys in the edit boxes Tap ClearKey to clear all previous keys and enter new key values Tap Passkey to display the Passkey screen Enter an easy to remember 8 to 63 character string Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 15 2 Select the P Config tab to configure the following mobile computer profil
334. ules There are two snap on modules e MSR snaps on to the mobile computer and adds mag stripe read capabilities e CAM snaps on to the mobile computer and is used to connect the cables to the mobile computer Both of the snap on modules use the same cables e AC line cord country specific and power supply charges the mobile computer e Auto charge cable charges the mobile computer using a vehicle s cigarette lighter e DEX cable connects the mobile computer to a vending machine e Serial cable adds serial communication capabilities e USB cable adds USB communication capabilities e Printer cable adds printer communication capabilities Accessories 7 5 Keypads The mobile computer has interchangeable modular keypads The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized applications Do not remove the keypad while the mobile computer is on and do not operate JN the mobile computer with the keypad detached Follow proper ESD precautions to avoid damaging the MMC or SD card CAUTION Proper ESD precautions include but are not limited to working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the operator is properly grounded Replacing the Keypad 1 Suspend the mobile computer 2 Remove the two keypad screws Slide the keypad down and lift up Screws EEN OO Go Q E 000000 9000008 000000 0000000 000000 a 8 B C QOQ 0
335. um24 LAN the facility must be set up with the equipment required to run the wireless LAN and the mobile computer must be properly configured Refer to the documentation that came with the Access Points APs for Instructions on setting up the required hardware The MC9000 G Network Adapter settings and Spectrum24 settings configure and monitor the wireless connection The Mobile Companion icon appears in the task tray and indicates mobile computer signal strength as follows Icon Status Excellent signal strength Very good signal strength Good signal strength Fair signal strength Poor signal strength Out of network range not associated ERE 6 4 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Mobile Companion The Mobile Companion utility is used to configure the mobile computer s wireless network settings The Mobile Companion utility starts automatically and appears as an icon on the task tray The status icon changes in real time to reflect the signal strength and availability of the adapter and the wireless network Double tap the S24 DS Settings icon or tap the task tray Mobile Companion icon to open the Mobile Companion menu Mobile Companion Sounds Images M e n U m P m Aw PC Link Terminal Status WLAN Profiles Find WLANs Options Mobile Companion Icons Figure 6 1 Mobile Companion Menu Spectrum24 Network Configuration 6 5 When the menu opens the user can select Status WLAN Profiles
336. um24 Network Configuration 6 29 Prevent Password Cache To prevent password caching edit the registry file using a text editor with the following changes 1 Change the LCachePwd value from 1 to 2 LCachePwd dword 2 2 Ensure that the UNAME and UPwd lines are commented out by putting a semicolon at the beginning of each line 3 After the changes are made use ActiveSync to copy the Spectrum24DS reg file overwriting the old file onto the mobile computer s Platform folder Then cold boot the mobile computer for the changes to take effect LEAP Usage After LEAP setup is complete the only noticeable difference is the password dialog box If the caching method selected requires a user name and password then they appear when required If the user name is an NT domain user the domain can be entered in the domain field if necessary not normally required 6 30 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Enterprise Level Wi Fi Protected Access The 3 9 3 wireless component set was developed to provide Enterprise Level Wi Fi Protected Access WPA with Full Authentication and associated Credential Caching based on the Meetinghouse AEGIS Client These features as well as earlier wireless features are available through either the Mobile Companion application see Mobile Companion on page 6 4 or through the Meetinghouse AEGIS security Client application It is strongly recommended that wireless profiles be created
337. user manual supplied to locate the serial ports eu 9 Upon connection synchronization occurs automatically Communications 4 13 USB Connection Setup 1 The USB communications setup can be used to set up to communicate with a Single Slot Serial USB Cradle MSR or a CAM 2 On the mobile computer double tap the Ct Panel icon and double tap Comm Settings to enter the Comm Settings window CtlPanel Example File Help MG Figure 4 11 Comm Settings Window 3 Confirm that the Comm port default value is set to USB If it is not set to USB then with Port highlighted use the left and right arrow gt buttons to set the value to USB 4 Tap OK to exit the Comm Settings window and tap Exit to exit the Control Panel window 5 Ensure that Activesync was installed on the host computer and a partnership was created see Installing ActiveSync on page 4 3 and Setting up a Partnership on page 4 4 4 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET 6 Start ActiveSync If it is not running on the host computer To start select Start Programs Microsoft ActiveSync 4 Microsoft ActiveSync L ES File View Tools Help Sune Shop al Detalle Explore Options WindowsCE Y cv Not connected Information Type Status Files Figure 4 12 ActiveSync Not Connected 7 Inthe ActiveSync window select File Connection Settings and ensure the selections shown in Figure 4 13 are m
338. uter Configuration 11 11 If one of the partitions being built is the ESSID a prompt appears requesting the ESSID value Deselect the HR High Rate check box when building ESSID images for a device with an FH radio Build ESSID Partition Enter ESSID MyESSID iw HR een Figure 11 6 Build ESSID Partition Window If one of the partitions being built is the Splash Screen a prompt appears requesting both the source Bitmap file and the destination HEX file A check is performed and if there are no errors the partition hex files are created If the build fails the hex files are not be created and TCM displays an error message Two of the most common reasons for a build failure are Files defined in the script can not be found This error can occur when the files referenced by the script are no longer stored on the development computer or the folders where they are stored were renamed The total amount of flash memory space required by the script exceeds the image size lo correct this reduce the number of files in the partition or increase the size of the partition see Defining Script Properties on page 11 7 for more information about setting the image size appropriately Sending the Hex Image Once the hex file is built it can be downloaded to the mobile computer To load the hex files on to the mobile computer 1 2 For downloads using a serial connection connect the mobile computer to the development computer
339. uter functions Table 5 3 lists the tests and the test descriptions 1 From the Series 9000 Demo window double tap Test Apps icon double tap Se f Testicon The Self Test window appears Touch Panel Batteries com Ports Memory Spectrum 24 Run Tests a One Time MES C Continuously write Log File Figure 5 13 Self Test Window Table 5 3 Self Test Descriptions Display Tests the display function Contrast Tests the display contrast function Note properly functioning color units will return the following error massage Device not support contrast levels Backlight Tests the display backlight function Key Pad Tests the keypad function Key Light Tests the keypad backlight function Trigger Pull the trigger or press the yellow scan button to test the trigger function Tap and hold the Trig1 Stg1 Trig1 Stg2 Trig2 Stg1 Trig2 Stg1 Trig3 Stg1 or Trig3 Stg2 buttons to test the software programed trigger sequences Scanner Tests the scan function Applications 5 19 Table 5 3 Self Test Descriptions Continued speaker Tests the speaker and beeper function with sample beeps Note properly functioning that do not have the optional wav file capability will return the following error message PlaySound Windows windmin wav failed error 00000000 if the Wave File Play button is tapped For these units use the Play Beeper button to test the beeper and speaker function Tests the optional
340. values are listed below the command Table 7 4 AT Command Table Description NEN DI Dial Dial Destrings LI i 1 L1 Jw xm A j IO EN iZ L lt l Wait for dial tone Modem waits for dial tone before dialing digits following W Wait for silence Modem waits for at least 5 seconds of silence in the call progress frequency band before continuing with next dial string parameter Accessories 7 39 Table 7 4 AT Command Table Continued PANAY S Description Specific pf Wait for credit card dialing tone before i continuing with the dial string LT Dial pause Modem pauses for a time specified by S8 before dialing NE the digits following HAN Return to command state Modem goes off hook and allows entering NEN additional AT commands Use H to go back to on hook seme pama nes mame ata NA asana era NN II O an 0 0 DOI IOMA EEE CN EI 0 p a qmm o OOO A CESEN Guard tone amp G lt value gt 2 Hr B212 Bell 212 1200 Rx 75 or 75Rx 1200 Tx 4 qom qm I 7 40 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 7 4 AT Command Table Continued BA arr Description Specific 32 9600 or 4800 ee OS NEED NEN AA 12000 9600 7200 4800 or 2400 Enable Disable Line Quality Monitor and Auto Retrain or Fall back Fall EE forward E lt value gt a nan aaa ri ay tasa Lt c Enable line quality monitor
341. versity Antenna Radio Link Rate Password select Diversity Antenna if dual antenna support is required Diversity improves communication in highly reflective environments Do not select diversity if a secondary antenna is not being used Using diversity in a single antenna application can cause poor wireless network performance Use the Radio Link Rate radio buttons to specify the data rate supported The mobile computer can use 1MB 2MB or both If Both 1MB and 2MB Support is selected the mobile computer defaults to a 1 Mbps data rate if a 2 Mbps data rate cannot be established opectrum24 FH settings has a password protection feature that can be turned on and off from the WLAN Adapter tab When the Spectrum24 FH program is initially launched the password is off default 6 38 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Password Protecting NCPA NCPA has a password protection feature that can be turned on and off from the WLAN Adapter tab When the NCPA program is initially launched the password is off default To create a password for the NCPA advanced pages 1 Tap Password from the WLAN Adapter tab The Change Password dialog box appears Change Password Current Password New Password Confirm Mew Password Figure 6 26 Change Password 2 Enter the case sensitive password 10 characters maximum in the Current Password field and tap OK 3 The NCPA advanced pages dialog box is enabled
342. very client and server in a TCP IP network requires an IP address which is either permanently assigned or dynamically assigned at startup A terminal emulation protocol commonly used on the Internet and TCP IP based networks It allows a user at a terminal or computer to log onto a remote device and run a program See Mobile Computer A program under DOS that ends its foreground execution to remain resident in memory to service hardware software interrupts providing background operation It remains in memory and may provide services on behalf of other DOS programs A terminal emulation emulates a character based mainframe session on a remote non mainframe terminal including all display features commands and function keys The MC9000 Series supports Terminal Emulations in 3270 5250 and V1220 GL 18 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET TFIP Tolerance Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TSR UPC UDP Visible Laser Diode VLD WAN Warm Boot WEP Trivial File Transfer Protocol A version of the TCP IP FIP File Transfer Protocol protocol that has no directory or password capability It is the protocol used for upgrading firmware downloading software and remote booting of diskless devices Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width See TCP IP See TFTP see Terminate and Stay Resident Universal Product Code A relatively
343. vices enabling the information to be synchronized on the mobile computer with the information on the host device using Activesync With the appropriate accessory and software the mobile computer can establish a number of connection types such as a serial connection a USB connection and an Ethernet connection For an Ethernet connection use the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle For a serial or USB connection use one of the accessories listed below e Single Slot Serial USB Cradle e Cable Adapter Module CAM e Magnetic Stripe Reader MSR This chapter provides information on installing the appropriate communication software and setting up the appropriate accessory to enable communication between the mobile computer and the host device For more information about the accessories available for the mobile computer Chapter 7 Accessories Installing Communication Software To successfully communicate with the various host devices Microsoft Activesync version 3 7 or higher must be installed on the host computer Installing ActiveSync Use ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher to synchronize the information on the mobile computer with the information on the host computer Changes made on the mobile computer or host computer appear in both places after synchronization 4 4 MG9000 6G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Activesync software e Allows the user to work with mobile computer compatible host applications on the host
344. w the charge status See Table 1 1 for charging indications The main battery usually fully charges in less than four hours Table 1 1 Mobile Computer LED Charge Indicators um e Off Mobile computer not in cradle CAM MSR mobile computer not placed correctly charger is not powered Fast Blinking Amber Error in charging check placement of the mobile computer Slow Blinking Amber Mobile computer is charging solid Amber Charging complete Note When the battery is initially inserted in the mobile computer the amber LED flashes once if the battery power is low or the battery is not fully inserted 1 12 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Spare Battery Charging The mobile computer has three accessories that can be used to charge spare batteries e Single Slot Serial USB Cradle e Four Slot Spare Battery Charger e UBC Adapter To charge a spare battery 1 Connect the charging accessory to the appropriate power source see Chapter 7 Accessories for setup 2 Insert the spare battery into the spare battery charging slot and gently press down on the battery to ensure proper contact 3 The battery starts to charge automatically The amber charge LED on the accessory lights to show the charge status see Chapter 7 Accessories for charging indications The battery usually fully charges in less than four hours A Short Battery Adapter is required to charge the MC9000 S spare battery in ei
345. y usa y Mobile Companion OK Mode Authentication Encryption 4 k Profile Name Default 502 11 ESSID 4101 Operating Mode Country usa Ce Channel fi Long preamble Infrastructure Mode Ad Hoc Mode Figure 6 3 Mode Tab Table 6 2 Mode Tab Fields IN Remp 0 Profile Name Populated with the name and WLAN identifier of the network connection The Profile Name can be changed Use the Profile Name field to enter the name of the mobile computer profile used to transmit with either an AP or another networked computer 902 11 ESSID Populated with the name and WLAN identifier of the network connection The ESSID is the 802 11 Extended Service Set Identifier The ESSID is 32 character maximum string identifying the WLAN The ESSID assigned to the mobile computer is required to match the AP ESSID for the mobile computer to communicate with the AP Operating Mode select the operating mode from the Operating Mode drop down list Infrastructure Select nfrastructure to enable the mobile computer to transmit and receive data with an AP Infrastructure is the mobile computer default mode when Mobile Companion initially appears Ad Hoc Select Ad Hoc to enable the mobile computer to form its own local network where mobile computers communicate peer to peer without APs using a shared ESSID select the Long preamble check box if the mobile computer and its profile are using a long preamble when
346. y temperature Status Tab The Status tab provides a visual indication of backlight contrast and LEDs Intensities of backlight are indicated by the size of the backlight bar The desktop emulator always displays the emulated terminal screen in color When testing an application targeted for a color terminal contrast APIs should not be used as they are NOT available on actual color terminals Co Desktop Emulator 12 15 Mill Emulator System Settings LO xj Emulator POTSO00 Gemini53keysplit stop Emulator Tool Embedded Visual C E zit Always on top Display BackLight E Contrast _ Key Light ra S NM OM GREEN RED FUNC SHIFT UNTL COMM Figure 12 10 Emulator Status Indications Table 12 6 Status Tab Functions os n Display backlight Indicates the BackLight setting Contrast Indicates the contrast setting Key Light Indicates the Key Light setting 12 16 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Using the Emulator Once the Emulator has been launched and is running it functions like the actual terminal see Starting the Emulator on page 12 3 User Inputs The Emulator uses both the development computer mouse and the keypad for user inputs Mouse Inputs The mouse cursor functions as a the stylus functions in the mobile computer It can be used for selecting items and entering information e Click Right click the mouse o
347. y used when the mobile computer is running the 3270 emulation software When the mobile computer is not running the 32 0 emulation software the 3270 keypad functions are the same as a 53 key keypad 2 14 MC9000 G Product Reference Guide for Embedded Windows CE NET Table 2 4 3270 Emulator Descriptions ge TO in Power red Powers the mobile computer on and off Used to reset the mobile computer see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 41 Green Red Dot Unassigned application function key See Appendix B Keypad Maps for mapping details scan yellow scan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger scroll Up and Down Moves up and down from one Item to another Increases decreases specified values scroll Left and Right Moves left and right from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Exits the current operation Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters SPACE BKSP Space and backspace functions Application These keys can be assigned to an application Function blue Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights and the o O F con appears on the taskbar see able 2 9 on page 2 26 Press and release the blue function key again to return to the normal keypad functions Operating the MC9000 G 2 15 Table 2 4 3270 Emulator Descriptio

Symbol 9000g Reference Guide 5443606a - Rose

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents